t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Syllabus of Mba Ktu 2016

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Programme
Under
APJ Abdul Kalam Technological University
SYLLABUS & COURSE PLAN
Trimester 1
April 2016
Page 1 of 16
Subjects and credits in TRIMESTER I
Exam Course Course Name L-T-P Internal End Exam Credits
Slot No. Marks Trimester Duration
Marks (hours)
11 Quantitative Techniques 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
12 Organizational Behaviour I 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
13 Managerial Economics 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
14 Business Communication 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
15 Accounting for Managers 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
16 Business and Society 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
17 Soft-skills I 0-2-0 20
18 Project 0-0-3
TOTAL 24-2-3 260 360 18
Page 2 of 16
FIRST TRIMESTER - SYLLABUS
Course
Year of
No. Course Name L-T-P Credits Introduction
11 Quantitative Techniques 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
This subject introduces the methods of statistical analysis for managerial decision making. The
subject will provide a concise review of probability, descriptive statistics, random variables, and
probability distributions. Application topics include statistical decision theory, confidence intervals,
hypothesis testing, simple and multiple regression, correlation analysis and analysis of variance.
Syllabus
Random variables, Descriptive Statistic, Probability Distributions and Estimation, Testing of

Hypothesis, Correlation and Regression Analysis
Expected Outcome
The successful completion of this course will impart the basic data analysis skills to the students.
This will enable students to model business problems and analyse them with the help of
fundamental statistical and theoretical backgrounds.
References
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Statistics for Management, Pearson Education, New Delhi
7th Edition, 2011.
2. Aczel A.D. and Sounderpandian J., Complete Business Statistics, 6th edition, Tata McGraw –
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
3. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Anderson D.R., Sweeney D.J. and Williams T.A., Statistics for Business and Economics, 11th
edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia, Singapore, 2012.
Page 3 of 16
COURSE PLAN
Hours % of marks
Unit Topics
allotted in final Exam.
I Random variables: Random experiment – outcomes - sample space 9 15

and events - definitions of probability (classical, relative frequency,
subjective, and axiomatic) - addition rule - conditional probability -
multiplication theorem – Bayes’ theorem
II Descriptive Statistics: Data presentation using tables & charts - 6 15

measures of central tendency - measures of dispersion – absolute
& relative measures – skewness - Karl Pearson's and moment
measures of Skewness – Kurtosis
First Internal Examination
III Probability Distributions and Estimation: Discrete and continuous 8 15

distributions - Binomial, Poisson & Normal distributions - sampling
techniques - sampling distribution of means and proportions -
central limit theorem – statistical inferences - estimation - point
and interval estimates for population parameters of large and
small samples – confidence interval - determining the sample size.
IV Testing of Hypothesis: Null & Alternative Hypotheses - level of 7 15

significance - Type I & Type II errors - small sample & large sample
tests - tests for quantitative & qualitative data - Hypothesis tests
for difference of means & proportions for large & small samples.
Second Internal Examination
IV One way & two way ANOVA for testing the difference of means of 6 15
more than two samples – chi-square test for several proportions,
association of attributes – goodness of fit test.
V Correlation and Regression Analysis: Correlation - different types of 9 25

correlation – Karl Pearson’s correlation coefficient - Spearman’s
Rank correlation coefficient – concurrent deviation method –
coefficient of determination - regression analysis - line of best fit -
least square method - business applications - multiple regression.
Use of statistical packages in hypothesis testing, correlation and
regression analysis
Final Examination
Page 4 of 16
Course
Year of
12 Organizational Behaviour I 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
The course focuses on managing individuals at work. The objective is to equip the students with an
essential knowledge base on behavioural dynamics of individuals with necessary models,, tools, and
techniques, for diagnosing, predicting and controlling human behaviour and to develop the basic
human relations skills as a prospective manager.
Syllabus
Fundamentals of Organizational Behaviour, Understanding Organizational Behaviour, Effectiveness

in organizations, Social systems and organizational culture, Understanding and Managing Individual
Behaviour, Job Design, Work and Motivation, Evaluation, Feedback and Rewards, Stress and
Counselling.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to enable the students to learn what
actions are appropriate for different situations and apply the theory in order to be effective leaders
in the context of organisational behaviour theories, models and concepts
References
1. Robbins, Judge & Sanghi, Organizational Behaviour, 12th Ed. Prentice Hall India
2. McShane, Glinow, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill
3. Don Hellriegel; John W. Slocum; Richard W. Woodman, Organizational Behavior, 8th Ed.,
Thomson South-Western
Page 5 of 16
COURSE PLAN
Unit Topics Hours % of

allotted marks
in final
Exam.
I Disciplines contributing to OB - Psychology, Sociology, Anthropology, Social 9 20
Psychology, Economics & Political Science Approaches to the study of OB -
Human Resource Approach, Contingency Approach, Productivity Approach,
and System Approach - Fundamental principles, theories and concepts in
organization design and development
II Understanding Organizational Behaviour - Fundamental Concepts, 6 15
Organizational processes, Organizational structure, Organizational Change
and Innovation processes - Effectiveness in organizations - Models of
Organizational Behaviour, Systems theory and time dimension of
effectiveness, Developing competencies, Limitations of Organizational
Behaviour, Continuing challenges
III Individual differences and work behaviour - Why individual differences are 15 30
important, The basis for understanding Work Behaviour, Individual
differences influencing Work Behaviour. Personality - Sources of personality
differences, Personality structure, Personality and Behaviour, Measuring
Personality Attitudes - The nature of Employee Attitudes, Effects of
Employee Attitudes, Studying Job satisfaction, Changing Employee Attitudes.
Perceptions, Attributions and Emotions - The perceptual process, Perceptual
grouping, Impression management, Emotions, Emotional Intelligence -
Motivation - Concept of Motivation, Content approaches, Process
approaches, Motivation and psychological contract
IV Managing Individuals at Work: Measuring personality attitudes; managing 5 10
employee attitudes Managing Teams at Work: Definition of Group - group
development- group structure - teams -Formal Organization and Informal
Groups and their interaction
IV Developing high performance teams - turning individuals into team players 4 10
developing interpersonal awareness - Johari Window- Transactional Analysis
- leadership - theories – developing leadership skills
V Managing Power, Politics and Conflict: Power - basis of power - power tactics 6 15
- Politics – consequences of political behavior - Conflict Management:
Different views of conflict - conflict process - levels of conflict - Constructive
and Destructive conflict - Conflict process - strategies for encouraging
constructive conflict - Conflict resolution strategies
Final Examination
Page 6 of 16
Course
Year of
13 Managerial Economics 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
Managerial economics is a prerequisite course for acquainting students with the various principles
of business decision making. This subject provides an introduction to the logic of marginal analysis,
the analysis and application of demand, cost analysis, and elements of demand and supply. The
subject also provides an introduction to the determination of aggregate income and employment
with an analysis of fiscal and monetary policy. Policy issues relating to overall aggregate demand
management will be discussed. It will create awareness on the micro and macroeconomic
environment and will help to increase decision making skills of the graduates.
Syllabus
Basic Concepts in Managerial Economics, Demand Analysis, production and cost of production,
Market Structure and Pricing, Profit, break-even analysis, Budget and Basic Budgeting Concepts
Expected Outcome
The successful completion of the course, the students will have fundamental knowledge in the
economic aspects of demand, pricing, and production. The candidates will be able to analyse
business systems in terms of the economies it creates to firms. The course will enable them to
become efficient managerial decision makers when economic aspects play important role.
References
1. Yogesh, Maheswari, Management Economics,PHI learning,NewDelhi,2012
2. D.M. Mithani,Managerial Economics, 5/e, Himalaya Publishing House,Mumbai,2011

3. Geethika, Ghosh & Choudhury, Managerial Economics, 2/e, McGraw Hill. 2011
4. David K.H. Begg, Rudiger Dornbusch, Stanley Fischer, Economics, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.
2008
5. Uma Kapila, Indian Economy since Independence,Accademic Foundation,Gaziyabadh, 2011
6. Koutsoyiannis, Modern Micro Economics, 2/e, Macmillan Press Ltd. 2003
Page 7 of 16
COURSE PLAN
Unit Topics Hours % of marks

I Basic Concepts in Managerial Economics: Definitions, concepts, role of 6 15
managerial economist in business decision making.
Demand Analysis: Demand curve and Demand function, laws of demand,
elasticity of demand and its estimation, Total and Marginal Revenue,
Classification of goods based on income elasticity of demand, Price
Elasticity, Income Elasticity and Cross Elasticity, Demand forecasting and
forecasting methods.
II Production and Cost of Production: Production function, cost and output 9 20
relationship, cost function in the short run and in the long run, cost
concepts, practical applications of cost functions. Marginal Costing and
applications. Indifference Curves, ISO-Quants & ISO-Cost line. Cost
volume Profit analysis: economies of scale, economies of scope,
economies and dis-economies of production, business cycle and its
implications.
III Market Structure and Pricing: Meaning, perfect competition, 6 15
monopolistic competition, monopoly, oligopoly, cartel, types of cartels.
Limit Price Theories of J.S Bain, Sylos-Labni, Behavioral model of Cyrit
and March, managerial theories of firm, Baumol's Sales Revenue
Maximisation, O. Williamson's model on managerial enterprise, Marri's
model of balanced growth, Break even analysis and its implications. Use
of a case discussion will enhance the understanding of the students
about these topics.
IV Profit: Determinants of Short-term & Long-term profits. Classification – 9 20
Measurement of Profit. Break Even Analysis – Meaning, Assumptions,
Determination of BEA, Limitations, Uses of BEA in Managerial decisions
V Budget and Basic Concepts: Meaning, basic concepts, plan and non-plan 15 30
expenditure, fiscal deficit, revenue deficit, inflation and types, bank rate,
SLR, CRR, repo, reverse repo, market operations, quantitative credit
control, exchange rate management, monetary fiscal policy and practices
in India, Quantity theory of money, Fischer – Keynes - Triedman - Tobin
Theories. A case discussion is desirable in these topics.
End Semester Examination
Page 8 of 16
Course
Year of
14 Business Communications 3-0-1 3 2015
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable students to develop proficiency in the mechanics of writing
and oral communication. The course orients at helping the learner improve their English proficiency
with specific reference to the organizational communication parlance.
Syllabus
Oral Communication, Written Communication, Crisis Management and Negotiation, Business

Letters and Reports, Case Method of Learning.
Expected Outcome
• Be familiar with the basic concepts and mechanics of Oral and Written
Communication.
• Students develop English proficiency and paves way for career growth and better
employment prospects.
• Learners develop effective crisis management skills juxtaposed with Negotiation
tactics and elements of Behaviour and conversation control.
References
1. Chaturvedi P. D, & Mukesh Chaturvedi, Business Communication: Concepts, Cases And

Applications, 2/e, Pearson Education, 2011
2. Mary Ellen Guffey, Business Communication: Process and Product, 3/e, Cengage Learning,
2002.
3. Rayudu C. S, Communication, 9/e,Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.
4. Penrose, Rasberry, Myers, Advanced Business Communication, 5/e, Cengage Learning, 2004.
5. Madhukar R. K, Business Communication, 2/e, Vikas Publishing House, 2010.
Page 9 of 16
COURSE PLAN
Hours % of marks
Unit Topics
I Introduction: Meaning & Definition, Role, Classification – Purpose of 8 20
communication – Communication Process – Characteristics of
successful communication – Importance of communication in
Organizations– Communication structure in organization – Application
of principles of Communication in conflict resolution, Crisis
Management & Negotiation - Communication in a cross-cultural
setting
II Oral Communication: Meaning – Principles of successful oral 7 20
communication – Barriers to communication – Conversation control –
Reflection and Empathy: two sides of effective oral communication.
Modes of Oral Communication. Listening as a Communication Skill,
Non-verbal communication.
III Written Communication: Purpose of writing – Clarity in writing – 7 15
Principles of effective writing – Approaching the writing process
systematically: The 3X3 writing process for business communication:
Pre writing – Writing – Revising – Specific writing features – Coherence
– Electronic writing process.
IV Business Letters and Reports: Introduction to business letters – Types 8 20
of Business Letters - Writing routine and persuasive letters – Positive
and Negative messages Writing Reports: Purpose, Kinds and
Objectives of reports – Organization & Preparing reports, short and
long reports Writing Proposals: Structure & preparation. Writing;
Meetings – Planning meetings – objectives – participants – timing –
venue of meetings. Meeting Documentation: Notice, Agenda, and
Resolution & Minutes.
V Case Method of Learning: Understanding the case method of learning 15 25
– Different types of cases – Difficulties and overcoming the difficulties
of the case method – Reading a case properly (previewing, skimming,
reading, scanning) – Case analysis approaches (Systems, Behavioural,
Decision, Strategy) – Analysing the case – Dos and don’ts for case
preparation – Discussing and Presenting a Case Study
Final Examination
Page 10 of 16
Course
Year of
15 Accounting for Managers 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the accounting practices and to
develop analytical and interpretative skills necessary to take managerial decisions
Syllabus
Introduction, Cost, Managerial and Financial accounting, meaning of company, maintenance of book
of accounts, analysis of financial statements, fund flow and cash flow statements, ratio analysis,
marginal cost analysis techniques
Expected Outcome
After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to understand the accounting
practices, able to prepare and analyse financial statements to help managerial decision making.
References
1. Charles T. Horngren, Gary L. Sundem, William O. Stratton, Dave Burgstahler, Jeff Schatzberg,
Introduction to Management Accounting, 14/e, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008
2. Gupta R. L. and Radhaswamy M., Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand Publishers, New Delhi
3. Maheshwari S. N., Accounting for Management, 3/e, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi,
2012
4. Jain S. P. and Narang K. L., Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi
5. Shashi K. Gupta and R. K. Sharma, Management Accounting, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi
Page 11 of 16
COURSE PLAN
Hours % of marks
Unit Topics
I Introduction to Accounting: Introduction to Financial, Cost and 5 10
Management Accounting- Generally accepted accounting principles,
Conventions and Concepts - Mechanics of Accounting - Double entry
system of accounting.
II Meaning of Company - Maintenance of Books of Account-Statutory 10 20
Books- Profit or Loss Prior to incorporation- Final Accounts of Company
- Profit & Loss Account, Profit & Loss Appropriation account and
Balance Sheet of companies, Policies related with depreciation,
inventory and intangible assets like copyright, trademark, patents and
goodwill.
III Analysis of financial statement: Ratio Analysis- solvency ratios, 10 25
profitability ratios, activity ratios, liquidity ratios, market capitalization
ratios - Inter firm comparison - Common Size Statement - Comparative
Statements and Trend Analysis.
IV Analysis of Financial Statements: Funds Flow Statement – Meaning - 5 15
Concept of Gross and Net Working Capital - Preparation of Schedule of
Changes in Working Capital -
IV Preparation of Funds Flow Statement and its analysis - Cash Flow 5 10
Statement - Various cash and non-cash transactions - flow of cash -
preparation of Cash Flow Statement and its analysis.
V Introduction, Meaning of Cost, Objective of Costing, Methods of 10 20
Costing, Technique of Costing, Classification of Cost, Elements of Cost,
Statement of Cost Sheet, Standard costing- organization and
establishing a standard costing system, Variance analysis - classification
of variances, material cost, labour cost, overhead cost and sales
variances. Disposition of variances. Marginal Cost - Marginal Costing -
applications of Marginal Costing - advantages of Marginal Costing -
break-even analysis - CVP Analysis - margin of safety - key factor.
Final Examination
Page 12 of 16
Course
Year of
16 Business and Society 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
The objectives for this course are the following:
1. To develop broader and more complete understanding of the business and society relationship
2. To help the student perceive and understand the importance of sound business ethics practices
in the effective functioning of organizations.
3. To comprehend major stakeholder groups which interact with business organizations and the
kinds of expectations they may hold with respect to their role in business enterprise and
society.
4. To understand major corporate social responsibilities of business:
5. Impact of the human activities on the environment
Syllabus
Business Environment, Economic Growth, CSR, Public private Partnerships, Privatization,

Environmental Management, Sustainable Development
Expected Outcome
The successful completion of this course will impart an understanding of the relationship between
business and society. This will enable students to perceive sound business ethics and social
responsibilities of business.
References
1. John Steiner, George Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
13/e,McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2011
2. John F. Steiner, Business, Government, and Society: A Managerial Perspective, Text and Cases
12/e, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2008.
3. Francis Cherunilam, Business and Government, HPH, 2013.
4. Fernando A. C, Corporate Governance: principles, policies and practices, 2/e, Pearson Edn.,
India, 2011.
5. Ghosh B. N, Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2011.
6. Bala Krishnamurthy, Environmental Management: Text and Cases, PHI, New Delhi.
7. Arindita Basak, Environmental Studies, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
8. Justin Paul, Business Environment -Text and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi,
2010
Page 13 of 16
COURSE PLAN
% of
Hours marks
Unit Topics
allotted In final
Exam.
I Roles of Business, Government, and Society: Interdependence and Conflict, 9 15
Regulation of Business, Functions of State; Economic roles of government;
Government and legal environment; Poverty, Inequality and Economic
Growth: Industrial Development, Rural- Urban Dynamics, Population and
Development, Finance for Development
II Business in a Global Environment: Business as Blending of People 7 15
Technology and Ethical Behaviour, Achieving Business Success through
Social Responsibilities. Trade and Development, State and the Market,
Privatization and Regulation, Institutions and Growth.
III Public Private Partnerships: The Rationale for Public Private Partnerships, 10 25
Different Kinds of Public Private Partnerships with a special emphasis on the
Build Operate and Transfer Model (BOT). Issues in Regulation that come
about with privatization, Pricing mechanisms available to a regulator to
ensure universal access and efficiency, Discussion of the privatization
experience in different sectors, water, electricity, telecommunication, and
railways with a special emphasis on India.
III Coping with Global Competition, Conflict with Nation States. Non- 8 15
Governmental organizations (NGO) - impact on Indian rural development,
education and charity. Types and nature of social responsibilities, CSR
principles and strategies, models of CSR, Best practices of CSR, Need of CSR,
Indian perspective
IV Environmental Management - Definition, scope, importance and need - 5 15
Concept of Ecosystem: Kinds of Resources: Renewable and Non Renewable
resources- forests, water, mineral, food, energy, land resources - Role and
Impact of Humankind: Population and development- pollution-definition-
kinds-effects-climate change
V Sustainable Development: Concept, principles- social, economic and 6 15
environmental dimensions- hurdles, Indicators-Millennium Development
Goals- Environment Management Systems: EMS- planning, implementation
– environmental audit- environmental labeling- insight into current
developments in energy conservation-3Rs
Final Examination
Page 14 of 16
Course
Year of
17 Soft Skills I 0-2-0 0 2015
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable students have a basic knowledge of the recent
developments in Information technology and its application in effective communication. The course
also emphasize on personal grooming and development with due accentuation to soft skills
development to transform the learners to employment ready youth.
Syllabus
Personal Grooming & Development, Presentation and Negotiation Skills, Levels of Public Interaction
Expected Outcome
1. Enhancement of the holistic development of students and improvement of their employability

skills.
2. To develop inter personal skills and be an effective goal oriented team player.
3. To develop professionals with idealistic, practical and moral values.
4. To develop communication and problem solving skills.
5. To re-engineer attitude and understand its influence on behavior.
References
1. Penrose, Rasberry, Myers, Advanced Business Communication, 5/e, Cengage Learning, 2004.
2. Lehman, DuFrene, Sinha, BCOM, 2/e, Cengage Learning,2012
3. Madhukar R. K, Business Communication, 2/e, Vikas Publishing House.
Page 15 of 16
COURSE PLAN
% of marks
Hours
Unit Topics in final
allotted
(T3) Exam.
I Self-Management Self Evaluation-Self Discipline-Self Criticism- 4 2
Recognition of one’s own limits and deficiencies - Independency-
Self Awareness- Attitude: Factors influencing Attitude, Challenges
and lessons from Attitude.
II Goal Setting : Wish List, SMART Goals, Blue print for success, Short 3 6
Term, Long Term, Life Time Goals
III Listening Skills : Listening to specific Information, identifying main 3 6
issues, seeing beyond surface meanings
IV Ethics and Etiquette-Business Ethics-Etiquette in social as well as 4 6
Office settings-Email etiquette-Telephone Etiquette
V Presentation Skills – Book Reviews and Summary writing 8 10
Final Examination
Page 16 of 16
Programme
Under
Trimester 2
April 2016
Page 1 of 17
Subjects and Credits in Trimester 2
Course Course Name L-T-P Internal End Exam Credits
No. Marks Trimester duration
Marks (Hrs.)
21 Organizational Behaviour II 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
22 Macro Economics 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
23 Marketing Management I 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
24 Operations Management 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
25 Financial Management I 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
26 Business Law 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
27 Soft-Skills II 0-2-0 20 - - -
28 Project 0-0-3 - - - -
Total 24-2-3 260 360 - 18
Page 2 of 17
SECOND TRIMESTER SYLLABUS
Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of

No. Introduction
21 Organizational Behaviour II 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
The course focuses on managing teams at work and the organization system as a whole.
The objective is to understand how individuals, groups and whole organizations work
together more effectively within the increasing pace of corporate change, dramatic
restructuring and downsizing and advanced global competition.
Syllabus
Group Behaviour and Interpersonal Influence, Organizational Processes, Organizational
Design, Change and Innovation, Emerging Aspects of Organizational Behaviour.
Expected Outcome
• Apply problem solving and critical thinking abilities to analyse the kinds of choices
available for developing alternative organisational behaviour approaches in the
workplace
• Form an appreciation of the complexities and uncertainties of organisational
behaviour by examining your own role in the light of experience of real-time
problem settings
• Demonstrate a developmental approach to personal and key skills of planning,
review and feedback and verbal communication
References
1. Aswathappa, K. Organizational Behavior. Himalaya Publishing House, 2007.
2. Berg, Green. Behavior in Organizations. New Delhi: Pearson, 2013.
3. Chandran, Jit S. Organizational Behavior. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House, Third Edition.
4. David, Johnson J. Organizational Communication Structure. Ablex Publishing, 1993.
5. Dwivedi, R. S. Human Relations & Organizational Behavior: A Global Perspective. Delhi: Macmillan
India, 2001.
6. Luthans, Fred. Organisation Behaviour. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
7. McShane, Steven Lattimore, Mara Olekalns and Tony Travaglioni. Organizational Behavior: Emerging
Knowledge, Global Insights. McGraw Hill, 2012.
8. Newstorm, John W and Keith Davis. Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work. New York:
McGraw-Hill, 2014.
9. Poertner, Shirley and Karen Massetti Miller. The art of giving and receiving feedback. Coastal
Training Technologies, 1996.
10. Robins, Stephen P. Organization Behaviour. New Delhi: Pearson Education, 2012.
11. Sanghi, Seema. Essentials of Organisational Behaviour. New Delhi: Pearson, 2010.
12. Sekaran, Uma. Organizational Behavior. New Delhi: McGraw-hill, 2004.
13. Werner, David. Managing Company-wide Communication. Chapman & Hall, 1995.
Page 3 of 17
Course Plan
% of marks
Hours
Unit Topics in Trimester
allotted
Exam
I Social systems and organizational culture - Understanding a Social 7 20
System, Social Culture, Role, Status, Organizational culture,
Influencing culture change, Sustaining the culture, Characteristics
of effective socialization
II Managing the Organization System: Effects of organization 10 20
culture on employee performance - creating and sustaining
organization culture - Management of Change: forces responsible
for change - resistance to change overcoming resistance to
change - planned change – approaches to manage organization
change -OD inventions- creating a culture for change - Learning
Organizations
III Empowerment and Participation- The nature of empowerment 6 10
and Participation- How participation works- Programs for
participation-Important considerations in participation- Assertive
Behaviour: Interpersonal Orientations- Facilitating smooth
relations- Stroking
IV Managing misbehaviour - The emergence in Management of the 9 20
study of misbehaviour, Selected misbehaviours; work stress and
its management - Stress and Counselling - What is stress?, Stress
model, Work stressors, Stress outcomes, Stress moderators,
Stress prevention and management,
IV Employee counselling, Types of counselling-Ethical decision 6 10
making in organisations: Factors that inhibit or facilitate ethical
decision making in organizations, Steps to ensure ethical decisions
V Global implications of organizational behavior: International 7 20
setting for the management criteria - planning, organizing,
staffing, controlling and leading; Cultural influences on
international negotiations; managing multi-cultural teams;
Organisational structure that connects organizational
departments, functions and geography to achieve organizational
goals; Impacts of globalization on organizational culture
Trimester Examination
Page 4 of 17
No. Introduction
22 Macro Economics 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
This subject provides the macro economic environment at national as well as global level for
managing business. The subject also provides an introduction to the determination of aggregate
income and employment with an analysis of fiscal and monetary policy. Policy issues relating to
overall aggregate demand management will be discussed.
Syllabus
Indian Economy and Business environment - Political and legal, economic, technological,
International Business environments, Globalization and Indian business environment, Meauring the
economy, business cycles, inflation, national income, economic and monetary policies. Industrial
policies and structure, industry and inter-industry analysis.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students will acquire knowledge about the linkages and functioning
of macro-economic variables like aggregate income, aggregate demand and sup-ply, savings,
investment and employment. They also will learn about aggregate output and price levels and
general equilibrium, money, credit and dynamics of inflation, national in-come and sectoral
contributions, business environment and the global scenarios.
References
1. Abel, Andrew B, Ben Bernanke and Dean Croushore. Macro Economics. Pearson, 2013.
2. Agarwal, Vanita. Macro Economics: Theory and Policy. Pearson Education India, 2010.
3. Bedi, Suresh. Business Environment. Excel Books, 2005.
4. Datt, Ruddar and KPM Sundharam. Indian Economy. S Chand, 2013 (70th Edition).
5. Femando, A C. Business Environment. Pearson, 2011.
6. Hall, Robert E and David H Papell. Macro Economics: Economic Growth, Fluctuations and Policy,
Viva Books Private Limited, 2010.
7. Hill, Charles WL and Arun Kumar Jain. International Business: Competing in the Global Market-
place. Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
8. Kennedy, M and Maria John. Macro Economic Theory. PHI, 2011.
9. Leontief, Wassily. Structure of American Economy. Oxford University Press, 1951.
10. Mankiw, N Gregory. Principles of Macroeconomics. Cengage Learning, 2015.
11. Misra, SK and VK Puri. Economic Environment of Business (With Case Studies). Himalaya
Publish-ing House, 2012.
12. Paul, Justin. Business Environment: Text and Cases. Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
13. Vaish, M. C. Macro Economic Theory. Vikas Publishing House, 2009.
14. Wetherly, Paul and Dorron Otter. The Business Environment: Themes and Issues in a Globalizing
World. OUP Oxford, 2014.
Page 5 of 17
Course Plan
allotted in Trimester
Exam
I Indian Economy and Business environment: Nature and scope, Structure 7 15
of the Business Environment- Internal and external environment Political
and legal environment: Overview, philosophies, political system, judiciary
Constitution of India Economic environment: Overview, Nature of Indian
economy, Features of Indian economy, Changes in recent times Socio-
cultural environment: Socio-cultural factors affecting business
II Globalization and Indian business environment: Meaning and 8 15
implications, phases, Globalization impact on Indian economy across
sectors, Modes of entry strategies India’s foreign trade policies: Recent
developments, Global outsourcing, MNCs and FDIs in retail,
infrastructure, pharma, insurance, banking & finance, and automobile;
Impact of WTO on India’s foreign trade Technological environment:
Technology and development, Integrating technology with business,
India and global knowledge market
III International Business Environment: Review of global economy, The 6 15
global recession, Business environment in developed and developing
countries International trade theories GATT and WTO: Agreements and
implications International cultural aspects: Values and norms, religion
and ethics, language, education, impact of cultural differences in
business
IV Measuring the economy: Basic economic concepts, Open and closed 8 20
economies, Primary, secondary and tertiary sectors and their
contribution to the economy, SWOT analysis of the Indian economy,
Measuring GDP and GDP growth rate, Components of GDP Business
Cycle: Features, Phases, Economic time series, Economic indicators,
Correlation, persistence, coherence Inflation: Types, Measurement,
Kinds of price indices Employment and unemployment rates:
Measurement National income: Estimates, Trends, Measurement,
Problems in measuring National income
Page 6 of 17
IV Industrial policies and structure: Leontief’s inter-industry analysis, 7 15
Planning, Problems in industrial development during the plan period,
classification of industries based on ownership, Industrial policies,
Industrial strategy for the future, New industrial policy 1991 Structure of
Indian Industry: Public and private sector enterprises, Objectives of PSUs,
Performance and short-comings, Private sector - growth, problems and
prospects, SSI - Role of Indian economy, Disinvestments in Indian public
sector units since 1991 Industry analysis: Textiles, Electronics,
Automobile, FMCG, Telecom and Pharma sectors
V Economic Policies: Privatization-problems and prospects Fiscal policy: 8 20

Objectives, instruments, Union budget, Reforms-Rajah Chelliah
Committee Recommendations, Taxes, Role of Government Monetary
Policy: Money, Measures of money supply, Monetary system in India,
Monetary policy -Tools for credit control, Structure of the banking
system, RBI and its functions, Banking structure reforms - Narasimham
Committee recommendations
Page 7 of 17
Course No Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of
Introduction
23 Marketing Management I 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to equip the students with the concepts and practices of modern
marketing and to provide the understanding of different marketing processes for an effective
decision making. The course also aims to develop the students’ skills in applying the analytic
perspectives, decision tools, and concepts of marketing to decisions involving segmentation,
targeting and positioning; product offering; pricing; distribution channels and marketing
communications
Syllabus
Introduction to Marketing Management, Marketing environment, Strategic Marketing Planning,

Consumer Behaviour, Segmenting ,Targeting, Positioning and Branding, Life cycle Strategies, Product
Decisions, Pricing Decisions.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with the basic concepts and
components of the marketing management and to be knowledgeable in marketing principles and
thus enable them to make marketing decisions.
References
1. Arunkumar and NMeenakshi. MarketingManagement.Vikas Publishing, 2011.

2. Etzel,MJ, BJWalker andWilliam J Stanton. Marketing (Fourteenth Edition).McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. Evans, Joel R and Barry Berman. Marketing in the 21st Century.Cengage Learning, 2010.
4. Karunakaran, K.MarketingManagement (Text and Cases). Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.
5. Kotler, Philip, et al. MarketingManagement: A South Asian Perspective. Pearson, 2012.
6. Lamb, CharlesW, et al. Marketing. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
7. Masterson, Rosalind and David Pickton. Marketing: An Introduction. Sage Publications, 2014.
8. Neelamegham, S.Marketing in India: Text and Cases (4/e). Vikas Publishing House, 2012.
9. Panda, TapanK.MarketingManagement: Text and Cases Indian Context. Excel Books India,
2009.
10. Pride, William M and OC Ferrel. Marketing: Planning, Implementation and Control. Cengage
Learning, 2011.
11. Ramaswamy, VS and S Namakumari. MarketingManagement: Global Perspective, Indian
Context. Maxmillan Publishers, 2009.
12. Saxena, Rajan. MarketingManagement (Fourth Edition).TataMcGraw Hill, 209.
13. Shahajan, S. Applied Case Studies inMarketing. Primus Books, 2011.
Page 8 of 17
Course Plan – MARKETING MANAGEMENT - I
Unit Topics Hours % of marks in
allotted Trimester
Exam
I Introduction: Concept - nature and scope of marketing - evolution - 8 20
Marketing vs selling concept – Consumer need, want and demand
concepts Marketing environment: Micro and macro environment
of marketing – marketing challenges in the globalized economic
scenario
II Consumer Behaviour: Consumer and business markets – buying 6 15
motives – stages involved in buying decision process - factors
influencing buying decision – types of consumer buying decisions –
organizational buying vs household buying – changing pattern of
consumer behavior
FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION
III Market segmentation, targeting, positioning and branding. 8 25
Segmentation – Meaning, factors influencing segmentation,
market aggregation, basis for segmentation, segmentation of
consumer and industrial markets.
Targeting – Meaning, basis for identifying target consumers, target 8 10
market strategies. Positioning – Meaning, Product differentiation
strategies, tasks involved in positioning Branding – Concepts of
branding, brand types, brand equity, branding strategies
SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION
IV Marketing decisions, Product Decisions: Concept of product - 8 10
product line and product mix - new product development-
diffusion process - Product Lifecycle – product mix strategies,
merchandise planning and strategies - product vs strategies
V Pricing Decisions: - Pricing concepts, factors influencing price 7 20
decisions - pricing strategies: value based, cost based, market
based, new Packaging / Labeling: Packaging as a marketing tool,
role of labeling in packaging product pricing - Price skimming &
penetration pricing
TRIMESTER EXAMINATION 45
Page 9 of 17
No. Introduction
24 Operations Management 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
This subject aims to impart to the students:
• Ability to analyze the manufacturing operations of a firm

• Learn to understand and apply sales and operations planning, MRP and lean manufacturing
concepts
• Deeper understanding on quality management tools for process improvement
Syllabus
Scope of Operations Management, Evolution of OM, productivity Management, Forecasting -

features of good forecast - classification of forecasting techniques, inventory management, Capacity
Planning, Design capacity and Effective capacity, Location Planning, World Class Manufacturing
Concepts, MRP, MRP II, quality concepts.
Expected Outcome
After the successful completion of the course the students will have the ability to analyze
manufacturing operations of a firm, understand and apply sales and operations planning, understand
supply chain operations and the basic understanding on process improvement techniques.
References
1. Adam, Everette E and Ronald J Ebert. Production and Operations Management: Concepts,
Models, and Behavior. PHI, 2010.
2. Aswathappa, K and Sridhara Bhat. Production and Operations Management. Himalaya
Publishing House, 2010.
3. Bozarth, Cecil. Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management (3/e). Pearson,
2011.
4. Chase, Richard B. Operations Management for Competitive Advantage. Tata McGraw Hill,
2004.
5. Chunawala, S A. Basics of Production and Operations Management. Himalaya Publishing
House, 2001.
6. Finch, Byron J. Operations Now: Supply Chain Profitability and Performance. McGraw Hill,
2007.
7. Gaither, Norman G and Greg Frazier. Operations Management. Cengage Learning, 2002.
8. Garg, Ajay K. Production and Operations Management. Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
9. Hill, Terry. Operations Management. Palgrave Macmillan, 2006.
10. Kachru, Upendra. Production and Operations Management. Excel Books, 2007.
11. Mahadevan, B. Operations Management: Theory and Practice. Pearson Education India, 2010.
12. Russell, Robert S and Bernard W Taylor. Operations Management: Along the Supply Chain
(6/e). Wiley India, 2009.
13. Stevenson, William J. Operations Management. McGraw Hill, 2011.
Page 10 of 17
Course Plan
Exam
I Introduction to Operations Management: Production-systems concept, 7 20
transformation process, difference between products and services, 5P’s
and 9M’s of OM, Operations as service.
Evolution of OM - Craft, Mass and Lean Production. Operations
strategy: Operations strategy in manufacturing,
Operations strategy in services
Process Analysis: Process Flowcharting, Types of process,
process performance metrics
II Employee productivity: Productivity and the organization, variables 8 15
affecting labour productivity, Capacity- capacity utilization Work study-
Method study-work measurement techniques
Quality: Total Quality Management Defined Malcolm
Baldrige National Quality Award, Quality Specifications,
Costs of Quality, Continuous Improvement, SPC Tools,
Benchmarking, Fail-safing
ISO 9000, six sigma-Mumbai Dabbawallas
III Materials management-Stores management, maintenance 9 15
management, Inventory management, types of inventory, classification
- ABC analysis, VED analysis, FSN analysis, HML analysis, Inventory costs,
inventory models - EOQ, safety stocks, Re-order point, Problems in
Basic EOQ model.
IV Managerial use of Break-even analysis and make or buy 6 15
Decisions Facility planning and plant layout, cellular manufacturing
Supply Chain strategy: Elements of supply chain - Measuring supply
chain performance, bull whip effect, outsourcing, mass customisation
V Master Production Scheduling (MPS), Materials Requirement Planning 8 20
(MRP), Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II), Rough Cut Capacity
Planning (RCCP), ERP. Contributions of Japanese Manufacturing -
Kanban, Kaizen, Poka Yoke, JIT, 5S - TPS - Lean Manufacturing
V World Class Manufacturing: Principles of WCM- Computer Integrated 7 15

Manufacturing, Flexible Manufacturing
Systems, Group Technology and Cellular Manufacturing,
Quick Response manufacturing, concurrent engineering
Page 11 of 17
Introduction
25 Financial Management I 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
The objectives of this course are to familiarise with fundamentals of financial management in an
organization, Time value of money, risk Management, various sources of financing business
investment, cost of capital and investment decisions
Syllabus
Introduction, meaning and goals, concept of time value, risk & return, various sources of financing
business investments, concepts of cost of capital and criteria for investment decisions
Expected Outcome
The course expects that the students will become proficient in the following areas of financial
Management
• Basic functions and goals of financial management
• Risk & return of projects
• Sources of finance
• Investment decision making criteria
References
1. Brealey, Richard A and Stewart C Myers. Principles of Corporate Finance. McGraw Hill India,
2012.
2. Brigham, Eugene F and Joel F Houston. Fundamentals of Financial Management (13/e).
Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. Chandra, Prasanna Financial Management, Theory & Practice. Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
4. Damodaran, Aswath. Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice (4/e). Wiley India, 2012.
5. Gitman, Lawrence J and Chad J Zutter. Principles of Managerial Finance (14/e). Pearson
Education, 2007.
6. Kapil, Sheeba. Financial Management. Pearson Education India, 2010.
7. Khan, M Y and P K Jain. Financial Management: text, problems and cases. New Delhi: Tata
Mc-Graw Hill, 2013
8. Kishore, Ravi M. Financial Management: Comprehensive Text Book with Case Studies (7/e).
Taxmann Allied Services, 2009.
9. Kothari, Rajesh and Bobby Dutta. Contemporary Financial Management. Mcmillan
Publishers, India, 2005.
10. Pandey, IM. Financial Management. Vikas Publishing House, 2009.
11. Reddy, G Sudarsana. Financial Management. Himalaya Publishing House, 2011.
12. Ross, Stephen, Randolf Westerfield and Bradford Jordan. Fundamentals of Corporate
Finance, McGraw Hill, 2010.
13. Sharan, Vyuptakesh. Fundamentals of Financial Management. Pearson Education, 2012.
14. Srivastava, Rajiv and Anil Misra. Financial Management. Oxford University Press India, 2011.
15. Vanhome, James C. Financial Management and Policy (12/e). Pearson Education, 2002.
16. Vanhorne, James C and John M Wachowicz (Jr). Fundamentals of Financial Management,
(13/e).Pearson Education, 2010.
Page 12 of 17
Course Plan
exams
1 Business Finance: Meaning and scope - objectives of financial 6 15%

management - Financial goal - profit maximization and wealth
maximization - finance functions – role of finance manager -
interface of financial management with other functional areas
2 Concept of value and return - Time Value of money: Future value of 9 20%
single cash flow & annuity, present value of a single cash flow,
annuity & perpetuity, Simple interest & compound interest, capital
recovery & loan amortization
Risk & Risk management, Definition, Computation, Types of risk,
Beta , Computation of beta, Application of Beta
3 Sources of Finance - Primary market, Secondary market - long term, 6 15%
short term, and medium term funds – equity shares - preference
shares - debentures and bonds - retained earnings - institutional
borrowings - public deposits- lease financing - venture capital
investing – commercial paper -Warrants - Angel investing - Private
equity, Warrants and convertibles
Cost of capital: Basic concepts - Cost of debenture capital, cost of 9 15%
4 preferential capital, cost of term loans, cost of equity capital
(Dividend discounting and CAPM model), Cost of retained earnings,
methods of computing cost of capital - Weighted average cost of
capital (WACC) and Marginal cost of capital.
5 Nature and types of investment decisions - capital budgeting process 15 35%
- selection of projects - estimation of cash flows - investment
evaluation techniques - payback and discounted payback period -
accounting rate of return NPV - IRR - capital rationing - project
selection under rationing
Capital Budgeting decisions under risk
Page 13 of 17
No. Introduction
26 Business Law 4-0-0 3 2015
Course Objectives
This subject provides an analysis of substantive law relevant to business. Topics include contracts,
agency arrangements, credit transactions, and the relationship between the firm and its competitors,
stockholders, customers, and other groups. The current legal scenario enveloping the Labour Laws,
IPR, IT Act, Mergers & Acquisition, Arbitration & Conciliation Act etc. along with exploration of the
judicial process and the current legal environment are examined. Throughout the subject emphasis is
placed on the primary sources of law - cases and statutes
Syllabus
Sources of law, classification of law, mercantile law, legal procedures, features of contract, company
law, negotiable instrument act, consumer protection act, Cyber laws and IPR laws, industrial laws.
Expected Outcome
After the successful completion of the course, the students will have the knowledge of law relevant to
business contracts and also provide an insight to the issues associated with glob-alization, diversity,
internet, intellectual property rights, limited liability business structures, company laws, negotiable
instruments, to name a few areas which is undergoing tremendous changes in commercial laws
References
1. Bare Acts. Government or Private Publications, n.d.

2. Gulshan, S S and G K Kapoor. Business Law Including Company Law (12/e). New Age International,
n.d.
3. Kapoor, N D. Elements of Mercantile Law. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2014.
4. Ramaiya. A Ramaiya. Guide to the Companiees Act (18/e). Lexis Nexis, 2014.
5. Sen, Arun Kumar and Jitendra Kumar Mitra. Commercial Law (including company law) and
Industrial Law. World Press, 1977.
6. Wadhwa, Anirudh. Mulla: Indian Contract Act (13/e). Lexis Nexis, 2011.
Page 14 of 17
Course Plan
Exam
I Introduction: Sources of law - classification of law 2 5
II Indian Contract Act 1872: Definition (Sec 2); Essential elements 8 20
of a contract - offer, acceptance, considerations;
Competency to enter in contracts (Sec 11 & 12); Consent
- free consent, coercion, undue influence, fraud,
misrepresentation, mistake (Sec 13-23); Legality of object &
consideration; Types of contracts; Performance of contracts;
Void agreement (Sec 24-30);
Quasi contracts, discharges of contracts;
Consequences of breach of contract (Sec 73-75)
Bailment (S.148 - S.171 & S.180 & S.181)
Pledge (S.173 - S.179)
Indemnity & Guarantee (S.124, 125 128 - 147)
Distinguish Indemnity & Guarantee
Laws 0f Agency
III Sale of Goods Act (1930)Â (Sec 2 - 11) 6 10
Conditions and warranties; (Sec12 - 17, 59)
Rights of an unpaid seller. (S.45 - S.58)
Title to goods - (S.27 - 30)
Rights & Duties of Buyer & Seller; (S.31 - 44)
III The Companies Act 2013 Meaning, Definition & Characteristics 10 30
of a company; Company distinguished from
partnership; Kinds of companies; Types of Companies,
Formation-S.3, Promoter, Remuneration, Rights & Liabilities of
a Promoter, Memorandum of Association (S.4,S.10, S.13),
Form, Purpose, Clauses, Alteration. Articles ofAssociation (S.5,
S.10, S.14,) Provisions for Membership,
Share capital etc., Contents, Form, Purpose, Clauses, Alteration,
Procedure & Restrictions for Alteration, Distinction Between
Memorandum & Articles Incorporation (S.7, S.9, S.12),
Advantages & Disadvantages Prospectus - Public Offer S.25 -
S.27, S.30 - S.40; Private Offer S.42.
Kinds of shares S.43 44, Meetings & proceedings; S.173 -S.195
Directors S. 149 - 152, 164, 165. Boards powers and restrictions;
S. 179, 180. Accounts & audit S.128 - 148.
Lifting of Corporate Veil. Doctrine of Ultra Vires, Doctrine of
Indoor management, Prevention of oppression
&mismanagement S.241 Winding up of companies - Modes
S.270, 271, 304. C.S.R. Meaning & Scope S.135. Mergers &
Acquisitions - Meaning & Definition
IV The Indian Partnership Act 1932 6 10
The Limited Liability Partnership Act 2008 Sole Proprietorship
Page 15 of 17
V Consumer Protection Act 1986: 4 5
Definitions, consumer dispute, deficiency, goods manufacturer,
restrictive trade practices, service, unfair trade practices;
Central Consumer Protection Council, State Consumer
Protection Council; Consumer Redressal Forum.
Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 4 5
Meaning and characteristics of negotiable instrument;
Presumption; Promissory Notes, Bills of Exchange &
Cheques; Negotiation (Sec 46 to 60); Crossing of cheque &
dishonour of cheque (Sec 138 to 142)
Law of Intellectual Property Rights - An Overview 4 10
The Copy Rights Amendment Act 2012 The Trademarks
Amendment Act 2010 The Designs Act 2000 The Patents
Amendment Act 2005 The Information Technology Act
Page 16 of 17
Course Year of
27 Soft Skills II 0-2-0 - 2015
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable students to understand what ‘personality’ means,
understand the different kinds of personalities, to develop public speaking skills, time management
and team work to prepare for the corporate life while getting the grip on basics of emotional
intelligence for applying all throughout one’s life
Syllabus
Personality, Self-motivation, time management, team work, emotional intelligence

Expected Outcome
1. Enhancement of the holistic development of students and improvement of their employability
skills.
2. To develop emotional intelligence
3. To develop professionals with idealistic, practical and moral values.
4. To develop time management skills
5. To get over the fear of public speaking
References
1. Pravesh Kumar (2005). All about self- Motivation. New Delhi: Goodwill Publishing House.
2. Hurlock, E.B (2006). Personality Development, 28th Reprint. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw Hill.
3. The Emotionally Intelligent Manager - David R. Caruso, Peter Salovey
Course Plan
Exam
I Definition of Personality - Determinants of Personality - 4 2
biological, psychological and socio- cultural factors -
Misconceptions and clarifications - Need for personality
development
II Time Management - definition - importance - functions 4 6
Using to-do lists - procrastination - delegating effectively
III Concept of team in work situation, promotion of team 4 10
spirit, characteristics of team player - Awareness of one’s
own leadership style, performance and qualities
IV Emotional Intelligence : what it means - role and benefit - 4 10
awareness of emotions in self and others - and management of
emotions in ourselves and in others (Use of EI tests to assess)
V Public Speaking - Prepared Speech by students for 5 minutes 6 12
Page 17 of 17
Programme
Under
Trimester 3
April 2016
Page 1 of 17
Subjects and Credits in Trimester 3
End Exam
Course Internal Trimester duration
No. Course Name L-T-P Marks Marks (Hrs.) Credits
31 Marketing Management II 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
32 Financial Management II 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
33 Human Resource Management 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
34 Business Research Methods 2-0-0 20 30 1.5 1.5
35 Management Information Systems 2-0-0 20 30 1.5 1.5
36 Operations Research 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
37 Strategic Management 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
38 Soft-Skills III 0-2-0 - 60 - 3
39 Project 0-0-3 - - - -
Total 24-2-3 240 420 - 21
Page 2 of 17
Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of
Course No Introduction
31 Marketing Management - II 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to equip the students with the concepts of Planning, designing
and implementing marketing strategy to achieve the long-term objectives have been critical
for any firm in a competitive market situation. This course seeks to develop the different
analytical perspectives and management decision tools.
Syllabus
Promotion and Distribution Decisions, Marketing communications, Marketing Research,, Creating
Competitive Advantage, Services Marketing, Rural Marketing,
Emerging Trends in Marketing
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to understand the importance and
role of marketing in a global environment, to understand the scope and process of marketing, to
know the process of designing effective marketing strategies and to understand how marketing mix
decisions are made and managed over time.
References
1. Arunkumar and N Meenakshi. Marketing Management.Vikas Publishing, 2011.

2. Etzel,MJ, BJWalker and William J Stanton. Marketing (Fourteenth Edition).McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. Evans, Joel R and Barry Berman. Marketing in the 21st Century.Cengage Learning, 2010.
4. Karunakaran, K.Marketing Management (Text and Cases). Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.
5. Kotler, Philip, et al. Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective. Pearson, 2012.
6. Lamb, CharlesW, et al. Marketing. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
7. Masterson, Rosalind and David Pickton. Marketing: An Introduction. Sage Publications, 2014.
8. Neelamegham, S.Marketing in India: Text and Cases (4/e). Vikas Publishing House, 2012.
9. Panda, TapanK.Marketing Management: Text and Cases Indian Context. Excel Books India, 2009.
10. Pride, William M and OC Ferrel. Marketing: Planning, Implementation and Control. Cengage
Learning, 2011.
11. Ramaswamy, VS and S Namakumari. Marketing Management: Global Perspective, Indian
Context.Maxmillan Publishers, 2009.
12. Saxena, Rajan. Marketing Management (Fourth Edition).TataMcGraw Hill, 209.
13. Shahajan, S. Applied Case Studies in Marketing. Primus Books, 2011.
Page 3 of 17
Course Plan – MARKETING MANAGEMENT - II
allotted marks in
Trimester
Exam
I Distribution Decisions- distribution channels - physical distribution 8 25
systems- channel intermediaries - channel management -wholesaling
and retailing - retail marketing - multi level marketing (network
marketing)-Direct marketing: Meaning, features, functions, basic
concepts of e-commerce, e-business, e-marketing, m-commerce, m-
marketing, E-networking
II Promotion Decisions: Promotion mix -integrated marketing 7 10
communication - advertising – sales promotion - personal selling -
publicity - public relations- Marketing communication: Concept of
communication mix, communication objectives, steps in developing
effective communication. Stages in designing message Advertising:
Advertising objectives, Advertising budget, advertising copy, AIDA
model, advertising agency decision
FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION
III Sales promotion: Sales promotion mix, kinds of promotion, tools and 8 10
techniques of sales promotion, push-pull strategies of promotion
Public Relations: Meaning, objectives, types, functions of PR
Marketing Research: Marketing Information System and Research -
demand estimation and sales forecasting. Creating Competitive
Advantage: Competitor Analysis - competitive strategies - competitive
positions – balancing customer and competition orientations
IV Marketing organization: Concept of marketing organization, factors 7 25
influencing size of the marketing organization, various types of
marketing structures / organization Marketing control systems:
Organizing marketing department - marketing control techniques -
annual plan control - profitability control - strategic control-Marketing
audit: Meaning, features of marketing audit, various components of
marketing audit
SECOND INTERNAL EXAMINATION
V Services Marketing - Meaning- characteristics of services and their 8 10
marketing implications - strategies for service firms - managing service
quality - managing productivity - managing product support services -
marketing mix for service marketing. Rural Marketing - Meaning -
current Indian rural market scenario - scope - difficulties - strategies to
cope up- case studies
Emerging trends in marketing: social marketing – digital marketing - 7 20
green marketing - global marketing – marketing analytics - Current
developments in Marketing, Ethics in Marketing
TRIMESTER EXAMINATION 45
Page 4 of 17
Introduction
32 Financial Management 2 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course enables the students to familiarize with management and analysis of financial
performance, capital structure planning, dividend policy, working capital management and some of
the emerging areas in financial management.
Syllabus
The syllabus of the course includes financial performance, capital structure decisions, dividend policy,
working capital management and some emerging areas in financial management.
Expected Outcome
This course will enable the students to have sound knowledge on performance analysis of firms,
Capital Structure planning, dividend policy and Working capital management
References
1. Brealey, Richard A and Stewart CMyers. Principles of Corporate Finance. McGraw Hill India,
2012.
2. Brigham, Eugene F and Joel F Houston. Fundamentals of Financial Management (13/e).
3. Chandra, Prasanna Financial Management, Theory & Practice. Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
4. Damodaran, Aswath. Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice (4/e). Wiley India, 2012.
5. Gitman, Lawrence J and Chad J Zutter. Principles of Managerial Finance (14/e). Pearson
Education, 2007.
6. Kapil, Sheeba. Financial Management. Pearson Education India, 2010.
7. Khan, M Y and P K Jain. Financial Management: text, problems and cases. New Delhi: Tata Mc-
Graw Hill, 2013
8. Kishore, Ravi M. Financial Management: Comprehensive Text Book with Case Studies (7/e).
Taxmann Allied Services, 2009.
9. Kothari, Rajesh and Bobby Dutta. Contemporary Financial Management. McMillan Publishers,
India, 2005.
10. Pandey, IM. Financial Management. Vikas Publishing House, 2009.
11. Reddy, G Sudarsana. Financial Management. Himalaya Publishing House, 2011.
12. Ross, Stephen, Randolf Westerfield and Bradford Jordan. Fundamentals of Corporate Finance,
McGraw Hill, 2010.
13. Sharan, Vyuptakesh. Fundamentals of Financial Management. Pearson Education, 2012.
14. Srivastava, Rajiv and Anil Misra. Financial Management. Oxford University Press India, 2011.
15. Vanhome, James C. Financial Management and Policy (12/e). Pearson Education, 2002.
16. Vanhorne, James C and John M Wachowicz (Jr). Fundamentals of Financial Management,
(13/e).Pearson Education, 2010.
Page 5 of 17
Course Plan
allotted marks in
Trimester
exams
I Financial Performance Analysis: Trend analysis; Ratio analysis- 9 20%
liquidity ratios, leverage ratios, activity ratios, profitability ratios, ,
market capitalization ratios - Inter firm comparison - Common Size
Statement – Comparative Statements and Trend Analysis.
II Capital structure planning - optimum capital structure - financial 6 10%
leverage, operating leverage and combined leverage -.

II capital structure theories - net income approach - net operating 7 15%
income approach -Modigliani and Miller (MM) approach -traditional
approach - Factors affecting Capital structure
III Dividend Policy - factors influencing dividend policy stable dividend 8 20 %

policy-forms of dividend - cash dividend - bonus shares - stock split -
buyback of shares – dividend policy and value of firms - models -
Walter’s model - Gordon’s Model - MM Irrelevance Approach - the
bird-in-the hand argument.
IV Working capital management - concepts of working capital - issues in 9 20%
working capital management – operating cycle and determinants of
working capital - estimation of working capital, Management of cash
- management of the receivables, Inventory management - financing
of working capital - trade credit - accrued expenses and deferred
income - bank finance for working capital
V Emerging areas in Financial Management: Corporate restructuring, 6 15%
mergers and acquisition - Behavioural finance, and Financial
engineering
Trimester Examination 45
Page 6 of 17
Course Objectives
This subject provides the key aspects of managing human resources in domestic and

No. Introduction
33 Human Resource Management 4-0-0 3 2016
multi-national organizations, including a consideration of labour relations and diversity

manage-ment issues. Topics include job analysis, planning, recruiting, selection,
orientation, train-ing and development, performance appraisal, compensation and
benefits, dispute resolution, and legal frameworks for both the non-union and union
environments.
Syllabus
Evolution of HR, Definition- Meaning- objectives-differences between personnel
management and HRM, Human Resource Acquisition, Analysis and Designing of Jobs, HR
planning, Hu-man Resource Development, Compensation, Employee Relations
Expected Outcome
The students are expected to have critical skills required to manage human resources in
a multitude of workplace environments. Students are expected to get basic knowledge
about management of Human Resources and Industrial Relations.
References
1. Decenzo, David A and Stephen P Robbins. Human Resource Management (11/e). Wiley, 2013.
2. Dwivedi, R S. A Text Book of Human Resource Management. Vikas Publishing House, 2009.
3. Fisher, Cynthia D and Lyle F Schoenfeldt. Human Resource Management (6/e). Cengage Learning,
2006.
4. Gomex-Mejia, Luis R, David B Balkin and Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resources.
Person/Prentice Hall, 2009.
5. Kandula, Srinivas R. Human Resource Management in Practice with 300 Models, Tech-niques and
Tools. PHI Learning, 2009.
6. Kleiman, Lawrence S. Human Resource Management: A Managerial Tool for Competitive Advantage.
7. lvancevich, John M. Human Resource Management. McGraw Hill, 2007.
8. Mamoria, C B and S V Gankar. Personnel Management. Himalaya Publishing House, 2009.
9. Pattanayak, Biswajeet. Human Resource Management. PHI Learning, 2005.
10. Rao, P Subha. Essentials of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations: (Text, Cases and
Games). Himalayan Books, 2011.
11. Rao, V S P. Human Resource Management. Excel Books, 2010.
12. Sanghi, Seema. Human Resource Management. Vikas Publishing, 2014.
13. Snell, Scott, George Bohlander and Veena Vohra. Human Resource Management: A South Asian
Perspective. Cengage Learning India, 2010.
Page 7 of 17
COURSE PLAN
Exam
I Introduction: Evolution of HRM - Meaning and significance - 6 10
differences between personnel management and HRM - Major
functions of HRM - Line functions and staff functions - human
capital management – Characteristics and qualities of HR
Manager - Recent trends in HRM
II Job Design, Work and Motivation - Job design and quality of 8 10
work life, A conceptual model of job design, Job performance
outcomes, Job analysis, Job designs: the result of job analysis.
The way people perceive their jobs, Designing Job range: Job
rotation and job Enlargement, Designing Job depth: Job
enrichment and job design.
II Pre-recruitment functions: Organizational structure - Analysis 12 20
and Designing of Jobs - HR planning - Factors affecting HR
Planning - HRP process - Requisites of a good HRP - Barriers to
HRP Recruitment, selection and appointment: Meaning and
significance of recruitment - Process of recruitment -Sources of
recruitment - Cost-benefit analysis of recruitment - Process of
selection - Difference between recruitment and selection -
Selection techniques: tests, interviews and salary negotiation -
Meaning and significance of appointment - Process of
appointment - Induction and Placement.
III Training and development: Meaning and significance of training
and development - Process of training development - Training
Need Analysis - Training Design – Training Implementation -
Training evaluation - Methods of training: on-the-job and off-
the-job methods 6 10
IV Performance Management: Meaning and significance of 7 10
Performance Management - Types of performance appraisal
system - Performance goal setting – Performance coaching and
monitoring - Performance evaluation and performance
feedback - Aligning performance outcome to career and
succession planning Compensation and benefits: Meaning and
significance - Components of Compensation - Factors affecting
wages and salaries
V Employee relations: Meaning and significance of employee 6 15
relations - Employee relations in unionised and non-unionised
organizations, participative management - Handling grievances,
managing discipline, conducting domestic enquiry -
Page 8 of 17
No. Introduction
34 Business Research Methods 2-0-0 1.5 2016
Course Objectives
The course objective is to familiarize the research methods used in decision making by
managers. The subject aims to meet the challenge of the fast pace decision making environ-
ment, to provide the knowledge and skills a manager needs to solve business problems.
Syllabus
Introduction to Business Research, Definition - need for business research, types of research,
formulating research hypothesis and research design, Sampling design, Research Variable-
Identification and defining research problems, secondary and primary methods of data col-
lection, Questionnaire construction, data analysis and drawing inferences
Expected Outcome
After the completion of the course, the students will be able to study business problems
and find ways to solve them by collecting relevant data and analyzing it in the appropriate
manner to reach valid and insightful results and conclusions. The students will become
familiar with sampling methods, defining research hypotheses and testing them statistically.
References
1. Chawla, Deepak and Neena Sondhi. Research Methodology: Concepts and Cases. Vikas
Publishing House, 2011.
2. Cooper, Donald R, Pamela S Schindler and J K Sharma. Business Research Methods (11/e).
New Delhi: McGraw Hill Educaiton India, 2013.
3. Krishnaswamy, O R and M Ranganathan. Methodology of Research in Social Sciences.
Himalaya Publishing House, 2011.
4. Levin, Richard I, et al. Statistics for Management (7/e). Pearson Education, 2012.
5. Malhotra, Naresh K. Marketing Research: An Applied Orientation (6/e). Pearson Educa-
tion, 2010.
Page 9 of 17
Course Plan
Exam
I Introduction to Business Research: Definition - need for business 5 20
research - types of research - exploratory and conclusive - basic and
applied research - qualitative research - general research process -
identifying and defining research problem - literature survey -
identification of key research variables - theoretical framework -
formulating research hypothesis
II Formulation of research design - sampling design – data 4 20
collection and data editing - data analysis and interpretation -
preparation of research report - research proposal framework -
business research applications in marketing - human resource
management - financial and accounting decisions - production and
operations management - cross-functional areas - case studies
III Measurement and scaling - concepts and operational definitions - 3 20
nominal, ordinal, interval and ratio scales - comparative scales -
paired comparison scales - rank order scaling - constant sum scaling
- Q sort technique - non-comparative scales - Likert, Semantic
Differential - Staple - criteria for good measurement - reliability -
validity - sensitivity
IV Data Collection: Sampling design - secondary and primary methods 5 20
of data collection - probability and non-probability sampling
methods - merits and demerits -Review of various sampling
methods - determination of sample size - data collection and data
editing - coding - categorization - handling unsatisfactory responses
and missing values - questionnaire construction - type of questions -
guidelines for questionnaire designing - questionnaire testing - other
methods of data collection - observation - projective methods -
goodness of fit of data -reliability and consistency - Cronbach’s
Alpha
V Data Analysis and Reporting: Data analysis – descriptive analysis of 5 20
uni-variate and bi-variate data – parametric tests for hypotheses
testing - z test - t test - ANOVA - introduction to MANOVA and
ANCOVA; SEM - non-parametric tests for hypotheses testing - Chi-
square - run test for randomness - one and two-sample sign tests -
Mann-Whitney U test - Wilcoxon signed-rank test - Kruskal-Wallis
test - Correlation and regression analysis - Multivariate analysis -
dependency techniques: multiple regression - discriminant analysis -
conjoint analysis inter-dependency techniques: Factor Analysis -
Cluster Analysis
Page 10 of 17
No. Introduction
35 Management Information Systems 2-0-0 1.5 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with the role, functions and
development of information systems at different levels of the organisation and to develop a
broader understanding of the management and information technology systems.
Syllabus
Information systems, enterprise systems, types of information systems, E-business, decision

making concepts, GDSS, Database concepts, DBMS, data warehousing, data mining, Cyber
security, system development cycles.
Expected Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will have an understanding of systems thinking,
and ability to analyse business situations from a systems perspective. They also get exposure
to the various system concepts and terminologies.
References
1. Behl, Ramesh. Information Technology for Management. Tata McGraw Hill Education,
2009.
2. Laudon, Kenneth C and Jane P Laudon. Management Information Systems: Managing the
Digital Firm. Pearson Education, 2013.
3. O’Brien, James and George Marakas. Management Information Systems (10/e). McGraw
Hill, 2010.
4. Rainer, R Kelly, Brad Prince and Hugh J Watson. Introduction to Information Systems
(3/e). Wiley, 2014.
Page 11 of 17
Course Plan
% of marks in
Hours Trimester
Unit Topics allotted Exam
I e-business- e-commerce- e-government e-Commerce models 5 20
and strategies-Cases of successful e-Commerce companies
Ethical and social issues with e-Commerce Impact of IT on
business
Database concept, Advantages of DBMS, database types, 4 20
Database models, data warehousing, data mining, data trends,
II Data Flow Diagram
III Information Security and Control System Vulnerability- 4 20
Wireless security challenges-Malwares-Cyber terrorism and
Cyber crimes-Spoofing, phishing, sniffing, DOS attacks
IV Ensuring wireless security, Encryption and public key 4 20
infrastructure, Firewalls, Intrusion Detection systems and anti-
virus software-Ensuring cloud security and mobile digital
platform
V Enterprise Information systems-SCM, CRM, ERP. ERP-Benefits, 4 20
Challenges, Trends, Big 5, ERP Implementation life cycle
Page 12 of 17
No. Introduction
36 Operations Research 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with the scope and applications
of operations research in business and industry problems. This course exposes the students
to the use of various scientific tools and models in OR for business analysis and better
managerial decision making. Use of software in solving problems is expected.
Syllabus
Introduction, development of OR, Linear programming problems, Allocation models such as

transportation, assignment, and travelling salesman problems, Decision theory, Game
theory, queuing theory, project management and introduction to simulation.
Expected Outcome
The successful completion of this course will enable the students to generate
mathematical models of business scenarios and to analyze the business situations. The
students will become able to use different mathematical models and the solution
procedures.
References
1. Hillier, F S, et al. Introduction to Operations Research (9/e). Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Ravindran, A and Don T Phillips. Operations Research: Principles and Practice. John Wiley
& Sons, 1987.
3. Sharma, J K. Operations Research: Theory and Applications (5/e). New Delhi: Laxmi Pub-
lications, 2013.
4. Taha, Hamdy A. Operations Research: An Introduction (9/e). Prentice Hall, 2010.
5. Vohra, N D. Quantitative Techniques for Management. Tata McGraw Hill Education,
2015.
Page 13 of 17
Course Plan
% of marks
Hours in Trimester
Unit Topics allotted Exam
I Introduction to Operations Research: Origin and growth of OR, 7 15
importance of OR in managerial decision making, scope &
applications of OR, models and modelling in OR. Linear
programming problems: Formulation of the problem, solution
by graphical method & simplex algorithm, degeneracy in LPP.
Case discussion
II Allocation Problem models: Transportation problems: 8 20
formulation, methods of finding initial solution (North West
Corner Rule, Least Cost Method and Vogel’s Approximation
Method), test for optimality (MODI Method), unbalanced
transportation problems, maximization transportation
problem. Assignment problems: formulation, methods of
solution, Hungarian method, multiple
optimal solutions, unbalanced problems, maximization
problems. Case analysis
III Duality in LPP, revised simplex method, Sensitivity of optimal 6 10
LP solutions, Integer programming problems, Gomory’s cutting
plane algorithm, introduction to branch and bound technique.
Sequencing Problem: Johnson’s Algorithm for n Jobs and Two
machines, Two jobs and m - Machines Problems and n Jobs and
m Machine problems.
IV Decision theory: Concepts of decision making, decision making 9 20
environments, Decision making under uncertainty - Decision
making under risk, decision tree analysis. Case discussion.
Dynamic Programming - Concepts, forward and backward
recursion, solution to LPP by dynamic programming method.
IV Concepts of network analysis, project network models, Critical 5 10
Path Method, PERT, project time-cost trade off, resource
scheduling. Case discussion
V Game Theory: Two person zero-sum game, saddle point games, 10 25
principle of dominance, graphical solution. Replacement analysis:
items that deteriorate over time, items that fail suddenly,
optimum replacement policies for both cases. Stochastic models:
Markov process, queuing model structure, Kendall Lee notation -
M/M/1 queues - standard problems.
Page 14 of 17
No. Introduction
37 Strategic Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
• Ability to recognize role and functions of Corporate board in strategic management

• Deeper understanding of the integrative nature of strategic management
• Learn to apply strategic planning models like Porter Model
• Understand the importance of environmental scanning in formulating strategy
• Identification and evaluation of the role of leadership, organizational structure and
change-management in strategy-implementation
• Develop an integrated outlook on the role of accounting and finance, operations man-
agement and human resource management in developing strategy
Syllabus
Basic concepts of strategic management, Concept of Strategy and the Strategy formation
Pro-cess, Objectives and Goals - Corporate Governance and Social responsibility, Types of
strate-gies, strategy formulation, Strategy Choic, Strategy review.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course acquire the ability to generate and evaluate strategies in
relation to a particular problem using real-world scenarios.
References
1. Hill, Charles W L and Gareth R Jones. Strategic Management: An Integrated Approach.

2. Kazmi, Azhar. Strategic Management and Business Policy (3/e). Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Parnell, John A. Strategic Management: Theory and Practice. SAGE Publications, 2013.
4. Wheelen, Thomas L and J David Hunger. Strategic Management and Business Policy: To-
wards Global Sustainability. Prentice Hall, 2012.
Page 15 of 17
Course Plan
allotted in
Trimester
Exam
I Basic concepts of strategic management - framework for strategic 7 20
management, the Concept of Strategy and the Strategy formation Process -
Stakeholders in business - vision, Mission and Purpose strategic management
process - strategic management at the business level, functional level and
corporate level - Constitution of Board – Role and functions of corporate
board and top management in strategic management.
II Objectives and Goals - Corporate Governance and Social responsibility 8 20
Environmental Scanning- Analysing industry and competition - internal
appraisal - External Environment - Porter’s Five Forces Model-Strategic
Groups Competitive Changes during Industry Evolution- Globalisation and
Industry Structure - National Context and Competitive advantage Resources-
Capabilities
and competencies - core competencies-Low cost and differentiation Generic
Building Blocks of Competitive Advantage- Distinctive Competencies
Resources and Capabilities durability of competitive Advantage- Avoiding
failures and sustaining competitive advantage concepts, techniques and
cases.
III Strategy formulation- Types of strategies - Integration, intensive, 10 20
diversification, and defensive strategies - strategic analysis -The generic
strategic alternatives - Stability, Expansion, Retrenchment and Combination
strategies - Business level strategy- Strategy in the Global Environment–
comparative cost analysis, portfolio analysis, operating and financial analysis.
- Building and Re-structuring the corporation- Strategic analysis and choice -
Environmental Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP) - Organizational
Capability Profile - Strategic Advantage Profile - Corporate Portfolio Analysis -
SWOT Analysis - GAP Analysis - Mc Kinsey’s 7s Framework - GE 9 Cell Model -
Distinctive competitiveness - Selection of matrix - Balance Score Card
IV Strategy Choice-criteria and process-Routes for executing strategy. The 5 10
implementation process, Designing organisational structure - Designing
Strategic Control Systems, Resource allocation
IV Matching structure and control to strategy - Implementing Strategic change- 5 10
Politics-Power and Conflict-Strategy implementation - Role of organizational
structure, Culture and Leadership, Strategy and Social Responsibility.
V Strategy review, evaluation and control- Auditing - Techniques of strategic 10 20

evaluation & control-case study Matching structure and control to strategy-
Using computers to evaluate strategies; Managing Technology and
Innovation-Strategic issues for Non Profit organisations. New Business
Models and strategies for Internet Economy
Page 16 of 17
Course Year of
38 Soft Skills III 0-2-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable students understand the importance communication in
the corporate life via group discussions and live interviews. Be enabled to write technically adept
resumes and cover letters. The course also aims to enable students to combat stress and manage and
resolve possible conflicts.
Syllabus
Stress, Conflict management, Resume writing, Group Discussions, Interview skills
Expected Outcome
• Enhancement of the holistic development of students and improvement of their employability

skills.
• To develop strategies to manage stress
• To develop methods or perspectives to resolve conflicts
• To have hands-on group discussion and interview exposure in a simulated corporate
environment
• To develop adept resume writing skills
References
1. Bovee, Courtland, John Thill and Mukesh Chaturvedi. Business Communication Today. Pearson
Education, 2009.
2. Monippally, Matthukutty M. Business Communication Strategies. Tata McGraw-Hill Pub-lishing
Company Ltd. 2001
Course Plan
Unit Topics Hours % of marks in
allotted Trimester
Exam
I Introduction to Stress Management - Eustress and Distress - 4 2
Causes of Stress - Impact of Stress -Managing Stress
II Conflict - Goal Conflict - Cognitive Conflict - Intrapersonal and 4 6
Interpersonal Conflict - Conflict resolution
III Resume vs CV vs Biodata writing - Cover letter writing 2 6
IV Group Discussion - Do’s and Don’ts - Interview Skills - Giving and 4 6
taking Interviews
V Hands-on experience of Giving and Taking Interviews 8 10
Page 17 of 17
Programme
Under
Trimester 4
June 2016
Page 1 of 86
TRIMESTER IV

Marks (hours)
41 International Business 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
42 Business Analytics 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
43 Elective I 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
44 Elective II 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
45 Elective III 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
46 Elective IV 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
47 Project 0-0-5
TOTAL 24-0-5 240 300 18
Page 2 of 86
Course
Year of
41 International Business 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course is a unique blend of theories and practices in business that prepares the students for
domestic markets as well as on a global platform. It would help students to become familiar with the
core aspects of international business and apply emerging concepts to genuine business situations.
Students will understand the impact of regulations on international business, how strategies are
developed based on international legislation. Although multinationals have greater opportunity in
terms of diversification and financing sources, there are greater risks involved such as exchange rate
fluctuations and political instability.
Syllabus
Nature & scope of International Business, Multinational Corporations, Legal Framework of

International Business, International Trade, EXIM and International Finance.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with the concepts and
framework of International Business in Multi National Corporations ( MNCs), international
trade practices, EXIM, and thus enable them to understand global business situations.
References
1. Ajeet N. Mathur: Strategies for Future: Understanding International Business,

Indian Institute of Management (IIM), Ahmadabad;
2. Francis Cherunilam: International Business: Text and Cases, PHI Learning Private
Limited-New Delhi;
3. Rakesh Mohan Joshi: International Business, Oxford Oxford University Press
India;
4. J. Stewart Black and Anant K. Sundaram: International Business Environment,
Pearson Education;
5. Ray A. August, “International Business Law Text, Cases and Readings” (4th
Edition) Prentice Hall;
6. Helen Deresky , International Management: Managing across Borders and
Cultures, International Edition, Pearson Education;
7. Aseem Kumar “Export and Import Management”, Excel Books, 2007
Page 3 of 86
8. F.Adhikary, Manab, Global Business Management, Macmillan, New Delhi
9. K. Aswathappa, International Business, McGraw Hill Education India Private
Limited
10. Handbook on Foreign Trade Policy and Guide to Export & Import, The Institute of
Chartered Accountants of India, New Delhi
11. Handbook of Procedures, Department of Commerce, Ministry of Commerce &
Industry, Government of India, New Delhi
12. Carole Murray, Schmothoff The Law and Practice of International Trade, Sweet &
Maxwell Publishers
13. Fred Luthans and Jonathan Doh International Management: Culture, Strategy, and
Behavior, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, New Delhi.
14. Hill, C and Arun K, International Business: Competing in the Global Marketplace.
(10th ed) McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited
15. Jeevanandam C “Foreign Exchange: Practices Concepts and Control” Sultan
Chand & Sons Publications, 2012.
Page 4 of 86
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Units Topics Trimester
Allotted
Exam
International Business: Nature, importance and scope; Modes of
entry into International Business; Frame work for analyzing
international business environment; Economic, Technological,
Socio-cultural, Political and Legal environment; International
9 15
Economic Environment-- International financial system;
1
Institutional support to International Business-- UNO, IMF, World
Bank; UNCTAD; WTO
Multinational Corporations: Conceptual Frame work of MNCs;

MNCs and Host & Home Country relations; Hofstede Framework
(ethnocentric, polycentric, geocentric); International Technology
Transfers – importance and types, Foreign Technology
Acquisition. Strategies of IB (licensing, franchising) merger,
2 acquisition, IJVs), Designing performance tools according to 9 15
international business standards, determinants of performance,
methods of measuring performances in MNCs, Analyzing the
causes of poor performance from a Global Perspective, Selecting
performance measurement approach according to the MNC

Legal Framework of International Business: Nature and
complexities; Code and common laws and their implications to
business; International business contract – legal provisions;
Payments terms; International sales agreements; Rights and duties
of agents and distributors. Indian Laws and Regulations 9
3 20
Governing International Transactions: FEMA; Taxation of foreign
income; Foreign investments; Setting up offices and branches
abroad; Restrictions on trade in endangered species and other
commodities. Free Trade Zones, Special Economic Zones.
International Trade: Need and importance of International Trade

– Recent Trends in World Trade – Leading players – India’s
Foreign Trade Policy. Export Procedure: Starting an export firm –
Selection of an export product – Market selection –Buyer
4 selection – Export Promotion Council/ Organizations – EXIM 9 20
code number – Elements of export contract- Terms of payment
and Letter of Credit. Export Documentation: Types of documents
– Transport, Negotiation and Insurance documents. DGFT and
incentives for export.
5 Export Finance: Sources of Finance - Role of commercial banks, 9 30
Page 5 of 86
EXIM Bank, ECGC and others – Export promotion Schemes –
Insurance for Export – Types – export credit insurance – Risk
Management – Types of risks – mitigation methods. Import
Procedure and Documentation: Global sourcing – Types of
global procurement – Tender – Negotiation – Contract and others
– Customs regulations and import clearance formalities – Types
of import licenses-Export Promotion Capital Goods Scheme
(EPCG) license- Duty exemption scheme – Duty Entitlement
Pass Book Scheme (DEPBS)- Import formalities for 100% EOUs
and SEZs - Import Risk Management.
Final Examination
Page 6 of 86
Course
Year of
42 Business Analytics 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course offers a perspective to the business needs and trends in analytics space. The objective of
the course is to assist the student in gaining a basic understanding of Business Analytics and its
application in various functional areas.
Syllabus
Introduction to business analytics, financial analytics, supply chain analytics, HR analytics,

marketing analytics, web analytics, predictive analytics and applications of analytics in other
business areas
Expected Outcome
1. Acquire knowledge of Business Analytics terminologies and concepts

2. Understand and gain familiarity on the application of business analytics
3. Acquire knowledge on the tools and technique to answer business questions
4. Understand how to draw meaningful conclusions to business problems using analytics
References
1. Evans, J.R. (2013), Business Analytics: Methods, Models, and Decisions, 3rd ed. Pearson
India
2. Malhotra, N.K. and Dash, S. (2011), Marketing Research, 6th ed. Pearson India
3. Baesens, B., Vlasselaer, V.V. and Verbeke, W. (2015), Fraud Analytics Using Descriptive,
Predictive and Social Network Techniques, 1st ed. Wiley India
4. Prasad, R.N. and Acharya, S. (2011), Fundaments of Business Analytics, 1st ed. Wiley India
5. Davenport, T.H. and Harris, J.G. (2007) Competing on Analytics: The New Science of
Winning, 1st ed. Harvard Business Review Press
6. Damodharan, A. (2007), Strategic Risk Taking, 1st ed., FT Press
7. Davenport, T.H., Harris, J.G., and Morison, R. (2010), Analytics at Work: Smarter Decisions,
Better Results, 1st ed.
8. Raman, A & Fisher, M. (2010), How Analytics Are Transforming the Supply Chain and
Improving Performance, 1st ed. HBS Press
9. Fitz-enz, J. (2010), The New HR Analytics: Predicting the Economic Value of Your
Company's Human Capital Investments, 1st ed., American Management Association
10. Peterson, E. (2004), Web Analytics Demystified: A Marketer's Guide to Understanding How
Your Web Site Affects Your Business, 1st ed. Celilo Group Media & Café Press
11. Lilien, G.L. and Rangaswamy, L. (2004), Marketing Engineering: ComputerAssisted
Marketing Analysis and Planning, 2nd ed. Revised, Trafford Publishing.
Page 7 of 86
Course Plan
Sl % of marks
Hours
No Topics in Trimester
allotted
exams
1 Introduction
Introduction to Business Analytics, evolution and scope, business
analytics process, decision models.
Introduction to spreadsheets, spreadsheet functions, spreadsheet
modeling overview. 7 15%
Datasets, data cleaning, missing data handling, outliers.
Data Visualization – charts and graphs, data queries – sorting and
filtering, summarizing data – frequency, relative frequency,
histograms, percentages and quartiles, cross tabulation, pivots.
2 Financial Analytics and Operations Analytics
Understanding Risk, credit risk analysis, fraud detection and
prevention analytics, analytics in banking and financial services -
analytics in retail banking and wealth management
8 20%
Demand Planning – Forecasting Model building, Supply planning
- Procurement and Strategic Sourcing, Inventory Modeling -
Aggregate planning and resource allocation decisions, Make/Buy
decision
3 Human Resource Analytics
Recruitment Analytics, On Boarding Analytics, Staffing
Analytics, Performance & Skill Gap Analytics, Compensation &
7 15%
Benefit Analytics, Training & Learning Analytics, Promotion and
Succession Planning Analytics, Compliance Analytics, Attrition
& Retention Analytics
Marketing Analytics
4 Basics of marketing analytics, marketing decisions models,
characteristics, types and benefits of marketing decisions models,
Segmentation using factors analysis and cluster analysis, 8 20%
regression and choice based segmentation, positioning -
perceptual maps: developing perceptual map, multi dimensional
scaling
Page 8 of 86
4 Web Analytics
Click stream analytics, engagement quantification frameworks,
anonymous vs. registered users analysis,
Social Media Analytics - User generated content - Sentiment 5 10%
Analysis-Analytics in digital decoding consumer intent, decoding
customer sentiments from comments, Text mining from opinion
platforms
5 Predictive Analytics and Application of Analytics in Business
Logic driven predictive models – single-period purchase
decisions, multiple time period models, overbooking decisions,
Data Driven predictive models - retail pricing markdowns,
modeling relationships and trends
Models involving uncertainty - what-if analysis, scenario 10 20%
manager, goal-seek
Applications in other business areas - Analytics in telecom and
location based intelligence marketing, analytics in consumer
packaged goods (CPG), analytics in utilities, analytics in
healthcare, analytics in online retail
Final Examination
Page 9 of 86
.
ELECTIVES
Page 10 of 86
Course No. Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of
Introduction
FIN-T4-1 Financial Markets and Services 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The core objective of this course is to provide an understanding of the structure, operations and
trends in the Capital market and Money market. This will also help the student to understand the
various financial products and their innovations in the financial markets.
Syllabus
Nature and scope of financial markets and their operations-financial instruments- financial
institutions- Financial services- fund based services-innovations in financial services sector.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with the various concepts of
financial system and their operations. They will understand the latest trends in the financial
service sector.
References
1. Pandian P, Financial Services & Markets, Vikas publishing
2. Bansal, L.K., Merchant Banking and Financial Services, Unistar Books Pvt. Ltd.,
Chandigarh.
3. Khan, M,Y, Financial Services, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
4. E.F. Fama, Foundations of Finance, Basic Books Inc., New York.
5. Gordon.E & Natarajan K, Financial Markets and Services, Himalayala Publishing
House.
6. Bhole, L.M., Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
7. Chandra, P., Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. : 33
8. Kothari, C.R., Investment Banking and Customer Service, Arihand Publishers, Jaipur.
9. Frederic S. Mishkin, Financial Markets and Institutions, Pearson Publishing.
10. E.J. Elton, M.J. Gruber, S.J. Brown, W.N. Goetzmann, Modern Portfolio Theory and
Investment Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York
11. Keith Pilbeam, Finance and Financial Markets, Palgrave
12. Steven Valdez, an Introduction To Global Financial Markets, Macmillan Press Ltd.
13. Bhatia, B.S., and Batra, G.S., Financial Services, Deep & Deep Publishers, New Delhi.
Page 11 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Financial system and markets: Objectives of financial system-
1 concepts of financial system-financial concepts-development of 9 15
financial systems in India-weakness of Indian financial system.
Financial Markets - Money market-Organized and Unorganized-
Sub markets-Capital market- Primary market-IPO-FPO- NFO-
Book Building-Right Issue-Private placement- Bonus issue-Buy-
2 9 15
back-Secondary Market-Stock exchanges- Role and functions of
Stock Exchanges- BSE-NSE. Regulatory authorities and their
functions – RBI, SEBI
Financial instruments- Money market instruments- Call money
markets- Treasury bills-Repurchase agreements- Bankers
acceptance-Commercial paper- Certificate of deposits- 9
3 20
Commercial bill market-Capital market instruments- Shares-
debentures- Bonds-Financial institutions.
Financial Services-Nature and scope of financial services:

introduction-Objective-meaning of financial services-
4 classification of financial service industry-Financial innovation- 9 20
causes of financial innovation- Innovative Financial
Instruments- Challenges Facing the Financial Services Sector.
Financial Service Industry- Emergence and developments- Fund

based services- Merchant banking- Non-fund based services-
5 Leasing and hire purchasing- Bill discounting and Factoring- 9 30
Forfeiting- Securitization- Mutual Funds-Venture capital funds-
Depository participants.
Final Examination
Page 12 of 86
Introduction
FIN-T4-2 Project Finance 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The purpose of the course is to understand what project finance is, why and how it is used.
Students will learn what the necessary elements of project finance to include contractual
agreements, technology, sponsors, risk identification and mitigation, sources of capital, financial
structuring, the use of financial modeling and accounting considerations.
Syllabus
Need and importance of Project Finance-Market Appraisal- Technical appraisal-Financial

Appraisal of a project- Choice of Securities-External source of securities-Industrial Sickness and
Rehabilitation.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar to look at a project financing
as a viable financing option. Students would get a good knowledge about Financial, marketing and
Technical feasibility of a project.
References
1. Prasanna Chandra, Projects, planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Review,

Fourth Edition MC Graw Hill Publishing co.
2. Machiraju, H.R, Introduction to Project Finance, Vikas Publishing House.
3. Prasanna Chandra ,Financial Management Theory & Practical, ,Tata MC Graw Hill.
4. H R Machiraju , Project Finance , , Vikas publishing House, New Delhi.
5. HPS Pahwa, Project Reports and Appraisals, Bharat Law House.
6. Khan Beenhakker, H.L. Risk Management in Project Finance and Implementation. Westport, CT:
Quorum Books.
7. Esty, Benjamin, C. Modern Project Finance: A Casebook. New York NY: John Wiley & Sons.
8. Machiraju, HR, Indian Financial system, Vikas.
9. Kothari and Rajesh, Financial services in India: Concept and Application, Sage, New Delhi.
10. Rao, Ramesh K.S, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Macmillan Publishing Company,
New York.Francis, John Clark, Investment Analysis and Management, Mc Graw Hill Inc.
11. Machiraju, H R, International Financial Markets and India, Wheeler Publishers.
Page 13 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Over view of project finance- Characteristics of a project,
contents of a Detailed Project Report (DPR); introduction to
project finance- - scheme for project finance.- Entity risk-
1 9 15
transaction risk-Mitigating and Managing project Risk-Risk
Period-Financial Risk-Political Risk-Legal Risk-
Environmental Risk-Refinancing risk.
Feasibility Analysis- Demand forecasting- Market analysis-
Technical analysis- Competitive status of a project- Economic
2 9 15
Appraisal- Social Cost Benefit Analysis, Environmental Impact
Analysis.
Financial Feasibility - Cost of the project-Source of finance-
finance projection-Evaluation of cash flow and profitability-
Financial Analysis-Capital structure Analysis- Break Even 9
3 25
Analysis-Appraisal of Advanced Manufacturing System-
Financing Capital structure- Working capital Decision Capital
Budgeting Decision.
Source of Funding- Public issue- Regulation-SEBI guide line for
Debentures-Other Debt securities-Term loan- Development
4 9 25
Financial Institutions-IDBI-ICICI-IFCI-SFC-SIDBI-SCICI-
Commercial Banks-External Commercial Borrowing.
Industrial sickness and Rehabilitation- Industrial Sickness -
Identification of Sickness, causes of sickness - rehabilitation
5 programmers – Laws related to Sick Industries, RBI 9 20
guidelines. Financing of sick industries - Recovery
proceedings. Liquidation.
Final Examination
Page 14 of 86
Introduction
FIN-T4-3 Financial Risk Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Financial Risk management establishes standards for aggregating disparate information,

gathering market data, calculating risk measures and creating timely reporting tools for
management market, credit, and operational risks. This course is directed toward students
interested in understanding how large-scale complex risk can be quantified, needs to be managed
and mitigated.
Syllabus
Financial Risk Management, Risk Measurement & Control, Credit Risk Management, Operational
Risk Management and Market Risk Management.
Expected Outcomes
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. demonstrate knowledge of the range of financial and financial related risks facing
organisations.
2. understand the approach to risk management through risk identification, risk measurement
and risk management (or mitigation).
3. document and evaluate outcomes of risk management plans articulate the value of risk
management
References
1. Dun & B, Financial Risk Management, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited,2013
2. Brealey, Richard, Stewart Myers, Pitabas Mohanty, and Franklin Allen. Principles of Corporate
Finance, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2012
3. McDonald, Robert. Derivatives Markets, Pearson Education, 2014
4. Hull, John. Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives, Pearson Education, 2013
5. Hull, John, Risk Management and Financial Institutions (WSE), Wiley India Private Limited, 2012
6. Grinblatt, Mark, and Sheridan Titman. Financial Markets and Corporate Strategy. Mcgraw-hill,
1998
7. Garp Philippe Jorion, Financial Risk Manager Handbook, Wiley, 2013
8. Steve. L. Allen, Financial Risk Management: A Practitioner's Guide to Managing Market and
Credit Risk, John Wiley & Sons, 2013
9. Sharma and Meera, Management of Financial Institutions: With Emphasis on Bank and Risk
Page 15 of 86
Management, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2008
10. Jimmy Skolund and Wei Chen, Financial Risk Management: Applications in Market, Credit, Asset
and Liability Management and Firm wide Risk, John Wiley & Sons, 2015
11. Jayanth R. Varma, Risk Management Lessons from the Global Financial Crisis for Derivative
Exchanges, IIM Ahmedabad, http://www.iimahd.ernet.in/~jrvarma/papers/WP2009-02-06.pdf
12. Various Research articles from Prof. Jayanth R Varma from IIM Ahmedabad link:
http://www.iimahd.ernet.in/~jrvarma/download.php
Page 16 of 86
COURSE PLAN
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Financial Risk Management
Risk Management – Overview, Risk - Review of Modern Portfolio

Theory, (EMH) and behavioral finance, Review of key concepts in
1 probability and statistics; policies - Risk Process-Risk Organization - 8 20
Key risks-Credit risk, market risk, operational risk, liquidity risk, legal
risk, interest rate risk and currency risk; Intro to risk management; The
Role of Risk Management - The Tools of Risk Management -
Measuring risk, Packaging risk, Pricing risk.
Risk Measurement & Control
Risk Measurement & Control - Calculation - Risk exposure analysis -

Risk management / mitigation policy - Risk immunization policy,
strategy for fixing exposure limits - Risk management policy and
2 (a) procedure - Risk adjusted return on capital; 6 10
Risk management - Capital adequacy norms - Prudential norms -

Exposure norms - Concept of Mid office - Forwards - Futures - Options
- Strategies and Arbitrage opportunities - Regulatory prescriptions of
risk management.
Value at Risk -VaR Risk measures for various asset classes Need for
VaR- Historical VaR Parametric VaR Time scaling Portfolio VaR VaR
Tools - Marginal, Component VaR, etc. RAROC Barings revisited;
2(b) 4 10
Measurement Errors GARCH Volatility Models; Back Testing Fat Tails
Extreme value Theory; Liquidity Risk and Leverage Liquidity Risk
Impact of Leverage Hedge funds and their risk measures.
Page 17 of 86
Credit Risk Management
Overview - Basel-I - Three pillars of Basel-II, Basel III and Capital for
Operational risk - Frame work for risk management - RBI guidelines on
risk management - Risk rating and risk pricing - Methods for estimating
3 capital requirements - Credit risk - standardized approach - Credit risk - 9 20
advanced approach - Credit rating / credit scoring and rating system
design - Credit Bureaus - Stress test and sensitivity analysis - Internal
Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) - Introduction to
structured products.
Operational Risk Management
Operational Risk - Definition, Basel-I & II - RBI guidelines - Likely

forms of operational risk and causes for significant increase in
operational risk - Sound Principles of Operational Risk Management
4 (SPOR) - SPOR - organizational set up and key responsibilities of ORM 9 20
- SPOR - policy requirements and strategic approach for ORM - SPOR
identification, measurement, control / mitigation of operational risks -
Capital allocation for operational risk, methodology, qualifying criteria
for banks for the adoption of the methods - Computation of capital
charge for operational risk.
Market Risk Management
Market Risk - Introduction and definition - Prescriptions of Basel-I and

II - Liquidity risk - Interest rate risk - Foreign exchange risk - Price
5 risk (Equity) - Commodity risk - Treatment of market risk under Basel 9 20
a) Standardized duration method b) Internal measurement approach -
VaR Basel-III guidelines - Risk Management Policy - ALCO structure
and functions; Review of industry leading risk management system.
Final Examination
Page 18 of 86
Introduction
FIN-T4-4 Commercial Banking System 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are:
• To provide basic knowledge of banking;
• To familiarize the students with the changing scenario of Indian banking;
• To gain insight into E-banking services;
• To familiarize the students with the functions of RBI.
Syllabus
Modern Banking, Retail Banking, Banking sector reforms, Merchant Banking and RBI
Expected Outcome
This course aims to help students to understand the concepts, policy framework and Environment
of Banking and Central bank functions.
References
1. Shelagh, Modern Banking, Cass Business School, City University London, John Wiley &
Sons
2. K.C.Nanda, Credit and Banking, Response Book, Sage Publications, I 999.
3. Sundaram K.P.M. and Varshney P.N., Banking and Financial System, Sultan Chand &
Sons.
4. S. Gurusamy , Financial Services & System , Vijay Nicole Imprints Pvt Ltd.
5. H.I. Bedi & V.K. Hardikar, Practical Banking.
6. B K Swain , Commercial Banking in a changing scenario, Excel Books
Page 19 of 86
Course Plan

No. allotted marks
in
final
exam
1 Banking: Role of banks in business - structure of commercial banking 10 20
in India — Changing scenario in commercial Banking. Public sector
and private sector banks scheduled banks — foreign banks new
generation banks - functions of commercial banks
2 Innovations in banking-Social banking-Lead bank scheme -Offshore 10 25
banking- Consortium banking-Negotiable instruments Cheque
Truncation system-E-Purse. Customer services, creation of credit.
Retail banking-Products and services- NPA-Its management

3 E-Banking: Centralized Online Real Time Electronic Banking 5 10
(CORE) Electronic Clearing Service (ECS) , Electronic Fund Transfer
(EFT) ,Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS) ,National Electronic Fund
Transfer (NEFT) ,Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial
Telecommunications ( SWIFT ) ,E-Cheque ,Any Time Money ,ATMs
, Credit Cards , Debit Cards , Smart Cards ,Internet Banking ,Phone
Banking , Mobile Banking.
4 Reserve Bank of India and its function-Banking Sector Reforms : 10 20

Basel Norms — Capital Adequacy norms Global Challenges in
Banking Services — New Trends in Banking Services –Business
strategies of Banks-Instruments of Credit Control

5 Merchant banking - historical perceptive - nature of services provided 10 25
by Merchant bankers- structure of merchant banking firm - setting up
and managing a merchant bank – SEBI regulations on merchant
banks.
Final Examination
Page 20 of 86
Introduction
FIN-T4-5 Investment Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Investment management course is to help students to understand the investments field as it is

currently understood and practiced for sound investment decisions making. Further, key concepts
are presented to provide an appreciation of the theory and practice of investments, focusing on
investment portfolio formation and management issues.
Syllabus
Investment- Investment alternatives- Risk associated in Investment- types of risk in investment—

Money market- money market Instruments- Capital Market- Stock Exchanges in India-Depository
System- investor’s protection
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with various Investment
avenues; they can select best investment opportunities on the basis of risk and return.
References
1. Rajesh Kothari, Financial Services in India, Sage Publication.

2. Machiraju, HR, Indian Financial system, Vikas Publishers.
3. Khan, M.Y. Financial Services, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Punithavathy Pandian, Financial Services and Markets, Vikas Publishers.
5. Kothari and Rajesh, Financial services in India: Concept and Application, Sage, New
Delhi.
6. Gordon, E & Natarajan, K. Financial Markets & Services, Himalaya Publishers.
7. Bodie, Zvi, Alex Kane, and Alan J. Markus, Investments, McGraw Hill.
8. Instefjord, Norvald, Study Guide Investment Management, London: University of London
Press.
9. Grinblatt, Mark and Sheridan Titman, Financial Markets and Corporate Strategy, McGraw
Hill Irwin.
10. Bode, Zvi, Alex Kane, Alan J. Marcus. Investments. McGraw Hill.
Page 21 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Investment –objectives-speculation- Investment decision process-
Investment versus financing-Investment environment- types of
1 9 20
investment-concepts of risk and return- Types of Risk-
relationship between risk and return--Investment Analysis.
Types of investment-long term - short term and medium term-
Equity shares-Preference shares - Debentures and Bonds-
2 institutional investment- public Deposit-Leasing- Venture capital- 9 20
Mutual finds- Types of mutual funds-Derivatives- portfolio
Management.
Money market- features- objective- Money market instrument-
Call Money market-Commercial Bill Market- Commercial paper-
Certificate of Instrument- operations of money market instrument- 9
3 20
features of Indian Money Market-working of money market
systems in India- recent development of Money markets in India.
Capital Market structure in India-functions; New issue market-
working of new issue market in India- players of new issue
4 Market- objective-secondary market-BSE- NSE- OTCEI- working 9 20
of stock exchanges in India- Trading Mechanism-Listing- online
trading-Stock brokers-Depository system.
Investors’ protections- Factors affecting investors- Investors
protection measurement-measures taken by stock Exchanges-
5 9 20
measures taken by company Law board- Measures taken by SEBI-
SEBI Guide lines.
Final Examination
Page 22 of 86
Introduction
FIN-T4-6 Financial Statement Analysis 4-0-0 0 2016
Course Objectives
The aim of the course is to help the students analyze and interpret the financial
statements effectively for making important business decisions. The objective is also to
use this information to make forecasts and evaluation of firms.
Syllabus
Financial Statements, Techniques for financial statements, Ratio Analysis, Forecasts and
projections, Valuation and modeling.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students are expected to acquire knowledge on the concepts, tools
and techniques of financial statement analysis. The students should be able to make forecasts on
the basis of the financial statements.
References
1. Sinha.Gokul, Financial Statement Analysis PHI Learning Private Ltd.

2. T.R. Robinson, E. Henry, W.L.P. Pirie, M.A. Broihahn, International Financial Statement
Analysis, John Wiley and Sons.
3. P.P. Drake, F.J. Fabozzi, Analysis of Financial Statement, John Wiley and Sons.
4. Fridson.Martin, Alvarez.Fernando, Financial Statement Analysis, John Wiley and Sons.
Page 23 of 86
% of
Sl No Hours
Topics marks in
allotted
trimester
Financial statements- Balance sheet-Income Statements, Fund flow
1 statements-Uses of financial statements; Financial statement 4 10%
analysis- Inter firm and intra firm analysis.
Techniques for Financial Statement Analysis-comparative financial

2a
statements-common size financial statements-trend analysis- 8 20%
Percentages
Ratio Analysis-Roles of Ratios in FSA; Analysis of Financial

2b 3 5%
Statements through ratios-short term solvency analysis
Long term solvency analysis-profitability analysis-Activity

3 analysis-DuPont Analysis, Cash flow analysis- cash flow 8 20%
statements-format and presentation of cash flows
Forecasts and projections-Forecasting from book value-forecasting

4 7 15%
from earnings and book value

Forecasting from accounting rate of returns-forecasting profitability
5a 3 5%
and sales; analysis
Valuation and Modeling- Price –to-book ratios and Price earnings
ratio-Trading compa rable analysis-Discounted cash flow
5b 12 25%
model(DCF)-Accounting book values-Free cash flow-Cost of
capital-Sensitivity
Final Examination
Page 24 of 86
Course No Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of Induction
HR-T4-1 Training and Development 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course is designed to examine and develop theoretical and applied perspectives on the role of
training and development, needs assessment, design, development, delivery and evaluation of
training and development in the organization. Emphasis is given in specific development of
learning and performance outcomes throughout the training and development process.
Syllabus
Overview of Training & Development, T&D Methods & Models, Training Program designing,
Training Evaluation and Modern technology utilization for Training.
Expected Outcome
1. Make recommendations for solving organizational training and development issues

2. Identify situations where human resource training would enhance organizational competitive
advantage
3. Identify proper training and development approach
4. Create and implement a training needs analysis based on assessment
5. Make recommendations for type of training plan and delivery approach.
References
1. Raymond A Noe and Amitabh Dep Kodwani, Employee Training and Development,
McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited
2. P. Nick Blanchard, Effective Training; Pearson Education,
3. Bucklet, R., and Caple, J. The theory and practice of Training (5th ed.). Kogan Page
India Private Limited,
4. Lynton, R., and Pareek, U.; Training for Organizational Transformation for Policy
Makers and Change Managers, Sage India,
5. Kaye Thorne and David Mackey. Handbook of Training, Crest Publishing House.
6. Rae, L; How to Measure Training Effectiveness, Gower.
7. P. Nick Blanchard, James W. Thacker; Effective Training: Systems, Strategies &
Practices,; Pearson Education.
8. Robert I Sutton and Huggy Rao, Scaling Up Excellence: Getting to More Without
Settling for Less, Crown Business.
9. Alan M Saks, Managing Performance through Training and Development, Nelson
Page 25 of 86
Canada.
10. Padmaja Krishaswamy, Evaluation of Training, Kindle edition,.
11. Kevin Kruse and Jason Keil, Technology-Based Training: The Art and Science of
Design, Development, and Delivery, Jossey Bass; Pap/Cdr edition, 2000
12. Kurt VanLehn ,The Behavior of Tutoring Systems, University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh,
PA, USA [email protected];
http://www.learnlab.org/opportunities/summer/readings/06IJAIED.pdf
13. Valerie J. Shute and Joseph Psotka, Intelligent Tutoring Systems: Past, Present and
Future, Soft Technologies: Instructional and Informational Design Research,
http://myweb.fsu.edu/vshute/pdf/shute%201996_d.pdf
14. Learning Management Systems (LMS), Various resources at
http://elearningindustry.com/subjects/elearning-software/learning-management-
systems-lms
Page 26 of 86
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Training & Development: Overview, The changing

organizations, employee training scenario – India, Asia and
Global; Strategic training; Training as a tool for employee
performance enhancement; T&D from a change model
perspective; Models of Training; Systematic Model, The
Transitional Model, , Understanding Learning Concepts.
Role, competencies of training professionals; Training

1 9 20
investment leaders, Role of HR department in in-house
training; organizational characteristics that influence training,
Role of employees and managers in training; Diversity
training; cross-cultural training.
Training Needs Analysis: The process and approaches of TNA,

Team Work for conducting Training Needs Analysis, TNA and
Training Process Design.
T&D Methods & Models:
Traditional training methods – presentation methods, lecture,

audiovisual techniques, hands-on methods, OJT, self directed
learning, apprenticeship, simulations, case studies, business
games, role plays, behaviour modelling, adventure learning,
team training, action learning; e-learning, MOOCs (Massive
Open Online Course), Coursera platforms; Employee
development – issues and challenges in Training &
2 9 20
Development.
Models of organizing training – Faculty model, customer

model, matrix model, corporate university model, business
embedded model.
Learning theories – Reinforcement theories, social learning

theory; goal theories – goal setting theory, goal orientation;
Need theories – expectancy theory, adult learning theory,
information processing theory; Learning process – mental and
Page 27 of 86
physical process, the learning cycle, Kolbe’s Learning
inventory, Age influence on learning, instructional emphasis
for learning outcomes.
Training Program designing;
Understanding & developing the objectives of training,

facilitation of training with focus on trainee (motivation of
trainee, reinforcement, goal setting), training with focus on
training design (learning environment, pre-training
communication);
Designing effective training programs – selecting and

preparing the training site, training room, seating
3 arrangements, choosing trainers, designing document, course 9 20
or lesson plan;
Applications of transfer of training theory – Theory of

identical elements, stimulus generalization approach,
cognitive theory of transfer – Factors influencing transfer,
climate for transfer, manager support, peer support,
opportunity to perform, technological support; Organizational
environments that encourage transfer – The Learning
Organization, knowledge and knowledge management – keys
for effective knowledge management.
Training Evaluation
Formative evaluation, summative evaluation, evaluation

process, outcomes used in the evaluation of training program;
Reaction outcome; Learning or cognitive outcomes; behaviour
and skill based outcomes; affective outcomes; results, ROI,;
4 9 20
Models and approach - Kirkpatrick’s model, Jack J Philips
Training evaluation model, COMA Model, CIPP Model, IPO
Model, TVS approach; evaluating the outcomes; relevance,
reliability, discrimination, practicality; evaluation practices;
Myers-Briggs Type indicators; evaluation designs – types,
calculating ROI, Determining costs, benefits, cost-benefit
Page 28 of 86
analysis; measuring human capital and training activity.
Modern technology utilization for Training:
Computer-based teaching and learning, web-based training, e-

learning and learning portals; Advantages of online learning,
effectiveness of online learning; blended learning, simulation,
virtual reality, virtual worlds, advantages and disadvantages
5 of virtual learning; mobile technology and training, use of 9 12
tablet computer, Smartphone in learning;
Intelligent tutoring systems; expert systems, group wave,

electronic performance support systems; technology for
training administration – interactive voice technology,
imaging; Learning management systems (LMS).
Final Examination
Page 29 of 86
Introduction
HR-T4-2 Organizational Change & 4-0-0 3 2016

Development
Course Objectives
This course will examine change in the workplace from multiple perspectives. There will be a review of
forces and factors shaping today’s workplace. This course will attempt to increase the student’s
awareness and capabilities in operating as a change agent.
Syllabus
Overview of Organization, Development and change, OD Process, Designing OD Interventions,

appreciating Change and Mobilizing support and executing change.
Expected Outcome
• Accurately identify and describe the historical and contemporary transformations impacting the
workplace and how those factors impact organizations and their work.
• Recognize common symptoms and reactions to change in the workplace and recommended
interventions to address the reactions/resistance.
• Describe the main principles and characteristics of the multiple models for managing
organizational change and apply those models in analyzing organizational change initiatives.
• Evaluate and assess an organizational change program.
• Develop an awareness of influencing and facilitating change.
References
1. Weisbord, M. R. Productive Workplaces Revisited: Dignity, Meaning, and Community in the 21st
Century, John Wiley & Sons
2. Brown, D. R. An experiential approach to organization development, Pearson Education.
3. Donald L Anderson, Organization Development: The Process of Leading Organizational Change, SAGE
South Asia; Second edition.
4. Lenny T Ralph, Organization Development (A Practitioner S Tool Kit), Viva Books Private Limited.
5. Thomas G. Cummings and Christopher G. Worley, Theory of Organization Development and Change,
Cengage.
6. C.S.G Ramakrishnan and Lalitha Krishnamacharayulu, Organization Development, Kindle Edition, PHI
Learning Private Limited, India.
7. Nicole Zimmermann, Dynamics of Drivers of Organizational Change, Gabler Verlag.
Page 30 of 86
8. Wendell French, Organization Development and Transformation: Managing Effective Change, McGraw
Hill Education India Private Limited.
9. S. Ramnarayan and TV Rao, Organization Development: Interventions and Strategies, SAGE
Publications Pvt. Ltd.
10. OD Practitioner, Handbook for Strategic HR: Best Practices in Organization Development from the OD
Network , Kindle edition, Amacom.
11. Dr Mee-Yan Cheung-Judge, Linda Holbeche, Organization Development: A Practitioner's Guide for OD
and HR, Kogan Page.
12. Katalin Dobrai and Ferenc Farkas, The relationship between individual and organizational
development – findings of a large sample research,
http://c.ymcdn.com/sites/www.istr.org/resource/resmgr/WP2014/WP-2014-Dobrai-K-Farkas-F-No.pdf
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Organization, Development and change:
Organization – Overview, different perspectives - the strategic

design perspective, the political perspective, and
the cultural perspective.
1(a) 6 8
Organization development –, growth and relevance, history
and evolution; Theories of planned change, general model of
planned change, different types of planned change and
critique of planned change; employee behavior and
motivation; implications for managing change and OD; The
human relations, social; OD and reinventing the organization.
Change - Diagnosing change, open systems theory and systems

thinking, socio-technical systems theory and work redesign;
Red Queen effect, Organizational Inertia; Change levers and
organizational change and OD; human performance and the
1(b) 3 7
implications for managing change; the role of communication
and information in change and OD. Greenfields and
Greenfielding; OD practitioner role, competencies and
professional ethics.
Page 31 of 86
OD Process
Initiating OD relationship, contracting and diagnosing the

problem; Diagnosing models, open systems, individual level
group level and organizational level diagnosis; collection and
analysis for diagnostics information, feeding back the
diagnosed information.
2 9 20
Envisioning change and OD - Organization renewal, planned

change; OD and changing organizational culture - Strong and
weak organizational cultures and their implications for
change; Stakeholder analysis, force field analysis and action
research; Weisbord's six box model and creating
organizational change for dignity, meaning and community.
Designing OD Interventions:
Human process interventions – coaching, training and

development, process consultation, business process
reengineering, third party intervention, and team building;
Organization confrontation meeting, intergroup relations
intervention and large group intervention, involvement, socio
technical systems approach;
HRM and Strategic interventions – Performance management,

3 goal setting, performance coaching, appraising and rewarding; 9 25
career planning, workforce diversity interventions, wellness
and work-life balance; Strategic interventions – competitive
strategies, collaborative strategies, organizational
transformation, culture change, self designing organizations,
learning and knowledge management;
Applications of OD – OD in health care organizations, family

owned business, educational institutions.
Page 32 of 86
Appreciating Change
External environment as drivers of change, business cycles,

industry cycles, technology and strategic change, industry
4 evolution and concentration, developing a change agenda; 9 20
Cognition and organizational change, mental models,
organizational learning, Senge’s five disciplines, business
models and value propositions, refining the change agenda.
Mobilizing support and executing change
Four approaches to change, parallel organization, ownership

and involvement in change, dealing with political aspects of
change, the psychology of persuasion, communicating to
5 influence, targeting influence efforts, framing change, making 9 20
difficult choices, negotiating change; Executing change –
challenges of execution, execution framework, developing
cross functional linkages, aligning policies, and removing
structural impediments, developing new routines for
innovation and improvement, considering human element.
Final Examination
Page 33 of 86
Introduction
HR-T4-3 Industrial Relations and Labour 4-0-0 3 2016

Laws
Course Objectives
This course provides insights on all the dimensions of industrial relations and labour laws. The
course focuses on the history and theory relating to the industrial relations and provides detailed
on specific provisions of labour laws being enforced in India.
Syllabus
Industrial Relations and Trade Unions, Strikes, Lockout, Lay-off and Retrenchment, Arbitration,
Social justice and welfare, Acts and Laws.
Expected Outcome
1. acquire a solid theoretical, practical and ethical perspective on many aspects of industrial
relations
2. critically analyse theories, models, and paradigms in the field
3. understand the key participants, institutions, relationships and processes in employment
relations, so that the student acquire an enhanced ability to influence industrial relations
outcomes in an informed manner
References
1. Piyali Gosh and Shefali Nandan, Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, McGraw Hill.
2. S.C. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, S. Chand & Company Ltd.
3. Mamoria CB, Mamoria, Gankar, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya Publications.
4. P.R. Sinha, Indu Bala Sinha and Seema Priyadarshini Shekar, Industrial Relations, Trade Unions
and Labour Legislation, Pearson Education.
5. S.N. Mishra, Labour and Industrial Laws, Central Law Publication.
6. Venkata Ratnam , Industrial Relations , Oxford.
7. S. Asaithambi, The Emerging Issues on Labour Problems in India under Globalization, Abhijit
Publications.
8. Ministry of Labour and Employment, India, http://labour.nic.in/
9. Making India a Better workplace for All, Ebook, Ministry of Labour and Employment, India
10. International Labour Organization, www.ilo.org
Page 34 of 86
Page 35 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Industrial Relations and Trade Unions
Concept of Industrial Relations - Factors affecting industrial

relations, importance of Industrial Relations, Collective
bargaining;
1 6 20
International Labour Organisation : Genesis, development and
dimensions, aims and objectives, Organs of the International
Labour Organisation; Role of the Trade Unions in Modern
Industrial Society of India - Trade Union of Employers and
Workers, their forms and types in India.
Strikes, Lockout, Lay-off and Retrenchment
Strike and Lockout - Legal and illegal strikes and lockouts,

Justified and unjustified strikes and lockouts, Strike and
lockout in public utility services and other industries,
Distinction between lockout and closure, strike and lockout.
20
2 6
Lay-off and Retrenchment –difference between lay-off and
Retrenchment their application, necessary preconditions for
their application, lay-off and retrenchment compensation,
special provisions relating to lay-off, retrenchment and
closure in certain establishments, penalty and punishment for
illegal lay-off or retrenchment, consequences of illegal lay-off
or retrenchment.
Arbitration
Reference of industrial disputes for settlement - Settlement

machinery for Industrial Disputes, Conciliation Officer, Board
of Conciliation, Court of Enquiry, Labour Court, Industrial
3 9 20
Tribunal and National Tribunal and Arbitration, their
composition, powers, and duties, different modes of
settlement, Distinction between conciliation arbitration and
adjudication, their merits and demerits, compulsory and
voluntary arbitration.
Social justice and welfare
Concept of Social Justice, Working conditions in Organised and

Unorganised sectors; Origin and growth of concept of Labour
4 9 20
Welfare; Scope of Labour Welfare within and outside Factory
premises; Theories of Labour Welfare; Role of Government,
employers and worker trade union vis-a-vis Labour Welfare;
Role of Labour Welfare Officer.
Page 36 of 86
Acts and Laws (objectives and key provisions):
1. The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947

2. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act,
1946
3. The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
4. The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965
5 5. The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 15 20
6. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936
7. The Trade Unions Act, 1926
8. The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous
Provisions Act, 1952
9. The Employees Compensation Act, 1923
10. The Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace
(Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013
Page 37 of 86
Introduction
HR-T4-4 Managing Self and Others 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The goal of this course is to understand how the effective manager should be in an organization in
order to improve both efficiency and quality of employee life. The course will give the students
insight into the psychological factors of employee which will directly and indirectly impact their
work life or Life.
Syllabus
Basic Personality development factors -Stress management-Time management-Emotional

Intelligence-leadership and change management-Crisis management.
Expected Outcome
On successful completion of this one should be able to understand how effective a manager can be
in an organization by giving importance to factors that impact Work Life as well as personal life.
References
1. Schermerhorn J.R. Jr., Hunt J.G & Osborn R.N., Managing Organizational Behaviour,
John Wiley
2. Luthans, Organizational Behaviour , McGraw Hill, International
3. Daniel Goleman, Working with Emotional Intelligence.USA:Bantam Books
4. Prasad,Colonel V.R.K Managerial Effectiveness-Concepts and Cases, ICFAI University
Press.
5. Rastogi, P.N, Managing Creativity for Corporate Excellence. Macmillan India Ltd.
Page 38 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Allotted marks in
final
exam
I Managerial Effectiveness- Characteristics of An Effective 8 20
Manager- Basic Managerial Skills, Productivity, Effective
Decision –Making , Effective Communication, Participation,
Creativity-Developing and Enhancing Creativity- Interpersonal
Skills-Transactional Analysis-, Ethical managers
II Importance of Time Management- Analysis of Time, Planning 9 20

Time and Resource, Setting Goals and Objectives, Planning To
Achieve Goals, Creativity, Importance Of Being Creative,
Developing Creativity, Enhancing Creativity
First Internal Exam
III Emotional Intelligence In Management; The Nature of 12 25
Emotional Intelligence; Evolution of Emotional Intelligence;
Components of Emotional Intelligence; Analyzing the Impact of
Emotions In The Workplace; Applications of Emotional
Intelligence In The Workplace; Emotional Intelligence In India
Organization; Improving Emotional Intelligence; Interpersonal
Skill; Introduction to Interpersonal Skills; Developing
Interpersonal Skills
IV Stress Management; Kinds of Stress- Sources Of Stress, Effects 7 15
Of Stress Strategies For Coping With Stress Maintaining Work –
Life Balance Spiritually and Stress Management -Managing
Stress-Burnout Management-Yoga and Meditation
Second Internal Exam
V Change management Skills -Leadership Skills -Crisis 9 20
Management Skills-Identifying and Preventing a Crisis-
Resolving the crisis-Communication In Crisis Management
Final Exam 45 100
Page 39 of 86
Introduction
HR-T4-5 Talent Sourcing & Acquisition 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Increasingly, the one true competitive advantage an organization possesses is its ability to manage its pool
of talent. This course will help students broaden their knowledge in the wide-sweeping area of talent
management. It also aims at providing an insight on Talent management strategies & ways of talent
retention in the changing competitive environment.
Syllabus
Identifying requirement needs through all stages of talent sourcing and acquisition and then talent retention
and identifying the returns on talent to an organization.
Expected Outcome

1. Examine strategies to fill critical needs identified through a gap analysis
2. Identify key requirements to attract and acquire skilled talent
3. Explore best practices for developing talent
4. Understand the key elements to engage and retain skilled resources
5. Examine HR metrics and measures of success for talent management strategy
References
6. Shukla R. Talent management: Process of developing & integrating skilled worker. Global India
Publications
7. Hasan M , Singh A & Dhamija S.Talent management in India: Challenges & opportunities.
Atlantic Publishers & Distributor.
8. Cheese, Peter, Robert J Thomas and Elizabeth Craig, The Talent Powered Organization, Kogan
Page Ltd.
9. Stringer, Hank & Rusty Rueff, Talent Force: A New Manifesto for the Human Side of Business,
Pearson Education, Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River, New Jersey
10. Sears David, Successful Talent Strategies, American Management Association, AMACOM, Press,
New York
11. Lawyer III, Edward E, Talent: Making People your Competitive Advantage, Dave Ulrich,
JosseyBass, A Wiley Imprint
12. Phillips, Jack J, Lisa Edwards, Managing Talent Retention, An ROI Approach, Pfeiffer, A Wiley
Imprint
13. David, Tony, Maggie Cutt, Neil Flynn, Peter Mowl and Simon Orme, Talent Assessment, Gower
Publishing Ltd., Hampshire Ltd.
14. Shally Steckerl: The Talent Sourcing & Recruitment Handbook: Source Better, Smarter, Faster &
Cheaper Than the Competition, Weddle's.
15. Ann W. Sholar: The Talent Sourcing and Recruitment Handbook , CreateSpace Independent
Page 40 of 86
Publishing Platform.
16. Lance Berger and Dorothy Berger: The Talent Management Handbook: Creating a Sustainable
Competitive Advantage by Selecting, Developing, and Promoting the Best People, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited.
17. Jack J Philips and Lisa Edwards: Managing Talent Retention: An ROI Approach, Pfeiffer.
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Talent identification, Sourcing and development:
Glimpse of recruitment industry in India; Necessary skills mapping;
Identifying talent needs; Sourcing talent; Developing talent,
1 deployment of talent; Establishing talent management system; Offer 7 20
management; Role of HR in talent management.
Understanding the Job Requisitions:

Job Requisition Understanding and Meeting with Clients/Hiring
Managers; Managing Different types of Clients/Hiring Managers;
Maintaining relationships with the clients/Hiring Managers;
Understanding Resumes; IT and Sourcing (Selecting Keywords,
2 12 20
Understanding how Search Engine/Databases work, Basics of
Boolean Search, Designing a Sourcing Toolkit); Social Media for
Talent Sourcing (Linkedin, FaceBook, Twitter, Online Talent
communities) ; Online employer branding. Reference checks, using
social media behaviour.
Talent acquisition:
Recruitment and selection strategies; Career planning and
3 management; Succession planning; Socialization and induction of 10 20
new employees; Training and development; Executive development
program.
Talent Retention
Cost and consequences of talent departure; Diagnosing causes of
4 talent departure (exit interview);Measuring and monitoring 10 20
turnover and retention data; Designing engagement strategies;
Drivers of engagements.
ROI of Talent:
Measuring contribution of talent to business performance;
5 Talent metrics; Measuring human capital investment; 6 20
Transformation and reorganization of HR, new imperatives;
Talent forces of tomorrow.
Final Examination
Page 41 of 86
Introduction
HR-T4-6 Industrial Psychology 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The goal of this course is to understand how the business can be designed so that both efficiency and
quality of employee life can be improved. The course will give the students insight into the psychological
factors of employee which will direct and indirect impact on their work life.
Syllabus
Basic Psychological factors-individual differences-perceptions-learning-motivation; Job satisfaction.

Emotions- emotional intelligent- individual behavior within the group and outside the group
Expected Outcome
On successful completion of this one should be able to understand how and why a person behaves in certain
ways according to the sitaution
References
1. Davis K. & Newstrom J.W., Human Behaviour at work , Mcgraw Hill Iternational
2. Schermerhorn J.R.Jr., Hunt J.G &Osborn R.N., Managing Organizational Behaviour, John Wiley
3. Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill, International
4. Morgan C.T.,King R.A.,John Rweisz &John Schoples, Introduction to Psychology, McHraw Hill.
5. Blum M.L. Naylor J.C., Harper & Row, Industrial Psychology, CBS Publisher
COURSE PLAN
Allotted in final
exam
I Psychology as a science area of applications – study of 8 20
individual- individual differences-study of behavior-
stimulus response behavior heredity and environment
human mind attitude- personality
II Basic Psychological aspects- Perceptions- Factors 12 25

influencing perceptions- perceptual processes; implications
of perceptions on organizational Behavior; Learning –
learning theories- components of learning- determinants of
Page 42 of 86
learning- principles of reinforcement and Motivation-
Types of motivation-Theories of motivation-Requirements
of sound motivation- methods of motivating people in
organization; job satisfaction and working environment
and work design
First Internal exam
III Emotions- dimensions of emotions; Theories of emotions- 9 20
James-Lange theory, Cannon-Bard theory, Schachter-
Singer theory, Opponent-Process Theory; Emotional
intelligent; Domains of emotional intelligent; emotional
intelligence Vs Intelligent quotient
IV Individual and Group-group and inter group dynamics; 7 15
managing group in organization- intra- group behavior and
inter group behavior; self change- resistance to change-
nature of change-transactional analysis
Second Internal Exam
V Mentoring, Mentor, Role of Mentor- Mentoring inside the 9 20
organization. Counseling-Importance of counseling-role of
counsellor-Clinical counsellor.
Final Exam 45 100
Page 43 of 86
Introduction
MKT-T4-1 Rural Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Majority of Indian population resides in rural parts of the country, which makes it a potential
market. To tap such market potential the organizations resorts to Rural Marketing using
paradigms fit for such a market. This course intends to provide an overview of rural markets and
emerging perspectives of rural marketing, thus imparting managerial initiatives and relevant
frameworks used by business managers for rural markets.
Syllabus
Rural Market, Rural Consumer Behavior, Rural Marketing Research , Segmenting, Targeting and
Positioning, Product & Pricing Strategies for Rural Markets, Marketing of Agricultural Products,
Rural and Urban Markets
Expected Outcome
framework of Rural Economy, Rural Marketing theory & practices and Rural consumer behavior.
References
1. Pradeep Kashyap, The Rural Marketing, Pearson Education.
2. R. V. Badi and N.V. Badi, Rural Marketing, Himalaya Publishing.
3. Sanal Kumar Velayudhan, Rural Marketing: Targeting the Non-urban Consumer, Sage
Publications.
4. C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu and Lalitha R, Rural Marketing, Pearson.
5. S. Singh, Rural Marketing – Focus on Agricultural Inputs, Vikas Publishing House.
6. Shepherd, A., “A Guide To Maize Marketing For Extension Officers”. Extension Guide 1,
Marketing & Rural Finance Service. FAO, Rome.
http://www.fao.org/docrep/013/i1792e/i1792e00.pdf
7. Balaram Dogra & Karminder Ghuman, Rural Marketing: Concept & Cases, Tata Mcgraw-Hill
Publishing Company.
8. A.K. Singh and S. Pandey, Rural Marketing: Indian Perspective, New Age International
Publishers.
9. CSG Krishnamacharylu & Laitha Ramakrishna, - Rural Marketing, Pearson Education Asia.
10. RamKishen, New Perspectives in Rural & Agricultural Marketing, Jaico Publishing House.
Page 44 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Rural Market : Rural Market in India- Size & Scope, Rural
development as a core area, Efforts put for Rural development by
1 government, Emerging Profile of Rural Markets in India, 9 15
Problems of rural market. Constraints in Rural Marketing and
Strategies to overcome constraints.
Rural Consumer Behaviour: Rural Consumer Vs Urban Consumer

– a comparison, Factors affecting Rural Consumer Behaviour-
2 Social factors, Cultural factors, Technological factors. 9 15
Rural Marketing Research : Process of Research in Rural Markets,
Approaches in Rural Markets.

Segmenting, Targeting and Positioning: Conditions for Effective
Market Segmentation, Approaches for Segmenting the Rural
Market, Rural Market Segmentation Tools.
Product & Pricing Strategies for Rural Markets : Rural Product 9
3 20
classification, Product Decisions and Strategies, Product Life
Cycle Strategies in Rural Markets, New Product Development in
Rural Markets, Rural pricing Strategies.
Promotion & Distribution Strategies for Rural Markets:

4 Advertising, Advertising mix factors, Media planning, Objectives 9 20
of advertising and sales promotion
Rural and Urban Markets: Comparative Analysis, Parameters
Differentiating Urban & Rural Markets, Similarities and
Differences in Consumer Behaviour in Rural & Urban Markets.
5 9 30
Marketing of Agricultural Produce and Inputs: Regulated
markets, Cooperative Marketing & Processing Societies,
Corporate Sector in Agri-Business: Cultivation, Processing &
Retailing; Rural Marketing of FMCGs.
Final Examination
Page 45 of 86
Introduction
MKT-T4-2 Consumer Behavior 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to acquaint the students with latest trends in consumer behavior. The
different paradigms discussed in the course are careful blend of several theories and practices
propagated by behavior theorists in understanding the contemporary practices of consumer
behavior. The course also gives due importance in discussing the various models of consumer
behavior which shall be helpful in building a concrete basement for the student understanding.
Syllabus
Introduction to Consumer Behavior, Market Research and Consumer Behavior , Market

Segmentation and Positioning,Environmental Influence on Consumer Behavior, Consumer
Attitude Formation and Change, Consumer Decision Making Process: Diffusion Innovation
Model,Models of Consumer Behavior.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students shall get acquainted with the different consumer behavior
paradigms. The students shall also get to know the various contemporary practices of consumer
behavior which shall help them in taking decisions in the due course of their career.
References
1. Leon G. Schiffman, Leslie Lazar Kanuk and Havard Hansen, Consumer Behavior, Pearson
Education.
2. David Loudon and Albert J Della Bitta, Consumer Behavior, Concepts and Applications,
McGraw-Hill Inc.
3. J Paul Peter and Jerry C. Olson, Consumer Behavior and Marketing Strategy, McGraw-Hill
Education (ISE Editions).
4. Satish K Batra and SHH Kazmi, Consumer Behaviour, Excel Books.
5. Delbert I Hawkins, Roger J Best and David L Mothersbaugh, Consumer Behaviour –
Building Marketing Strategy, McGraw-Hill Higher Education.
6. Jagdish N. Sheth and Banwari Mittal, Customer Behavior: A Managerial Perspective,
S.Chand (G/L) & Company Ltd.
7. Roger J Best, Del Hawkins and Kenneth Coney, Consumer Behaviour: Implications for
Marketing Strategy, McGraw-Hill Education (ISE Editions).
8. Bruce Wrenn, Robert E. Stevens and David L Loudon, Marketing Research: Text and
Cases, Routledge.
9. Consumer Buying Behavior, http://www.knowthis.com/principles-of-marketing-
Page 46 of 86
tutorials/consumer-buyingbehavior/internal-influences-personality/
10. Personality Psychology Study Guide,
http://psychology.about.com/od/psychologystudyguides/a/personalitysg_3.htm
11. Personality - Type theory of personality, Trait theory of personality, Psychodynamic theory
of personality, Phenomenological theory of personality,
http://psychology.jrank.org/pages/484/Personality.html
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Consumer Behavior: Consumer Behavior-Scope and Application of
Consumer Behavior-Evolution of Consumer Behavior as a Field Of
Study and its relationship with Marketing: Behavioral Dimension. The
Interdisciplinary Nature of Consumer Behavior.
1 Market Research and Consumer Behavior: Approaches to Consumer 9 15
Behavior Research. Quantitative Research. Qualitative Research;
Market Segmentation and Positioning: Demographics and Market
Segmentation; Lifestyle and psychographic segmentation-Usage
Segmentation- Benefit Segmentation- Product Positioning
Environmental Influence on Consumer Behavior: Culture-Subcultures-

Social Class- Social Groups- Family-Personal Influence and Diffusion
2 of Innovation; Individual Determinants of Consumer Behavior: 10 25
Consumers Needs & Motivation - Emotions and Mood, Consumer
Involvement-Consumer Learning –Personality- Self-concept and Self-
image- Consumer Perception, Risk and Imagery.
Consumer Attitude Formation and Change: Structural Models and
Theories, Attitude Formation, Strategies of Attitude Change.
Consumer Decision Making Process: Problem Recognition- Search and 8
3 25
Evaluation – Purchasing Process- Post Purchase Behavior; Buying Motives.
Buying Roles-Levels of Consumer Decision Making - Perspectives to
Consumer Decision Making.
Diffusion Innovation Model- Diffusion Process- Adoption Process -
4 Consumer Innovators - Multiplicative innovation adoption (MIA) model – 9 20
Buying Decision Process towards new Products.
Models of Consumer Behavior: The Economic model. Learning model -

5 9 15
Psychoanalytic model- The sociological model - The Howard Sheth model
of Buying Behaviour-The Nicosia model.
Final Examination
Page 47 of 86
Introduction
MKT-T4-3 Integrated Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016

Communication
Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are:
To develop a clear understanding of integrated marketing communications (IMC)

practices.
To understand how key elements within the marketing communications mix are integrated.
To shift the perceptual focus of class participants from an audience to creators of IMC
strategies for businesses.
Syllabus
Concept and Process of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC), IMC Message Design
Advertisement Media, Design and Execution of Advertisements, Agency Operation, Introduction to
Sales Promotion, Sales Promotion Campaign, Advertising and Society
Expected Outcome
framework of IMC and shall be able to translate theory into practice by analyzing a number of
pragmatic examples and case studies of real-world experiences.
References
1. Philippe Malaval, Integrated Marketing Communication, Pearson Education.
2. Nagpal, Integrated Marketing Communication and Advertising, Sheth Publishers Private
Limited.
3. George E. Belch, Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing Communications
Perspective, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited.
4. Kenneth Clow. Donald Baack, Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communications, Pearson.
5. S. H. H. Kazmi and Satish K Batra, Advertising & Sales Promotion, Excel Books.
6. Sarangi. S, Advertising & Sales Promotion (Marketing Management III), Asian Books Pvt.
Ltd.
7. CN Sontakki, Advertising and Sales Management, Kalyani Publishers.
8. Jaishri Jefhwaney, Advertising Management, Oxford University Press India.
9. Abrahams David, Brand Risk: Adding Risk Literacy to Brand Management, Kindle edition, Gower.
10. Bergh Bruce G, Advertising Principles Choice Challenge Change, NTC Business Book, USA.
11. Bhatia K.Tej, Advertising and Marketing in Rural India, Macmillan India Ltd.
12. Clifton Rita and John Simmons, Brands and Branding , Profile Books Ltd. UK.
Units Topics Hours % of Marks in
Page 48 of 86
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Concept and Process of Integrated Marketing Communications
(IMC): Elements of IMC-Advertising; Social, Economic and Legal
Implications of advertisements – setting advertisement objectives –
1 9 15
Advertisement Agencies – Selection and remuneration –
Advertisement campaigns. Classification of advertising, types,
advertising appropriation, advertising campaigns.
IMC Message Design : AIDA model – Considerations for creative

idea visualisation Suppliers in IMC : Hoarding contractors/Printers;
Advertisement Agency- Departments of Ad Agency, Client
2 Servicing-client Agency relationship,; 9 15
Advertisement Media - Media plan – Type and choice criteria –
Reach and frequency of advertisements – Cost of advertisements -
related to sales – Media strategy and scheduling.
Design And Execution Of Advertisements - Message development –
Different types of advertisements – Layout – Design appeal – Copy
structure – Advertisement production – Print – Radio. T.V. and
Web advertisements – Media Research – Concept Testing– 9
3 Measuring impact of advertisements. 20
Account Management: Account Planning, Responsibilities and

Implementation Paths
Agency Operation: The organizations in Advertising, the Role of

Advertising Agency, Types of Advertising Agencies.
Creative and Media Briefing Process: Agency -Media Interface,

Agency Revenue Process, Setting and Allocating Budget, Various
4 9 20
Methods of Budgeting.
Sales Promotion - Scope and role of sale promotion – Objectives

of sales promotion - sales promotion techniques – Trade oriented
and consumer oriented.
Page 49 of 86
Sales Promotion Campaign - Sales promotion – Requirement
identification – Designing of sales promotion campaign –
Involvement of salesmen and dealers – Outsourcing sales
promotion national and international promotion strategies –
5 9 30
Integrated promotion – Coordination within the various
promotion techniques – Online sales promotions
Advertising and Society: Ethical Issues in Advertising, Social
Criticism of Advertising, Advertising Statutory Bodies in India.
Final Examination
Page 50 of 86
Introduction
MKT-T4-4 Services Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to acquaint the students to the different vistas of services
characteristics and its marketing implication. The course intends to discuss the several facets in
the area of services marketing essential for the success of a service sector firm.
The different paradigms discussed in the course are careful blend of several theories and practices
propagated by the service industry leaders, which shall help the student to overcome the
impediments in understanding the contemporary practices of service industry. By doing so the
course aims to equip the students with employability skills as required by the services industry.
Syllabus
Understanding Service Products, Consumer Behavior in Services Context, Service Demand

Management, Developing service products, Service Failures and Recovery Delivery of
Services,Managing the Customer Interface.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students develop a clear-cut understanding on the characteristics
of services, 7 Ps of Services Marketing Mix, Consumer Behavior in Services Marketing, Different
Services Environment, Marketing and Blueprinting in Services.
References
1. Christopher Lovelock,Jochen Wirtz, Jayanta Chatterjee: Services Marketing: People, Technology

and Strategy, Pearson Education, 2011.
2. K. Rama Mohana Rao, Services Marketing, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. Harsh V Verma, Services Marketing: Text and Cases, Pearson Education, 2011
4. Rajendra Nargundkar, Services Marketing: Text and Cases, McGraw Hill Education India Private
Limited, 2003
5. John E.G. Bateson and K. Douglas Hoffman, Services Marketing, Cengage Learning, 2012
6. C Bhattacharjee, Services Marketing: Concepts, Planning and Implementation, Excel Books, 2010
7. V. Zeihthaml, Mary JB, Dwyane DG and Ajay Pandit, Services Marketing: Integrating Customer
Focus Across the Firm, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2013
8. Leonard L Berry, On Great Service: A Framework for Action, The Free Press, 1995
9. Jauhari and Dutta, Services: Marketing, Operations and Management, Oxford University Press
India, 2009
10. Lusch and Vargo, The Service - Dominant Logic of Marketing: Dialog, Debate and Directions, PHI
Learning Private Limited, 2006
Page 51 of 86
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Understanding Service Products: New perspective on marketing in
service industry- Four board categories of services, Traditional
marketing mix applied to Services, The extended services marketing
1 mix for managing the customer interface, Characteristics of services- 9 15
Product vs Services-Tangibility Spectrum ; Services Sector in Indian
Economy- Characteristics of Services Sector Industries.
Consumer Behavior in Services Context- Three stage model of Service

consumption- Servuction Model - Expectation Development by
Consumers- Zone of Tolerance- Determinants of Maximum Service
2 Level, Minimum Service Level, Maximum and Minimum Service 9 25
Levels, Service Perception; Market Segmentation in Services Sector –
Undifferentiated marketing, differentiated marketing, Bases of Market
Segmentation- Services Attributes and levels- Developing and effective
positioning strategy.
Service Demand Management: Demand Situation- Demand Patterns,
Demand Variations- Demand Forecasting Methods- Demand
Management –Capacity Management; Developing service products:
9
3 Planning and creating service products- The flower of service - 25
Branding service products and experiences - New Service
Development-Steps in development of a New Service. The Service
Product Mix-Service Differentiation-Service Lifecycle Management.
Managing the Customer Interface: Flowcharting customer service
process- Service Blue prints – Physical Evidence- Servicescapes- Types
of Servicescapes- Mehrabian-Russell Stimulus Response Model-
Russel’s Model of Affect Servicescape Model- Dimensions of Service
4 9 20
Environment- Service Quality Management- Service Perception –
Determinants of Service Quality- Service Quality Audit- GAP Model of
Service Quality- SERVQUAL- Total Quality Services Marketing-
Service Excellence
Delivery of Services: Delivering Service through Intermediaries-
distribution growth options-Internationalization in distribution.
Service Failures and Recovery: Types of service encounters- Deviations
5 in services - Types of service encounters - Customer response to 9 15
failures - Service Failures - Failure types - Complaint Management-
Service Recovery – Service Guarantee.
Final Examination
Page 52 of 86
Introduction
MKT-T4-5 Marketing Research 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course aims at creating awareness among the students about the different research techniques
and methodologies in the marketing domain, which shall be successfully implemented by the
students. This course shall serve as a launching platform for the students to start their career in
marketing research.
Syllabus
The Marketing Research System, Sampling Process in Marketing Research, Research

Design,Measurement & Scaling in Marketing Research, Data Instruments, Application of
Marketing Research, Recent Trends in Marketing Research.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with the marketing research
methodologies and techniques that shall be implemented in the marketing research.
References
1. Naresh K. Malhotra and Satya Bhushan Dash, Marketing Research: An Applied Orientation,
Pearson Education, 2008
2. William G. Zikmund and Barry J Babin, Marketing Research, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd,
2009
3. Paul E. Green and Donald S. Tull, Research For Marketing Decisions, PHI Learning Private
Limited, 2009
4. Green, Research For Marketing Decisions, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2009
5. Donald R. Cooper & Pamela Schindler, Marketing Research Concept & Cases, Tata McGraw Hill
Education, 2005
6. Naresh K. Malhotra, Marketing Research: An Applied Orientation and SPSS, Prentice Hall, 2006
7. Rajendra Nargundkar, Marketing Research: Text and Cases, McGraw Hill Education India Private
Limited, 2008
8. Alan Shao and Kevin Zhang Zhou, Marketing Research : A Decision Maker’s Tool, Cengage
Learning, 2009
9. Sunanda Easwaran and Sharmila Singh, Marketing Research: Concepts, Practices and Cases,
Oxford Higher Education, 2006
10. A. Parasuraman, Dhruv Grewal and R Krishnan, Marketing Research, DreamTech Press, 2004
Page 53 of 86
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
The Marketing Research System - Marketing Research - Basic and

Applied Research – The Marketing Research Process - Types of
Research - Steps in Marketing Research Process - Research Design -
1 9 15
Data Sources - Marketing Information System – International Market
Research- Marketing Research in the 21st Century (Indian Scenario),
Marketing Research: Value and Cost of Information.
Sampling Process in Marketing Research– Sampling Design and

Procedure – Sampling Methods – Non probabilistic sampling
Techniques – Probabilistic sampling Techniques - Sample Size
determination - Sampling Errors.
2 9 15
Research Design- Introduction, Meaning of Research Design, Types of
Research Design, Descriptive Research, Causal Research Design,
Research Design and Marketing Decision Process, Choosing a Good
Research Design
Measurement & Scaling in Marketing Research: Measurement concept 9

3 – Sources of variation in Measurement, Validity & reliability of 20
Measurement - Attitude measurement – Scaling Procedure
Data Instruments - Data Collection- Online data collection - Collection

of Secondary Data – Collection of Primary Data Methods - Field
Operations - Errors and Difficulties in Data Processing, Coding and
Editing. Data Analysis - Report Writing - Presentation of Data.
Hypothesis Testing: Introduction, Hypothesis, Steps Involved in

4 Hypothesis Testing, Test of Significance of a Mean, Test of 9 20
Significance of Difference between Two Means, Test of Significance
of Difference between Two Standard Deviations, Test of Significance
of Sample Proportion, Test of Significance of Difference between Two
Sample Proportions, Student’s t– Distribution, Parametric and Non-
Parametric Tests
Page 54 of 86
Application of Marketing Research: Introduction, Consumer Market
Research, Business-to-Business Market Research, Product Research,
Pricing Research, Motivational Research, Distribution Research
5 Recent Trends in Marketing Research: Introduction, Marketing 9 30
Information System and Research, Online Marketing Research, Recent
Trends in Marketing Research, Research in Lifestyle Retail, Marketing
Research and Social Marketing, Rural Marketing Research, Trends in
Services Marketing Research, Brand Equity Research, International
Marketing and Branding Research.
Final Examination
Page 55 of 86
Introduction
MKT-T4-6 Sales and Distribution 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The main objective of the course is to impart skills and knowledge needed to manage sales force and
distribution function so as to gain a competitive advantage. As a successful marketer, the sales and
distribution function needs to be properly managed which incorporates understanding of various concepts
the course aims to provide to the student participants. The unique mixture of theory and practice
incorporated in the course helps the students to understand the different paradigms and to practically
implement it during their stint as a sales person.
Syllabus
Understanding Personal Selling and Sales Force Management, Overview of Sales Management Selling
Process and Sales Organization. Channel management, Sales force control system. New Trends in Sales
Management, Distribution Planning and Control, Distribution System and Logistics.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with the concepts and framework of
Sales and Distribution and a conceptual clarity on selling process, distribution system which shall be a
value addition.
References
1. Pingali Venugopal, Sales and Distribution Management, SAGE Response, 2008

2. Tapan K Panda and Sunil Sahadev: Sales and Distribution Management: Oxford University Press,
2011
3. Still, R. R. & Cundiff, E. W., Govoni, N. A. P. Sales Management. Pearson Education, 2007
4. Coughlan A.T., Anderson E., Stern L.W and Ansary A.E. (2001), Marketing Channels, Pearson
Education, 2007
5. Still, Cundiff and Govoni: Sales Management, PHI, 2008
6. Rosann Spiro, Stanton, William J. and Gergory Rich, Management of Sales Force. McGraw Hill
Education India Private Limited, 2003
7. Spiro, R, Management of a Sales Force, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2015
8. Gary Gagliardi and Sun Tzu, Sales Management Strategy: Sun Tzu's The Art of War for Sales Force
Success, (Kindle edition), Clearbridge Publishing, 2012
9. Tony Carter, Sales Force Management: A Contemporary Approach, Jaico Publishing House, 2008
10. Mukesh Bhatia, Sales Force Management: Creating & Controlling Winning Sales Teams, Regal
Publications, 2014
Page 56 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Sales Management- Role of Sales Management in
Marketing, Role of Sales Management in Marketing Strategy
Development, Nature and Responsibilities of Sales Management,
Careers in Sales Management, Modern Roles and Required Skills
for Sales Managers
1 9 15
Understanding Personal Selling and Sales Force Management:
Approaches to Personal Selling, Process of Personal Selling,
Automation in Personal Selling, Organization Design and
Staffing, Sales Planning, Time and Territory Management,
Managing the Sales Force
Selling Process and Sales Organization: Prospecting, Pre -

approach, Approach, Presentation, Objection Handling, Sales
Close, Sales Organization Design
2 9 20
Channel management- Marketing Channels, Designing Channels,
Selection and Recruitment of Channel Partners, Channel Motivation,
Channel Relationships Management, Channel Evaluation, Information
Systems for Channels
Sales force control system: Sales Quota setting, Sales Territory,
Sales Budget, Sales Analysis and Audit and evaluating sales
person performance
9
3 20
New Trends in Sales Management- Sales Management
Information System, Relationship Marketing, Role of E-
commerce in Selling, International Sales Management, Challenges
Faced by International Sales Managers
Distribution Planning and Control: Role and Function of
Intermediaries; Selection and Motivation of Intermediaries;
Distribution Analysis; Control and Management; Channel
4 9 25
Dynamics – Vertical Marketing Systems; Horizontal Marketing
Systems; Multichannel Marketing Systems; Channel Conflict and
Management.
Distribution System and Logistics: Physical Distribution System
– Decision Areas; Different Modes of Transport in India; Their
Characteristics; Logistics- Functional Areas of Logistics;
5 9 20
Logistics Integration for Customer Satisfaction; Distribution
Costs; Control and Customer Service; Supply Chain Management
(SCM); Integration of Sales and Distribution Strategy.
Final Examination
Page 57 of 86
Introduction
OM-T4-1 Supply Chain and Logistics 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The core objective of this course is to provide a comprehensive understanding of supply chain and
logistics management and its application in business. This course is aimed to endow with an in-
depth understanding on IT application of supply chain and logistics and also a broad
understanding about Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management.
Syllabus
Logistics Management, Supply Chain Management, Order Processing - Transportation - Demand

Forecasting, Integrated supply chain, Growth of Supply chain, Strategic decision in supply chain,
Logistics Network- Integrated Logistics system, Economics of Logistics, Third Party Logistics, The
role of IT in Supply chain, Uses of IT in inventories, Global Supply Chain Management.
Expected Outcome
After the successful completion of this course, the students are able to conceptualize Logistics and
Supply Chain Management in the contemporary business scenario. The emergence of Global Village
and it deals with how Global Village facilitate this learning.
References
1. Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management Strategy, Planning and
Operation, Pearson Education, 2012
2. R.P. Mohanty and S.G. Deshmukh, Essentials of Supply Chain Management, Mumbai:
Jaico Publishing House, 2004
3. David Simchi Levi and Philip Kaminsky, Designing & Managing The Supply Chain,
McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2007
4. G. Raghuram and N. Rangaraj, Logistics & Supply Chain Management – Cases & Concepts ,
Laxmi Publications, 2015
5. Donald. J. Bowersox and David J. Closs, Logistical Management: The Integrated Supply
Chain , McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2000
6. Martin Christopher, Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Financial Times/ Prentice
Hall, 2012.
Page 58 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Unit Topic Hours % of

Allotted marks
in
Trimester
Exam
Elements of Logistics and Supply chain management – Inventory
1 carrying – Warehousing
Material handling – Order Processing - Transportation - Demand 5 10
Forecasting - Impact of Forecasts on Logistics and Supply chain
management – Performance measurements.
Supply Chain Management: Value chain- Functions – Supply chain
2 effectiveness- Outsourcing - 3PLs and 4PLs
– Supply chain relationships- Customer services, Concept of
supply chain, Integrated supply chain, Growth of Supply chain, 10 15
Strategic decision in supply chain, Supply Chain Strategies (i)
Cycle View (ii) Push & Pull View. Achievement of strategic fit
through different steps, Obstacles to achieving Strategic Fit.
Logistics Management: Evolution of Logistics- Nature and
3 Importance – Components of Logistics Management- Competitive
Advantages of Logistics- functions of Logistics management-
principles- Logistics Network- Integrated Logistics system, 10 15
Economics of Logistics, Cost associated With Logistics, third Party
Logistics, Materials handling , packaging and transportation
systems.
Information Technology and SCM: The role of IT in Supply chain.
4 Uses of IT in inventories, transportation & facilities within a
supply chain, The Supply Chain IT frame Work-macro Processes,
The future of IT in the Supply Chain, Internal Supply Chain
management, Supply relationship management, The Transaction 10 30
Management Foundation. Data mining –Methods application area
in supply chain, Supply chain information System Design –
Planning. E-Business –Role in Supply chain.

5 International Logistics and Supply Chain Management: Meaning
and objectives, importance in global economy, Forces of Global
Supply Chain-Global market force, Technology force, Global cost
force, Political force, Stage of International Development, Risk of 10 30
Global Supply Chain- Speculative Strategies s ,Hedge Strategies
,Flexible Strategies ,Requirements for Global Strategy
implementation, Advantages of Global Supply Chain.
Final Examination
Page 59 of 86
Introduction
OM-T4-2 Facilities & Location 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to develop an in-depth understanding of product, process and
schedule design as well as facilities location, layout design and material handling. The course is
expected to provide a balanced exposure in facility management, layout design and material
handling.
Syllabus
Production Facilities, Location, Planning Design, Maintenance, Production System, Machine

Selection, Automation, Layout, Industrial Safety, Preventive Maintenance.
Expected Outcome
After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to define and analyse product,
process and schedule design interactions by studying the functions involved in the product
development cycle.
References
1. Tomkins, J. A;White, J A, Bozer, Y.A and Tanchoco.J, Facilities Planning, N J: John Wiley &
Sons, 2013
2. McGinnis, F, Richard L Francis and White, J A, Facilities Layout and Location: An
Analytical Approach, Pearson Education, 2015
3. G.K. Agarwal, Plant Layout and Material Handling, Jain Brother, 2008
4. Stevenson, W.J., Operations Management, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited,
2015
5. Fred E. Meyers and Matthew P. Stephens, Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material
Handling, Purdue University Press, 2013
6. Eric, Tiecholz, Facility Design and Management Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional,
2001
Page 60 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Unit Topic Hours % of marks

Allotted in Trimester
Exam
Facilities Management: Principles and Theories,
1 Organisational Models, Different Types of Facilities
Layout – Product, Process, Bench Marking, Maturing,
Survey Facilities and Asset Management, Facilities Asset
Management, Life Cycle Analysis, different types of 8 20
facilities – Product, Process, combination, fixed, and
cellular layouts. Production facilities location decisions
factors; warehouse location decision methods.
Business Transformation and Facilities Management:
2 Changing Environment, Business Transformation
process, Three Key Issues of Facilities Management
9 20
Transformation, Three Obstacles of Facilities
Management Transformation, comparison of layouts and
the factors affecting the layout decisions
Facilities Condition Assessment: Facilities Audit,
3 Technology for Capital Planning, Alternative Work
Places, Rethinking Office 2.0, Business Centres, Changing
Political and Economic Boundaries, Changing
Technology, Changing Social and Environmental
9 20
Awareness, Sustainable Designs- Occupant Health and
Comfort, warehousing and employee services – office
layout techniques and space requirements,
environmental aspects like lighting, ventilation, dust
control, humidity.
Smart and Intelligent Buildings: Smart Building – Beyond
4 Technology, Network and Central Management Systems,
Smart Interior Systems, Smart HVAC Systems, Smart
Lighting System, Lighting Ergonomics, Interior Lighting,
Exterior Lighting, Lighting Analysis, Space Management,
Energy in building design – Energy efficient and 9 20
environment friendly building – Thermal phenomena –
thermal comfort – Indoor Air quality – Climate, sun and
Solar radiation, Psychometrics – passive heating and
cooling systems .
Page 61 of 86
5 Energy Management & Industrial Safety: Energy
management, Energy audit – Types of Energy audit –
Analysis of results – Energy flow diagram – Energy
Consumption, Unit Production – Identification of
wastage Priority of conservative measures, Maintenance 10 20
of energy management programme, Hazards and Health
Standards, NIOSH Guidelines. Stress & Preventions,
Pollution and Environmental Consideration,
Occupational Safety.
Final Examination
Page 62 of 86
Introduction
OM-T4-3 Quality Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course deals with primary tools and methods used to monitor and control quality in organizations
and the ways in which quality can be improved. It comprises of historical development of quality
management, the seven basic tools for quality improvement, and management strategies for
implementing world class quality improvement strategies. Emphasis is also given to control chart
analysis and process capability study.
Syllabus
Quality-Total Quality –Quality Costs-Benchmarking- QFD-FMEA- quality tools-Acceptance sampling
plans-process capability-benchmarking-Six Sigma-DPMO, SIPOC and DMAIC Methodology-Quality
systems-ISO 9000 and ISO 14000
Expected Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the student should be able to identify concepts of quality
management and improvement. It is envisaged at developing an understanding of the role of
technology, managers, employees, and customers in developing a quality-based workplace. It is aimed
at developing abilities to apply tools and techniques of Total Quality Improvement including,
statistical process control, control charts, and quality function deployment techniques. It also builds
the ability to utilize data gathering and analysis tools in process control and six sigma, benchmark
organizations in Quality Management and helps understand the ethical issues in quality of services
and products.
References
1 David L. Goetsch and Stanley B. Davis Quality Management for Organizational Excellence:
Introduction to Total Quality, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, Inc.
2.Eugene Grant, Statistical Process Control, Mc Graw Hill
3. Juran, J.M. & Gryna, F.M. : Quality Planning and Analysis, Mc Graw Hill
4. Joel E. Ross, Susan Perry, Total Quality Management: Text, Cases, and Readings, Third Edition,
CRC Press
5. Charantimath, P.M., Total Quality Management, Pearson
6. Arthi Venkataraman(2000) Journey Towards Zerodefects: Challenges,Best Practices And
Testing Models(Wipro), Bangalore
7. Crosby, Philip B(1979) Quality Is Free, Newyork, Mcgraw-Hill Books, Fourth Edition
8. Subburaj Rama Swamy, Total Quality Management, TataMcgraw Hill, NewDelhi,
9. Joseph A. De Feo, William Barnard(2010), Juran Institute's Six Sigma Breakthrough And
Beyond: Quality Performance Breakthrough Methods, Newyork, Mcgraw Hill Books
10. Juran, Joseph M., Ed. (1995), A History Of Managing For Quality: The Evolution, Trends, And
Future Directions Of Managing For Quality, Milwaukee, Wisconsin
11. Gupta, N S & B. Velamathi(2007), Total Quality Management, McGraw Hill Publications
Page 63 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Hours % marks in
Unit Topics
Allotted Final Exam.
Quality, Total quality, Rationale for total quality, key elements of
total quality, quality circles, quality gurus. Concept of Costs of
I Quality, TQM strategies, Customer satisfaction, Employees 8 15
participation- Quality function deployment, Failure mode
Effect Analysis.
Check Sheet, Histogram, Pareto Chart, Cause and Effect diagram,
Scatter diagram, Control chart, Graph, Affinity diagram, Tree
2 9 20
diagram, Matrix diagram, Process decision program chart, Arrow
diagram, Kaizen practice.
Acceptance Sampling, single sampling, double sampling plans,
Process capability studies, Benchmarking, Rationale of
3 benchmarking, Approach and process, Prerequisites of 9 20
benchmarking, Benefits of benchmarking, Obstacles to successful
benchmarking, perpetual benchmarking
Six Sigma-Origin, Goals of six Sigma, Root cause Analysis,
need for six sigma, levels of sigma, Role of Six Sigma green
belts, Black belts, Master black belts, Champions in Six
sigma implementation ,cost of quality at various levels of
4 sigma, Competitive level- concept of world class, Six Sigma 12 25
Methodology-DMAIC Approach, SIPOC concept, Voice of
Customer, Calculation of DPMO and sigma, concept of
sigma rating, Six sigma in Service sector-Successful
implementation of six sigma in global companies
Quality Systems, Quality management principles, ISO 9001, ISO
5 14000, Future of quality system audit, Audit objectives, types of 7 20
quality audit, Quality Auditor, Audit performance.
Final Exam
Page 64 of 86
Introduction
OM-T4-4 Business Process Reengineering 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to make the students understand the role of Business Process
Reengineering technique in an organisation and to gain insight on BPR tools and techniques.
Syllabus
Business Process Reengineering, Principles of BPR, Total Quality Management, Enterprise Resource
Planning, Change Management, ISO Standards and Certifications
Expected Outcome
Students who successfully complete this course are able to get insight on Business Process
Reengineering tools and techniques to focus on customer, innovation and quality management to
speed up the processes and improve productivity of an organisation.
References
1. Radhakrishnan, R and Balasubramanian, S, Business Process Reengineering: Text & Cases, PHI
Learning Private Limited, 2008.
2. Dey, B. R. Business Process Reengineering and Change Management, Dreamtech Press, 2004.
3. Vikram Sethi and William King, Organisational Transformation through Business Process
Reengineering: Applying the Lessons Learned, Pearson Education, 1998.
4. Henry J. Johansson, Patrick McHugh, A. John Pendlebury, and William A. Wheeler, Business
Process Reengineering: Break Point Strategies for Market Dominance, Wiley Wiley, 2007.
5. John Jeston and Johan Nelis, Business Process Management: Practical Guidelines to Successful
Implementations, A Butterworth-Heinemann, 2008.
6. Joe, P and Philip, R., Essence of Business Process Reengineering, Financial Times/ Prentice Hall,
1995.
Page 65 of 86
Exam
Business Process Reengineering- Need for reengineering,
1 Benefits of BPR, Guiding Principles, BPR and Performance
8 10
Improvement, Pitfalls in BPR and Myths of BPR, Business
Process Redesigning
BPR and Other techniques: Total Quality Management,
2 Kaizen, Just – in- Time, Six Sigma, Quality Function
10 10
Deployment, ISO Standards and Certifications, Enterprise
Resource Planning.
BPR Implementation Methodology: BPR Strategies, BPR

3 Success and Failures, Factors Relating to BPR Success,
Change Management, Culture, Leadership, Organisation 8 20
Structure, Factors related to Business Process Failure –
Communication and Organisational Resistance.
BPR, TQM & IT: Information Technology and Value Chain,
4 IT Value and Business Alignment, IT Infrastructure, IT
Networking Infrastructure, Key Elements of BPR, 10 30
Establishing a Responsible Team, Redesigning the Business
Process, BPR Methodologies – Implementation Phases.
5 Process Change Management: Nature, Process of Change,
Management of Change in BPR, Planning for Reengineering, 10 30
Analyse AS-IS Process.
Final Examination
Page 66 of 86
Introduction
OM-T4-5 World Class Manufacturing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students about the global developments in the area of
manufacturing, and the systems, tools and techniques which are required for achieving competitive edge by
business organisations. The course orients in helping the learner improve their leaning and understanding
in world class manufacturing.
Syllabus
Manufacturing & Operations Management, Just – in – Time Manufacturing, World Class Manufacturing
Environment, Imperatives for Success, System Approach, Manufacturing excellence , Business Excellence,
Benchmark and Best Practices in World Class Manufacturing, World Class Manufacturing – International
Scenario and Indian Scenario.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to learn what actions are appropriate for different
situations of World Class Manufacturing with respect to theories as well as concepts in competitive
manufacturing and apply them in models and practices.
References
1. Sahay, B.S., Saxena, K.B.C and Ashish Kumar, World Class Manufacturing - Strategic Perspective,
MacMillan, 2007.
2. Narayanan V. K, Managing Technology & Innovation for Competitive Advantage, Prentice Hall,
2014.
3. Nair, N. G, Production & Operations Management, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2002.
4. Richard J. Schonberger (2009). World Class Manufacturing: The Next Decade: Building Power,
Strength, and Value, Free Press, 2013.
5. S. N. Chary, Production & Operations Management, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited,
2012
6. Ron Moore, Making Common Sense Common Practice – Models for manufacturing Excellence
(Kindle edition), Reliabilityweb.com, 2013
Page 67 of 86
Allotted marks
in
Trimest
er
Exam
Manufacturing & Operations Management: Scope & Importance of
1 Manufacturing & Operations Management, Interrelationship between
Materials & Operations Management, Role of Raw Materials, Components
and Work in Process inventories manufacturing, Methods of Quantity 5 10
Assurance namely Sampling, SQC, Vendor rating, Self Certification , Just –
in – Time Manufacturing.
World Class Manufacturing: World Class Manufacturing Environment,

2 Imperatives for success, System approach and change in mindset,
Strategic decisions in Manufacturing Management, Choice of technology,
10 15
Capacity and layouts, Automation in Materials handling system, World
class Excellent organizations – Models for Manufacturing excellence –
Business Excellence.
Benchmark and Best Practices: Benchmarking, bottleneck and best
3 practices, Best performers – Gaining competitive edge through
world class manufacturing – Value added manufacturing,
eliminating waste – Toyota Production System, Human Resource 10 15
Management in WCM: Organizational learning – New
organizational structures, Associates Facilitators, Teamsmanship,
Motivation and reward in the age of continuous improvement.
System & Tools for World Class Manufacturing: Improving Product
4 & Process Design – Lean Production – SQC , FMS, Rapid
Prototyping , Poka Yoke , 5-S , 7 M, use of IT ,JIT, Product Mix ,
Optimizing , Procurement & stores practices. Total Productive 10 30
Maintenance, Visual Control., Typical characteristics of WCM
companies: Performance indicators, world class Performance – Six
Sigma philosophy.
5 World Class Manufacturing: – International Scenario and Indian
Scenario, Manufacturing Innovations, Quick Response
Manufacturing, Agile manufacturing, lean manufacturing,
concurrent engineering, Globalization and World Class
10 30
Manufacturing - Generic Manufacturing Strategies for
Information Age; Planning Methodology and Issues in Strategic
Planning of WCM; Performance
Measurement POP System, TOPP System and Ambite System.
Final Examination
Page 68 of 86
Introduction
OM-T4-6 Logistics and Material 4-0-0 3 2016

Handling
Course Objectives
This course will provide an understanding to the advanced concepts and practices in material
handling and internal logistics. It also gives a comprehensive coverage of both traditional and
contemporary topics in internal logistics and material handling.
Syllabus
Logistics Management, Integrated Logistics system, Logistics Network, 3PLs and 4PLs, Ware
Housing – Warehouse Layout design, Logistics Information Systems, Material Planning, Material
Handling, Transportation, Inventories.
Expected Outcome
After completing the course, the students are able to gain a fair understanding on contemporary
topics in internal logistics and material handling. The course will equip the participants to deal
strategically issues and challenges in internal logistics and materials handling in an organization.
References
1. Martin Christoper, Logistics and Supply Chain Management, FT Publishing International, 2016
2. Ronald H. Ballou, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education, 2007
3. Stephens, M. P & , F. E, Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material Handling, Purdue University
Press, 2013
4. Agarwal, D. K, Textbook of Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Mac Millan India Ltd, 2003
5. Chase, RB, Jacobs, FR and Aquilano, NJ, Operations Management for Competitive Advantage,
Irwin Professional Pub; 2004
6. Krishnaveni Muthiah(2009). Logistics Management and Seaborne Trade, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2014
Page 69 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Exam
Nature and Importance, Components of Logistics Management-
1 Competitive Advantages of Logistics- functions of Logistics
management- principles-Logistics Network- Integrated
Logistics system. Supply chain management- Nature and 6 10
Concepts- Value chain- Functions – Supply chain effectiveness-
Outsourcing - 3PLs and 4PLs Supply chain relationships-
Customer services.
Elements of Logistics and Supply chain management : Inventory

2 carrying – Ware housing – Warehouse Layout design, the
concept of honeycomb loss in goods stacking, method of
assigning dedicated storages; Quantitative flow balance
7 15
analysis, Material handling – Order Processing –
Transportation, Demand Forecasting - Impact of Forecasts on
Logistics and Supply chain management – Performance
measurements.

Logistical Information system (LIS) - Operations – Integrated IT
3 solution for Logistics and Supply chain management – Emerging
technologies in Logistics and Supply Chain management.
Components of a logistic system – transportation – inventory 10 30
carrying – warehousing-order processing – Ocean transport –
ships – types - measurement of capacity of ships – shipping
information.
Transportation & Logistics: Position of Transportation in
4 Logistics and Supply chain management- Road, Rail, Ocean, Air,
Transport Multi model transport- Containerization – CFS- ICDS – 7 15
Selection of transportation mode – Transportation Network and
Decision- Insurance Aspects of logistics.
5 Material Handling: Material Planning –Factors affecting
material planning – Techniques of material planning – MRP,
Inventories – Definition-Classification of Inventories- Need for
inventories –Inventory control techniques and principles -
classification, codification, standardization – ABC analysis –
15 30
VED, GOLF, FSN - HML Equipment: Cranes, tower cranes, lifting
equipment, series lifting equipment, lifting platforms,
continuous mechanical handling equipment, monorail
conveyors, belt, chain and overhead conveyors. Industrial
trucks
Final Examination
Page 70 of 86
Introduction
SYS-T4-1 System Analysis and Design 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Competence in information systems analysis is crucial to virtually every professional. This is why the topic
System Analysis and Design course plays a key role worldwide. This course covers the concepts and
techniques of information systems analysis and design, including analysis skills. In addition, this course
covers techniques used by modern systems analysts and gives extensive practice with structured
methodologies and object-oriented techniques.
Syllabus
Overview of Data, Information, Systems Analysis and Design Life Cycle, Structured systems analysis and
design, Data input methods and Object oriented systems modelling, Control and System analysis and design.
Expected Outcomes
1. Define various systems analysis and design concepts and terminologies.

2. Describe the stages of the system development life cycle model.
3. Describe different methodologies and state-of-the-art developments in SA&D techniques and method.
4. Compare, use and synthesize different conceptual modelling techniques for systems analysis (including
ERDs and DFDs)
5. Apply logic modelling techniques (decision tree/table, structured English)
References
7. S.K. Jha, System Analysis and Design, S.K. Kataria & Sons, 2009
8. Elias M Award, System Analysis and Design, Galgotia Publications Pvt Ltd,1993
9. Kenneth E Kendall Julie, System Analysis and Design, PHI, 2012
10. Jeffery Whitten and Lonnie Bentley, Systems Analysis and Design Methods - SIE, McGraw
Hill Education India Private Limited, 2006
11. Goyal A, Systems and Design, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2011
12. Whitten, Bentely and Barlow, System Analysis and Design Methods, McGraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2006
13. Jeffrey A. Hoffer, Modern System Analysis and Design, Pearson Education, 2011
14. Jeffrey Slater, Joey Gerge and Joseph A. Valacich, Modern System Analysis and Design –
International Edition, Pearson Education, 2007
15. Mahbubur Rahman Syed and Sharifun Nessa Syed, Handbook of Research on Modern Systems
Analysis and Design Technologies and Applications, Information Science Reference, 2008
Page 71 of 86
16. Claude Petitpierre, Software Engineering: The Implementation Phase (Communication and
Information Sciences), EPFL Press, 2006.
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Data, Information, Systems Analysis and Design Life Cycle
Data and Information – Types of information: operational, tactical,

strategic and statutory – why do we need information systems –
management structure – requirements of information at different levels
of management – functional allocation of management – requirements
1 (a) 8 10
of information for various functions – qualities of information.
Systems Analysis and Design Life Cycle - Requirements determination

– requirements specifications – feasibility analysis – final specifications
– hardware and software study – system design – system
implementation – system evaluation – system modification. Role of
systems analyst – attributes of a systems analyst – tools used in system
analysis.
Information gathering – strategies – methods – case study –
documenting study – system requirements specification – from
narratives of requirements to classification of requirements as strategic,
tactical, operational and statutory;
1 (b) Feasibility analysis – deciding project goals – examining alternative 8 10

solutions – cost – benefit analysis – quantifications of costs and benefits
– payback period – system proposal preparation for managements –
parts and documentation of a proposal – tools for prototype creation;
Tools for systems analysts – data flow diagrams – case study for use of
DFD, good conventions – leveling of DFDs – leveling rules – logical
and physical DFDs – software tools to create DFDs .
Structured systems analysis and design
2 6 20
Procedure specifications in structured English – examples and cases –
decision tables for complex logical specifications – specification
oriented design vs procedure oriented design; Data oriented systems
Page 72 of 86
design – entity relationship model – E-R diagrams – relationships
cardinality and participation – normalizing relations – various normal
forms and their need – some examples of relational data base design.
Data input methods and Object oriented systems modelling
Data input methods – coding techniques – requirements of coding
schemes – error detection of codes – validating input data – input data
controls interactive data input; Designing outputs – output devices –
designing output reports – screen design – graphical user interfaces –
3 interactive I/O on terminals; 8 20
Object oriented systems modeling – Composition and Usefulness of

objects –objects – Objects and their properties – classes – inheritance –
polymorphism – how to identify objects in an application – how to
model systems using objects – some cases of object oriented system
modelling.
Control
Control – audit and security of information systems – why controls are

needed – objectives of control – techniques used in control – auditing
4 information systems – auditing around, through and with the computer – 6 20
testing information systems – types of tests – how to generate tests –
security of information systems – disaster recovery – business process
continuity.
Systems analysis and design
Systems analysis and design in the era of electronic commerce – B2B,

B2C and C2C e-commerce – advantages and disadvantages of e-
commerce. E-commerce system architecture – physical networks,
logical network, world wide web, web-services – html, XML;
5 9 20
Electronic data interchange – EDI standards – virtual private networks –
XML and EDI; Security of e-commerce transactions, firewalls –
encryption methods – symmetric and asymmetric encryption – digital
signature – certifying authorities for signatures – legal status of e-
commerce transactions;
Software engineering and implementation - Quality assurance through

software engineering; Implementing the information system.
Final Examination
Page 73 of 86
Introduction
SYS-T4-2 Software Engineering 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course emphasizes on the software concepts. These concepts will equip management graduates to
understand the key elements in software development. Also the students will get an understanding on the
industry standards, quality requirements and latest models in the field.
Syllabus
Overview of Software Engineering, Software Requirements Specification (SRS), Planning and executing a
software Project, Software Design Concepts, Principles and Testing and Capability Maturity Model (CMM)
for Software.
Expected Outcomes

1. Help the student understand about software engineering and role of management.
2. Identify areas where management concepts are applied in software development projects.
3. Learn project planning and estimation principles in software projects.
4. Understand the latest quality models applicable in IT and its application.
References
1. Ian Sommerville, Software Engineering, Pearson Education, 2013

2. Pressman R.S, Software Engineering: A Practitioner's Approach, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2014
3. Pankaj Jaiote, An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Narose Publishing House, 2005
4. Richard Fairly, Software Engineering Concepts, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2001
5. Mall R., Fundamentals of Software Engineering, PHI Learning Private Limited-New Delhi, 2014 S.
Mukherjee, Project Management for Software Development, Jaico Publishing House, 2008
6. Behferooz A. and Hudson F.J., Software Engineering Fundamentals, Oxford University Press, 1997
7. Tory Dimes, Scrum Essentials: Agile Software Development and Agile Project Management for Project
Managers, Scrum Masters, Product Owners, and Stakeholder, CreateSpace Independent Publishing
Platform, 2014
8. Sumit Prakash. T, Software Project Management, Kindle Edition, University Science Press, 2011
9. Mark C.P, The Capability Maturity Model, Amazon Publishing, 2015
10. Carnegie Mellon University, The Capability Maturity Model, Guidelines For Improving The Software
Process, Pearson Education, 1995
11. Charles Orton-Jones, 7 global project management trends, http://raconteur.net/business/seven-
global-project-management-trends
12. Project Management Report, Raconteur, https://raconteur.uberflip.com/i/549582-project-
management
Page 74 of 86
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Software Engineering
Overview - Software and Software Engineering –Phases in

Software Development – Software Development process,
Models; Software Life Cycle Models: Classical and Iterative
Waterfall Model, Prototyping, Evolutionary Model, Spiral
Model , Comparison of different life cycle models; Role of
1 10 20
Management in Software Development – Role of Matrices
Measurement; Software Quality Metrics; Professional software
development; software engineering ethics;
Agile software development – Agile methods, plan-driven and

agile development. Extreme programming, agile project
management, scaling agile methods.
Software Requirements Specification (SRS)
Role of SRS; Analysis Principles, Functional and non-functional

requirements; the software requirements document;
2 requirements specifications; requirements specification; 8 20
requirements engineering processes; requirements elicitation
and analysis; requirements validation; requirements
management; Software Prototyping.
Planning and executing a software Project
Software Project Management - Project size estimation

metrics, Line of Code (LOC), Function Point (FP). Project
estimation techniques- empirical estimation techniques,
3 Putnam’s model, basic COCOMO model, Halstead’s Software 9 20
Science. Staffing Level Estimation, risk management, managing
people, group, working, choosing and keeping people.
Software cost estimation- software productivity, estimation of

productivity, factors effecting programming productivity,
project duration and staffing; Quality Assurance Plans– Project
Page 75 of 86
Monitoring Plans – Risk Management.
Software Design Concepts, Principles and Testing
Software Design, Design Process, Design Fundamentals,

Modular Design, Data Design, Architectural Design, Procedural
Design, Design Documentation.
4 9 20
Software Testing Techniques and Technical Metrics - Software
Testing Fundamentals, White Box Testing, Control Structure
Testing, Black Box Testing, Testing Real Time System,
Automated Testing.
Capability Maturity Model (CMM) for Software
Fundamentals, Five Maturity Levels, Key Process Areas, ISO

9000 Series of Standards for Quality Management Systems,
Mapping ISO 9001 to the CMM
CMM Based Process Improvement - Introduction,

5 Management Role, Process Focus, Useful Processes, Training, 9 20
Risk Management, Customer-Supplier Relationship, Peer
Reviews;
Software Quality Assurance- Fundamentals, Software Quality

Assurance, Quality Concepts, Quality Movement, Reviews,
Software Reliability, Background Issues, Software Quality
Assurance Activities, SQA Plan.
Final Examination
Page 76 of 86
Introduction
SYS-T4-3 Enterprise Resource Planning 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course throws light on the significance of Business Engineering and its link with Information Technology.
Besides, it discusses the role of consultants, vendors and users, the process of customization, as well as the
methodology and guidelines for ERP implementation.
Syllabus
Overview of Enterprise and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), ERP Implementation Life Cycle, ERP Modules
Structure, Going Live and Post implementation and emerging trends in ERP.
Expected Outcomes
1. Examine systematically the planning mechanisms in an enterprise, and identify all components in an
ERP system and the relationships among the components.
2. Gain knowledge of ERP implementation cycle.
3. Understand core and extended modules of ERP.
4. Understand the business process of an enterprise
5. Understand the emerging trends in ERP developments
References
1. Ashim Raj Singla, Enterprise Resource Planning, Cengage Learning, 2009

2. Alexis Leon, ERP demystified, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited,2014
3. DP Goyal, Enterprise Resource Planning – A Managerial Perspective, McGraw Hill Education Private
Ltd., 2011
4. Cedric Alexander, A Case Study Exploring the Effectiveness of ERP Integration Towards Managerial
Performance, Proquest, Umi Dissertation Publishing, 2011
5. David L Olson, Managerial issues of ERP systems, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2003
6. Pramod Mantravadi M, ERP-Concept And Cases, ICFAI, 2003
7. Dimpi Srivastava and Aarti Batra, ERP Systems, I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2010
8. Vinod Kumar Grag and N.K. Venkitakrishnan, ERP- Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2004
9. Sinha P. Magal and Jeffery Word, Essentials of Business Process and Information System, Wiley India,
2009
10. George Anderson, Charles D. Nilson, Tim Rhodes, Sachin Kakade, Andreas Jenzer, Bryan Kin, Jeff
Davis, Parag Doshi, Veeru Mehta and Heather Hillary, SAP Implementation Unleashed: A Business and
Technical Roadmap to Deploying SAP, SAMS, 2009
11. Jagan Nathan Vaman, ERP in Practice - ERP strategies for steering organizational competence and
Page 77 of 86
competitive advantage, McGraw-Hill Education (India), 2008
12. Alexis Leon, Enterprise Resource Planning, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2007
13. Mahadeo Jaiswal, Enterprise Systems and Business Process Management, Macmillan India, 2008
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Enterprise and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
Enterprise - Business Functions and Business Processes,

importance of Information: Characteristics of information;
Types of information, Information System: Components of an
1 information system; Different types of information systems; 6 20
Management information system, Enterprise Resource
Planning: Business modeling; Integrated data model
ERP- Origin and Need for an ERP System, Benefits of an ERP

System, Reasons for the Growth of ERP Market.
ERP Implementation Life Cycle
ERP Tools and Software, ERP Selection Methods and Criteria,

ERP Selection Process, ERP Vendor Selection, ERP
Implementation Lifecycle, Pros and cons of ERP
implementation, Factors for the Success of an ERP
2 (a) Implementation; 10 20
ERP Vendors, Consultants, and Employees- Vendors- Role of

the Vendor; Consultants: Types of consultants; Role of
a Consultant, Employees; Role of employees; Resistance by
employees; Dealing with employee resistance, Role of Top
Management, Role of Implementation Partner.
Page 78 of 86
Different ERP Vendors - ERP Vendors, SAP-AG: Products and
technology R/3 overview; SAP advantage, Baan Company ,
2 (b) Oracle Corporation: Products and technology; Oracle 2 5
Application; Vertical solutions, Microsoft Corporation, Ramco
Systems, Systems Software Associates Inc. (SSA), QAD.
ERP Modules Structure
Finance, Sales and Distribution, Manufacturing and Production

Planning- Material and Capacity Planning; Shop Floor Control;
Quality Management; JIT/Repetitive Manufacturing; Cost
Management ; Engineering Data Management; Engineering
Change Control ; Configuration Management; Serialisation /
3 Lot Control ;Tooling, Human Resource, Plant Maintenance- 12 20
Preventive Maintenance Control; Equipment Tracking;
Component Tracking; Plant Maintenance Calibration Tracking;
Plant Maintenance Warranty Claims Tracking, Quality
Management - Functions of Quality Management; CAQ and
CIQ; Materials Management- Pre-purchasing; Purchasing;
Vendor Evaluation; Inventory Management and Invoice
Verification and Material Inspection.
Going Live and Post implementation
Preparing to Go Live, Strategies for migration to New ERP

4 system, Managing ERP system after Going Live; Maintenance 9 20
of ERP- Organizational and Industrial impact; Success and
Failure factors of ERP Implementation, Roadmap for
successful ERP.
Emerging Trends
Extended ERP systems and ERP add-ons -CRM, SCM, Business

analytics - Future trends in ERP systems-web enabled,
5 Wireless technologies, cloud computing; ERP to ERP II- 6 15
Implementation of Organisation-Wide ERP, Development of
New Markets and Channels, Latest ERP Implementation
Methodologies, ERP and E-business, Market Snapshot, The
SOA Factor.
Final Examination
Page 79 of 86
Introduction
SYS-T4-4 e-Business 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Upon successful completion of this course the student will be able to understand the e-business concepts
and how it is different from e-commerce. Moreover, the student will be able to understand the e-business
models and infrastructure. Students will learn how e-business concepts are applied to different fields, such
as: education, banking, tourism and so on. Moreover, this course will inspire students with online business
ideas and motivate them to apply what the learned in the real life.
Syllabus
Overview of e-Business, e-Business Strategy, e-Markets, e-Business Applications, e-Procurement, e-

Payment Systems and Security and Reliability of e-Business, e-Business and Selected Industries and e-
Business Start-up.
Expected Outcomes
1. Examine systematically the planning mechanisms in an enterprise, and identify all Understand e-
Commerce and e-Business and their types.
2. Understand the e-Marketplaces.
3. Understand the main e-Business Models.
4. Understand some innovative e-Business systems like in e-Leaning, e-Government, e-Tourism
5. Understand the requirements for starting an online business.
References
14. Michael P. Papazoglou and Pieter M.A. Ribbers, e-Business – Organizational and Technical
Foundations, John Wiley & Sons, 2009
15. Parag Kulkarni, Sunita Jahirabadkar and Pradip Chande, E-Business, Oxford University Press India,
2013
16. Dave Chaffey, E - Business and E - Commerce Management: Strategy, Implementation and Practice,
17. Efraim Turban, Jae K. Lee, David King and, Michael Chung, Electronic Commerce: A Managerial
Perspective, Pearson Education, 1999
18. William Horton and Katherine Horton, E-learning Tools and Technologies: A consumer's guide for
trainers, teachers, educators, and instructional designers, Kindle Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2008
19. Thaer Sabri, e-Payments: A Guide to Electronic Money and On-line Payments, Butterworths Law, 2002
20. Michael E. Gerber, The E-Myth Revisited: Why Most Small Businesses Don't Work and What to Do
About It, Harper Business, 2004
Page 80 of 86
21. Ravi Kalakota and Marcia Robinson, e-Business: Roadmap for Success (Information Technology),
Addison Wesley, 1999
22. Ohad Samet, Introduction to Online Payments Risk Management, Kindle edition, O'Reilly Media, 2013
23. Various articles from e-Commerce Times, http://www.ecommercetimes.com/
24. e-Business and e-Commerce, http://www.peterindia.net/E-businessOverview.html
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of e-Business
e-Business –e-Business vs. e-Commerce, Characteristics of e-

Business, Elements of an e-Business solution, e-Business
1 Models, Internet marketing and e-Tailing, e-Business roles 9 20
and their challenges, e-Business requirements, Impacts of e-
business, Inhibitors of e-Business; Define e-Marketplace and
Describe their Functions; e-Marketplace types and their
features.
e-Business Strategy
e-Business Strategy – Strategy, Strategic positioning, Levels of

e-Business strategy, The strategic planning process, Strategic
alignment, The Consequences of e-Business – theoretical
foundation – Theory of competitive strategy, The resource-
based view, Transaction cost economics; Success factors for
implementation of e-Business strategies;
2 9 20
Business models – definition, classifications of business
models – Internet-enabled business models, Value Web
business models, The e-Business-enabled business models,
Market participants business model, Cybermediaries business
model;
e-Business and value chain – The Business unit value chain,

Value Chain Analysis, Value Stream Analysis, Unbundling the
business unit value chain, the industry value chain.
e-Markets
3 Electronic Markets – Working, Functional characteristics of 9 20

business-to-business e-Markets, Classification of electronic
markets, Market making mechanisms, Biased or unbiased
Page 81 of 86
markets; Functions of electronic markets, electronic markets
vs traditional markets, Personalization and customization,
Information goods, Search, Transaction mechanisms, Price
discovery, Facilitation, Electronic invoicing and payment;
Effects of electronic markets - impact, stakeholders – buyers,
suppliers, investors and service suppliers; e-Market success
factors.
e-Business Applications, e-Procurement, e-Payment Systems and
Security and Reliability of e-Business
Integration and e-Business suits; ERP, eSCM, CRM; e-
Procurement definition, processes, methods and benefits;
e-Payment; Reliability and quality considerations, quality
4 requirements, trust, e-business risks; e-Business security – 9 20
application security requirements, security mechanisms for e-
Business; Realizing a secure e-Business infrastructure –
Infrastructure availability, Network level security, Secure
communications, Digital certification and trusted third parties,
Trust services overview.
e-Business and Selected Industries and e-Business Start-up
e-Tourism; Employment and Job Market Online; Online Real
Estate; Online Publishing and e-Books; Banking and Personal
Finance Online; On-Demand Delivery Systems and E-Grocers;
Online Delivery of Digital Products; Entertainment; Media.
5 9 20
e-Business Start-up – funding options; web site development
basics, Search Engine Optimization (SEO); evaluate various e-
Business websites on design criteria; Payment gateways;
Challenges in e-Business; Risks involved in e-Business;
Business Continuity.
Final Examination
Page 82 of 86
Introduction
SYS-T4-5 e Governance 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Main objectives of this course are to develop an understanding of the e-governance from a multi
disciplinary perspective, application of ICT in public governance systems, frameworks for such
egovernance models, enabling technologies and contemporary trends.
Syllabus
e-governance evolution-models-frameworks- enabling technologies-infrastructure readiness-cases
Expected Outcomes
The student should have an overall picture on the evolution of egovernance and various models for
egovernance. Sufficient knowledge on the application of ICT technologies for the enhancement of
egovernance platforms is also envisaged in this course. A deeper understanding of the already
implemented systems is aimed at providing a practical knowledge on development of such systems.
References
1. Bhatnagar Subhash, E-Government: From vision to implementation, Sage

Publication, New Delhi
2. C.S.R. Prabhu, E-Governance: Concepts and Case Studies, Prentice-Hall of India Private
3. Limited, 2004.
4. Backus, Michiel, e-Governance in Developing Countries, IICD Research Brief, No. 1,
5. March 2001.
6. Gupta D M, e-governance: A comprehensive framework, New Century Publications India
7. Leslie Budd and Lisa Harris e-governance: Managing or Governing, Routledge.
8. Pankaj Sharma, e-governance APH Publishing India
9. Driss Kettani and Bernard Moulin, E Government for good governance in developing
countries, International Development Research Centre, Anthem Press
Page 83 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Hours % marks in
Unit Topics
Need for e-governance, Evolution of E-Governance, Issues
in E-Governance applications;, Its scope; Global trends,
I 6 15
Benefits in cost, time, speed and quality- other issues- e-
government enablers
E-Governance Maturity Models-evolution- Levels-
Characteristics - Good Governance Models- Digital
Governance: Broadcasting/ Wider Dissemination Model,
2 12 25
Critical Flow Model, Comparative Analysis Model,
Mobilization and Lobbying Model, Interactive-service
Model/ G2C2G
Architectures for data warehouses for egovernment-
National Data Warehouses: Census Data, Prices of Essential
3 Commodities -dashboards for online decision making-Other 12 25
areas are Agriculture, Rural Development, Health, Planning,
Education, and Trade and Other Sectors.
4 Infrastructure readiness - Digital System, Legal, 6 15
Institutional, Human, Technological Evolutionary Stages in
E-Governance.
Cases on e-literacy project in Kerala-Bhoomi in Karnataka,
FRIENDS in Kerala, E-Khazana, DGFT, PRAJA, E-Seva,
E-Panchyat, Mandals in Andra, Gyandoot, Computerised
5 interstate check post in Gujarat-General Information 9 20
Services of National Informatics Centre; Comparative study
on E-Governance initiative in developing and developed
countries like USA; E- China; Brazil and Sri Lanka
Final Exam
Page 84 of 86
Introduction
SYS-T4-6 Business Database Systems 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The primary objective of this course is to deliver the fundamentals of database. A variety of topics will
be covered that are important for modern databases in order to prepare the students for real life
applications of databases.
Syllabus
DBMS concepts- Components- classification-file organization-indexing- ER model- DDL and DML-

Use of SQL-Normalization- distributed databases- database security and integrity aspects and
privileges.
Expected Outcomes
Student must be able to master the basic concepts and understand the applications of database
systems, construct an Entity-Relationship (E-R) model from specifications and to transform to
relational model. Student also must be conversant with database normalization principles. It is also
designed make the student know more about distributed databases and database security aspects.
References
1. C. J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, An Introduction to Database Systems, Pearson

Education.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, McGraw-Hill Higher
Education
3. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan, Database System Concepts,
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia).
4. Shio Kumar Singh, Database Systems Concepts, Designs and Application, Pearson Education.
5. Peter Rob and Carlos Coronel, Database Systems Design, Implementation and Management,
Thomson Learning-Course Technology.
6. Patrick O’Neil and Elizabeth O’Neil, Database Principles, Programming and Performance,
Harcourt Asia Pte. Ltd.
Page 85 of 86
COURSE PLAN
Hours % marks in
Unit Topics
Database Environment, functioning of a Simple Centralized
Database System, Traditional File Systems vs. Modern
I Database Management Systems, Properties of Database, 6 15
Types of Database Users, Advantages of DBMS,
Applications
Data Model, Schemas and Instances, three schema
architecture, Languages and Interfaces, DBMS Components,
2 Classification of Database Management Systems, DDL, 12 25
DML and use of SQL in relational databases and
normalization.
File Organization-Memory Hierarchy, Secondary Storage
Devices, Buffering of Blocks, Placing File Records on Disk,
3 Operation on Files, Files of Unordered Records (Heap 9 20
Files), Files of Ordered Records, Hashing Techniques-
primary index and clustering index
4 Conceptual Data model - ER Model Concept using example, 9 20
Components of an ER Model, Relationships, Roles and
Structural constraints, Constraints on Relationship Types
Distributed DBMS Concepts, Client-Server Model, Data
Fragmentation, Replication, and Allocation Techniques for
5 9 20
Distributed Database Design Security and Integrity
Violations, Authorization, Granting of Privileges
Final Exam
Page 86 of 86
Programme
Under
Trimester 5
June 2016
Page 1 of 85
TRIMESTER V
Marks (hours)
51 Entrepreneurship 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
52 Business Ethics and Corporate 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
Governance
53 Elective V 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
54 Elective VI 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
55 Elective VII 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
56 Elective VIII 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
57 Project (Report and Viva-voce) 0-0-5 50 50 4
TOTAL 24-0-5 290 410 22
Page 2 of 85
Introduction
51 Entrepreneurship 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the students to face the ground realities of starting &
managing their own Entrepreneurial ventures
Syllabus
The syllabus covers Entrepreneurship which is playing a catalytic role in the rapid development of
the country. The basic concepts, Entrepreneurship in Indian context. Supporting agencies, SSI
initial processes and business management. Business plan and DPR structure and schemes
Expected Outcome
At the successful completion of the course the students will develop the achievement motivation
and Entrepreneurial competency. It will also familiarise the students with the ground realities of
starting & managing their own Entrepreneurial ventures
References
1. Charanthimath, Entrepreneurship development small business enterprises, Pearson education,
2008
2. Kuratko & Hodgetts, Entrepreneurship in The New Millennium, Cengage learning, 2009.
3. Vasant Desai: Small scale Industries and Entrepreneurship, Himalaya Publishing House, 2009.
4. Dollinger M J, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Pearson Education, New Delhi 2006
5. N P Sreenivasan and G P Gupta, Entrepreneurial development, Sulthanchand and Sons
6. Vasanth Desai “Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management”, Himalaya
Publishing House, 2011
7. S.S.Khanka “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand & Company Ltd., 2001
8. Bhide, Amar V., “The Origin and Evolution of New Business”, Oxford University Press, 2000.
9. Bellon Whittington “Competing through Innovation” , Prentice Hall, 2006
10. Peter F. Drucker, “Innovation and Entrepreneurship”, Harper Business, 2006
11. Michael H. Morris, Donald F. Kuratko, and Jeffery G Covin, “Corporate Entrepreneurship &
Innovation”, Cengage learning, 2011.
12. John Bessant and Joe Tidd, “Innovation and Entrepreneurship”, John Wiley and Sons
Ltd.,2011
13. A Sahay , V Sharma, Entrepreneurship and New Venture Creation, Excel Books, 2008
Page 3 of 85
Course Plan
Allott marks
ed in
Trimester
Exam
I Introduction to Entrepreneurship - Definition of Entrepreneur, 9 15
Forms of business, Entrepreneurial Traits, and Entrepreneur vs.
Manager, Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur. Role of Entrepreneurship in Economic
Development, Ethics and Social responsibility of Entrepreneurs.
Opportunities for Entrepreneurs in India and abroad. Start up
India, Stand up India - schemes, Woman as Entrepreneur
opportunities and challenges.
II(a) The Entrepreneurial ideation and decision process. Managing 6 10
Finance and Growth - Sources of capital, Venture capitalists,
Angel Investors, Institutional Financial assistance: Role of IFC,
IDBI, ICICI, LIC, SFC,SIPCOT and commercial Banks,
Appraisal of Bank for loans and financial controls.

II(b) E-commerce and Entrepreneurship, Features and evaluation of 5 10
joint ventures, acquisitions, mergers, franchising. Public issues,
rights issues, bonus issues and stock splits
III Small Scale Industries – Meaning, Importance, Evolution, 10 25

Organisational Structure, Decision Making, Starting a Small
Scale Industry-Phases, Training requirements, Small Industry
Extension Training Institute, Legal frameworks, Registration
procedures, Concessions and reliefs by Government, Sickness
in Small Scale Industries.
IV Production in Small Scale Industry, Optimum Size of plant, 7 15
Factors affecting production process, Production planning,
control, Product mix, Rural entrepreneurship, Social
entrepreneurship
V Incubation procedures and processes, Business plan 8 25
preparation, DPR Structure and scheme, Reasons for failures,
Revival process. Successful Entrepreneurs from India.
Final Examination
Page 4 of 85
Introduction
52 Business Ethics and Corporate 4–0–0 3 2016
Governance
Course Objectives
The basic objective of the course is to sensitise the student on the various ethical aspects
concerning the functioning of business enterprises, and to provide awareness about, how the
society and business are interdependent for the survival of both. The course aims to equip the
students to be honest and be responsible to the society. The knowledge of the subject will improve
ethical reasoning by correlating moral concepts to business practices. The course aims to create
awareness among students on the importance of Corporate Governance.
Syllabus
Values and its transformation to Ethics – Business Ethics, Stakeholder approach –– Law & Ethics ––
Ethical Philosophies – Ethical Dilemma – Whistle blowing – Corporate Ethics, Ethics Programme – Ethics
in functional areas of business – Corporate Governance
Expected Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the student will be well aware that ethical decision making in
business management is a must for any organisation for its long term survival and consistent growth.
Knowledge on business ethics will motivate the Managers to be more transparent in their business dealings
resulting in a business world with no scams and with most effective corporate governance.
References
. Kumar Senthil, Rajan Senthil, Business Ethics and Values, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai
2. William H Shaw, Business Ethics:Text Book with Cases, Cengage Learning 2014
3. Sekhar R.C, Ethical Choice in Business, Sage Publication
4. Biswanath Ghosh, Ethics in Management and Indian Ethos, 2009, Vikas Publishing.
5. Jennings M.Marianne, Cases in Business Ethics, 2008, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi.
6. Murthy.C.S.V, Business Ethics – Text and Cases, 2010, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai.
7. Balachandran, and Chandrasekharan, Corporate Governance, Ethics and Social Responsibility,
PHI, 2/e, 2011.
Page 5 of 85
COURSE PLAN
% marks
Hours
Unit Topics in Final
Allotted
Exam.
Values – intention – action – consequences, Ethics, Inventory
of values, Business Ethics – Stakeholder Model of Business
Ethics, Ethics and Religion – Sources of Morality – influences
I 13 20
to ethical responses – Indian Work Ethics - Law and Ethics –
relationship and comparison, Interdependence of Business &
Society – Corporate Social Responsibility
Ethical Philosophies – Normative Ethics – Descriptive Ethics
– Applied Ethics – Meta Ethics, Deontological ethics –
2 Teleological Ethics – Virtue Ethics, Utilitarianism – Egoism – 4 15
Divine Command – Immanuel Kant's Theory, Social Contract
Theory, Moral Relativism
Ethics in functional areas of business – Financial Management
(Window dressing, misleading financial analysis, insider trading,
churning etc.) – Human Resource Management – (Discrimination –
age, gender, race) sexual harassment, ethics at work place, issues
affecting privacy of employees, fairness of employment contracts,
occupational safety– Marketing Management – Pricing issues like
Price discrimination, Price fixing, Price skimming, Ethics in
3 advertising (surrogate, deceptive advertising), Distribution issues
13 20
like tying arrangement, black market– Production Management –
Process issues like effluents, optimisation of resources like power &
water, Product issues like additive & intrinsically hazardous
products, genetically modified products, flawed products– Ethics in
Information Technology – Ethics in customer and vendor
relationship
Ethics Programme – code of ethics – ethics training – ethics
committee – ethics officer, Ethics Audit, Transparency International
- Whistle Blowing – classification – legal support to Whistle-Blower
– Tips to successful Whistle Blowing - Corporate Governance -
4 6 20
Definition - need for corporate governance - evidence of corporate
governance from Arthashasthra - elements of good corporate
governance - corporate governance theories - Agency Theory -
Shareholder Theory - Stake Holder Theory - Stewardship Theory
Developments in corporate governance - evolution in US, UK and
India – board effectiveness - issues and challenges - role and types
of directors - corporate board committees - corporate disclosure -
5 emerging trends in corporate governance - corporate board duties - 9 25
responsibilities and liabilities. Legal framework for corporate
governance Companies Act, Basel III
Final Exam
Page 6 of 85
ELECTIVES
Page 7 of 85
Introduction
FIN-T5-7 Behavioral Finance 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Behavioral Finance deals with the influence of psychology on various aspects of financial markets,
including the behavior of individual and institutional investors. This will help the students to
minimize or eliminate the psychological bias in investment decision process.
Syllabus
Conventional Finance, Prospect theory and Market Efficiency- Agency theory- Behavioural
Science Foundation- Investor Behaviour- Money Management- Expertise and Implicit learning-
Neuro-finance.
Expected Outcome
Upon successful completion of this course, the students will be able to understand the
psychological bias in investment decisions.
References
1. Ackert, Lucy F., Deaves, Richard (2010). Behavioral Finance. South-Western Cengage Learning
2. Sulphey M.M, Behavioural Finance, PHl Learning.
3. Arnold, Glen (2010). Investing: the definitive companion to investment and the financial markets. 2nd
ed. Financial Times/ Prentice Hall.
4. Gold, M. Investing in pseudo-science: the àctive versus passive` debate // The Journal of Financial
Research, Spring
5. Gitman, Lawrence J., Michael D. Joehnk , Fundamentals of Investing. Pearson / Addison Wesley
6. LeBarron, Dean, Romeesh Vaitilingam. Ultimate Investor, Capstone
7. Nofsinger, John R. The Psychology of Investing. 3rd ed. Pearson/Prentice Hall
8. Sharpe, William, F. Gordon J. Alexander, Jeffery V.Bailey. Investments, International edition. Prentice
–Hall International.
9. Rabin, Matthew, Risk Aversion and Expected-Utility Theory: A Calibration Theorem, Econometrical,
2000.
Page 8 of 85
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Conventional Finance, Prospect theory and Market Efficiency:
The Pricing of Risk-Market Efficiency-Agency Theory-Prospect
Theory-Challenges to Market efficiency- Behavioural Vs Neo
1 9 16
Classical Finance-Irrational preference and Cumulative Prospect
Theory.
Behavioural Science Foundation: Perception, Memory, and

Heuristics- representatives and Related Biases- Irrationality and
adaptation- Miscalibration- Other strains of overconfidence- Brief
2 9 14
history of rational thought-Pascal-Femat to friedman-Savage- Pre
requisites for Rational choice and Quasi Rational Choice

Investor Behaviour: Financial Behaviour stemming from
Familiarity, Financial Behaviour stemming from
Representativeness-Over confidence and Excessive Trading-
Under diversification and Excessive Risk Taking- Investor 9
3 25
Decision cycle-Decision making under risk and uncertainty-
Expected utility theory- Decision making in Historical
prospective-Allais and Elsberg’s paradoxes-Errors in Decision
making.
Corporate Finance: Mispricing and Goals of Managers- Irrational
Managers or Irrational Investors. Investor psychology-Forecasting
Bias-Emotional Decision Making- Errors in Decision making-
4 9 20
Behavioural corporate finance and Managerial decision making-
Investing style and Behaviour Finance.
Money Management: Anomaly Attenuation-style peer Groups

and style investing Multivariate approach- Style rotation-
Neurofinance and the trader’s Brain- Expertise and Implicit
5 9 25
learning- Expertise and Emotion- Gender, Personality Type, and
Investor Behavior- Investor Personality Types- Neuroeconomics-
rational Managers and Irrational investors
Final Examination
Page 9 of 85
Introduction
FIN-T5-8 Security Analysis and Portfolio 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to give the students an in-depth knowledge of the theory and
practice of Investment decision making process and portfolio management.
Syllabus
Investment- Risk and Return and Measurement-Indian Stock Market and their Operation-
Fundamental analysis- Technical analysis-Portfolio Analysis- Selection-Evaluation
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with different concepts of
Portfolio Management. They would understand how to develop an efficient portfolio based upon
risk and return criteria.
References
1. Francis, J C, Investment Analysis and Management, McGraw- Hill, New York.

2. Punithavathy Pandian, Financial Services and Markets, Vikas PH, 2009.
3. Avadhani, V A, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya Publishing,
Mumbai.
4. Machiraju, HR, Indian Financial system, Vikas PH, 2010.
5. Elton, Edwin j. and Martin J . Gruber, Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment
Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New york.
6. Kevin .S , Security Analysis and portfolio Management PHL Publishing , New Delhi
7. Kothari and Rajesh, Financial services in India: Concept and Application, Sage,
New Delhi, 2010.
8. Gordon, E & Natarajan, K. Financial Markets & Services, Himalaya PH, 2011.
9. Rajesh Kothari, Financial Services in India, Sage Publication, 2010.
10. Farrell, James L, Portfolio Management: Theory and Application, McGraw- Hill, New
York.
11. Markowitz, Harry, 1952, “Portfolio Selection”, Journal of Finance.
12. Khan, M.Y. Financial Services, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2010
13. Singh, Preeti, Investment Management, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai
Page 10 of 85
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Investments: types and characteristics - Types of investors –
Speculation- Gambling- Investment avenues- investment process
1 comparison of investment products- Security analysis- Portfolio 8 14
Management.
Risk and Return -Risk-Elements of risk- Beta, measurement of

Beta, Systematic Risk- Unsystematic Risk-Measurement of Risk-
2 10 22
- Capital Asset Pricing Model(CAPM)- Security Market Line,
Capital Market Line.
Indian Stock Market- Operations of Indian stock market and Bond
markets, new issue market - Book building process - listing - 8
3 14
secondary market - online trading - dematerialization - Depository
services
Security Analysis- Fundamental Analysis - Economic Analysis -
Industry analysis-Company analysis-Technical Analysis-Dow
4 10 25
Theory-Elliot Wave theory- Random Walk theory- Efficient
Market hypothesis.
Portfolio Analysis and Selection- Markowitz portfolio theory-

Efficient Frontier- Single Index Model- Multi Index Model-
5 9 25
Portfolio valuation- Return on portfolio-Portfolio Evaluation-
Sharp- Treynor-Jensen- Portfolio Revision- Portfolio Evaluation.
Final Examination
Page 11 of 85
Introduction
FIN-T5-9 Corporate Taxation 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course aims to familiarize the students with major latest provisions of Indian tax laws and related
judicial pronouncements pertaining to corporate world.
Syllabus
Income Tax basic frame work-Income tax system in India- Assessment year- previous year-Residential
status- Profits and Gains from Business or Profession; Chargeability- Assessment of companies- Special
Provision in Respect of Newly Established Undertaking.
Expected Outcome
The course will sensitize the students to recognize tax planning opportunities for developing appropriate
tax strategies required in corporate decision making. This course will enable the learners to do effective tax
planning to reduce tax liability of companies.
References
1. Singhania, Vinod, Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Revised edition for the relevant
Assessment year, Taxmann Publications.
2. Mehrotra, HC and Goyal, SP, Corporate Tax Planning and Management, Edition for the
relevant A .Y, Sahitya Bhawan Publication, Agra.
3. Singhania V.K., Corporate Tax Planning, Edition for the relevant A .Y, TMH.
4. Aggarwal, K., Direct Tax Planning and Management, Atlantic Publications
5. Sreenivas, E.A.: Handbook of Corporate Tax Planning, Relevant A.Y, Tata McGraw Hill,
NewDelhi.
6. Ahuja, G. K. & Gupta, Ravi, Systematic Approach to Income Tax, Bharat Law House
7. Lakhotia, R.N., Income Tax Planning Handbook, Vision Books
8. Gupta and Gupta, Corporate Taxation in India, Edition for the relevant A .Y Himalya
Publishing House, New Delhi
Page 12 of 85
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Income Tax basic Frame work:- Income Tax in India-Basic
changes in Income Tax- Income- Agricultural Income- Kinds of
1 Agricultural income-Assessee-Income Tax Systems in India-; 9 18
Assessment year- Previous year. Rebate and Relief of Tax-
Direct and Indirect tax-Tax deducted at source
Residential status: Residential Status of individual-
Computation of Residential status- Residential status of
2 9 18
Company- Heads of Income-Exempted income- Income tax
rate- Corporate tax rate-Corporate Tax Expenditure
Computation of Income: Profits and Gains from Business or
Profession; Chargeability; Deductions expressly allowed;
Expenses allowable under certain restrictions; Expenses expressly
10
3 disallowed; Maintenance of accounts; Compulsory audit of 22
accounts; Computation of profits and gains; Problems on
computation of income from business or profession.
Assessment of companies: Computation of Taxable Income of

Companies- Taxable Income of Companies- Steps in Computation
of Taxable Income of Companies- Carry- forward and setoff
4 8 22
losses of companies--Minimum Alternative Tax (MAT) -
Calculating Book Profit- Tax on Distributed Profits of Domestic
Company.
Tax Planning: Special Provision in Respect of Newly Established

Undertaking in FTZs-Special Provision in Respect of Newly
Established Undertaking-Special Provision in Respect of Newly
5 9 20
Established Undertakings in 100% Export Oriented Units
(EOUs).-Tax Audit- tax Planning with reference to nature of
Business- Tax Evasion and tax Avoidance
Final Examination
Page 13 of 85
Introduction
FIN-T5-10 International Finance 4-0-0 0 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to provide a good understanding about international financial
environment and international financial markets. The course would ensure that the students
would acquire sound knowledge about exchange rate and currency risk management system.
Syllabus
International financial environment-financial transaction- Balance of payment-foreign exchange

market-International monetary system-currency crisis-exchange rate- currency risk management-
International financial markets-Financing international trade
Expected Outcome
framework of International Financial markets, Foreign exchange markets and monetary system.
Page 14 of 85
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
International Financial Environment-Global Economy-Financial
Globalization Experiences from India-Functions of International
Financial Manager-International financial Transaction-Balance of
1 Payment, Meaning, structure- International Monetary System- 9 20
Evolution of International Financial System- Evolution of International
financial Institutions bilateral agencies- Emergence of International
Banks- Euro Banks- Bank for International Settlements (BIS)-IMF
Foreign Exchange Market: Forex market- trading Volume of foreign
exchange market-Evolution of foreign exchange market and
foreign exchange system- foreign exchange rates-types of foreign
2 9 20
exchange transaction -Types of Forex market participants-Hedger-
speculator-Arbitrageurs-Forex Market in India-RBI intervention in
Forex Market-
International Monetary system: Introduction to International
monetary system- gold standard- paper currency standards and
purchasing power parity- Bretton Woods system- Exchange rate – 9
3 20
fixed and Floating- Currency Board system-Basket system-
Currency Risk Management.
Exchange Rates- Introduction-Purchasing power parity-Interest
rate parity-Fisher effect- International parity conditions and Indian
foreign exchange market integration- Exchange rate forecasting-
4 9 20
Foreign exchange contract-Spot Forex transaction-forward Forex
transaction-Forex future contract-Foreign currency swap-foreign
currency option-Forex transaction in India-
International Financial Markets:- Introduction-participants of

International financial Markets-International Financial
institutions-Euro market- International Equity Market and Indian
5 ADRs and GDRs -International Bond market-Types of 9 20
International Bond market- Bonds issued by Indian companies-
Financing international trade- Letters of Credit- Pre and Post
Shipment Export Finance- Export Credit Insurance
Final Examination
Page 15 of 85
Introduction
FIN-T5-11 Non Banking Financial 4-0-0 0 2016

Companies (NBFCs) and Micro
Finance
Course Objectives
The course aims to enable the students to acquire basic understanding of the structure, organization,
functions and the legal and regulatory framework of NBFCs. The course will also help the students to
understand the aim of financial inclusion, role of micro finance, models of micro finance, Legal and
Regulatory Framework, various financial services and products that are offered through micro-finance
schemes in India.
Syllabus
The structure, organization and functions of Non Banking Financial Companies in India. It also
covers the various services offered by NBFCs and the legal and regulatory framework of NBFCs.
It covers the evolution, scope, impact, trends, models of micro finance, Legal and Regulatory
Framework various financial services and products that are offered to micro-finance clients in India.
Expected Outcome
The students will have enhanced awareness of Non Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs),
Financial Inclusion, Micro finance and its implication on the economy. This course will enable the
students to manage and avail these services in their professional and personal life. This course
will help the students meaningfully participate in the nation building process aligned with the
objectives of financial inclusion plans of the government.
References
1. Khan M.Y. Financial Services, Tata Mc Graw Hill

2. Kohak M. A. Financial Services in India, Digvijay Publication
3. I. M. Pandey, Venture Capital – The Indian Experience, Prentice Hall India
4. J. C. Verma, Venture Capital Financing in India, Response Books
5. J. K. Dietrich, Financial Services and Financial Institutions, Prentice Hall India
6. Stationary Guide for Non-Banking Financial Companies, Taxman Publishers Pvt.
7. V. A. Avadhani, Financial Services and Markets, Himalaya Publishing House
8. S. Teki , R.K. Mishra, Microfinance and Financial Inclusion 2012. Institute of Public
Enterprise, Hyderabad.
9. P. K. Sahoo, Financial Services and Markets, Himalaya Publishing House
10. B. L. Mathur, Changing Profile of Financial Services, Bookman Associates
Page 16 of 85
11. Ghosh. D: Banking Policy in India, Allied Publication, Delhi.
12. Srivastava R.M. Management of Indian Financial In situation, Himalaya Publishing
House, Mumbai.
13. Muhammad Yunus, Banker to the Poor: Micro-Lending and the Battle Against World Poverty,
October, 2003
14. Jonathan Morduch, Beatriz Armendariz, The Economics of Microfinance, May 2010
15. Ananya Roy, Poverty Capital: Microfinance and the Making of Development , April 2010
16. A. Vijayakumar, Banking, Micro Finance and Self-help Groups (SHGs) in India, July 2009
17. www.rbi.org
Page 17 of 85
COURSE PLAN
Course Plan
Units Topics Hours % of marks
Allotted in
Trimester
Exam
I Evolution of Financial Services–Indian Financial System– 7 15
Formal Financial System And Informal Financial System–
Financial Institutions- Banking Companies- Difference
Between Banks And NBFCs
II History of Non Banking Financial Companies– 8 20
Classification of Non Banking Companies –Classification
of Activities of Non Banking Finance Companies - Fund
Based Activities – Fee Based Activities – Concepts,
Growth and Trends of Fee Based And Fund Based
Activities.
III Sources of Finance- Functions -Investment Policies of Non 8 20
Baking Financial Institutions in India- RBI Guidelines on
NBFCs- Products offered by different NBFCs in India-
Features of these Financial Products-
IV(a) Major Non-Banking Financial Companies Operating In 7 10
India- Trends- Legal frame work
IV(b) Procedure of application to the Reserve Bank for NBFC 7 10
Registration- Section 45-IA of the RBI Act, 1934 -
Companies Act Section 3
V Financial inclusion-objectives- Microfinance as a 8 25
Development Tool - The Indian Experience- Evolution and
Character of microfinance in India- Microfinance Delivery
Methodologies and models- Legal and Regulatory
Framework- Impact of Microfinance - Revenue Models of
Microfinance- Profitability Efficiency and Productivity-
Emerging issues
Final examination
Page 18 of 85
Course
Year of
FIN-T5-12 Cost Accounting and Budget Control 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
On completion of this course student will be able to:

1. To provide the students with knowledge on advanced approaches of Cost Accounting to
enable them to apply costing methods and techniques
2. To prepare and interpret standard costs and variance statements.
Syllabus
Cost Accounting Methods & Systems- Marginal costing – cost volume profit analysis -
Budgeting and Budgetary Control- Standard Costing- Variance analysis
Expected Outcome
After the course, students would have a good understanding of how corporate value creation
is measured in practice, how business plans models are developed and what day-to-day
business process looks like with respect to cost.
References
1. M L Agarwal, K L Gupta, Cost Accounting, Sahitya Bhavan Publications

2. K L Gupta, Management Accounting, Sahitya Bhavan Publications
3. N.K. Agarwal, Cost Accounting for C A, Suchitra Prakashan Pvt. Ltd.
4. SN. Maheshwari, Cost Accounting (Problem and Theory), Mahavir Publications
5. B.K. Bhar, Cost Accounting (Methods & Problems), Academic Publisher (Calcutta)
6. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles and Practices of Cost Accounting, A. H. Wheeler
publisher.
7. R. Jaya Prakash Reddy, Cost Accounting and Control Systems, APH publishing
Corporation, Delhi
8. S.P. Jain & K.L. Narang : Cost and Management Accounting; Kalyani Publishers, 23,
Daryaganj, New Delhi-110 002. .
9. V.K. Saxena& C.D. Vashist : Cost and Management Accounting; Sultan Chand &
Sons, 23, Daryaganj New Delhi -110 002.
10. M.N. Arora : Cost and Management Accounting (Theory and Problems); Himalaya
Publishing House, Ramdoot, Dr. BhaleraoMarg, Kelewadi, Girgaon, Mumbai-400
004. 4. S.N. Maheshwari : Cost and Management Accounting; Sultan Chand & Sons,
23, Daryaganj New Delhi -110 002.
11. I.M. Pandey : Management Accounting; Vikas Publishing House (P) Ltd. A-22,
Page 19 of 85
Sector 4, Noida – 201 301
12. Ravi M. Kishore : Advanced Management Accounting; Taxmann’s, Taxmann
Publication (P) Ltd. 59/32, New Rohtak Road, New Delhi – 110 005.
13. M.Y. Khan & P.K. Jain : Theory and Problems of Management and Cost Accounting;
McGraw-Hill Education (India) Ltd. B-4, Sector 63, Gautam Budh Nagar, Noida –
201 301.
14. JawaharLal : Cost Accounting; McGraw-Hill Education (India) Ltd. B-4, Sector 63,
GautamBudh Nagar, Noida – 201 301. 9. C.T. Horngren : Cost and Management
Accounting - A Managerial Emphasis; Pearson Education Asia, 482, F.I.E.
Patparganj, Delhi-110 092.
15. B.M. Lall Nigam & I.C. Jain : Cost Accounting Principles and Practice; Prentice
Hall of India, M-97, Connaught Circus, New Delhi-110 001
Page 20 of 85
COURSE PLAN
Topics Hours % of marks

Unit
I Cost Accounting Methods & Systems: Importance Of Cost 4 10

Accounting- Role of Cost Accountant in decision making-
Integrated Accounting System.
II Methods / Types Of Costing: Unit or Output costing – 11 20
Statement of Cost; Tender price, Quotation price and
Estimation price - Estimation of tender price; Contract costing;
Job and batch costing; Process costing – valuation of work-in-
progress; Operating costing
III Marginal Costing: Calculation of marginal cost – make or buy 10 20

decisions – product-mix decisions – pricing decisions – market
expansion decisions – Divesting decisions; Breakeven analysis
– cost-volume-profit analysis
IV Budgeting and budgetary control: budgeting and budgetary 6 20

control – Classification of budgets – Sales budget, production
budget, raw material budget, labour budget, overhead budget,
cash budget
IV Fixed and flexible budget – zero based budgeting – 4 10

responsibility accounting
V Standard costing: Advantages and limitations of standard 10 20

costing – application of standard costing – standard costing
and budgetary control
Variance Analysis: Managerial uses of variance analysis –
causes of variances – computation of material cost variances,
labour cost variances
Final Examination
Page 21 of 85
Introduction
HR-T5-7 Performance Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The purpose of this course is to make Student understand how to manage individual performance, Review
performance appraisal system and discuss the nature of 360 degree feedback and how performance
management system attempts to integrate both enabling and assessing individual performance.
Syllabus
Overview of Performance Management, Performance Management Process, Performance Management

Planning & Development; Performance Appraisal and Issues in Performance Management.
Expected Outcome
1. Evaluate the performance management processes that are common

2. Determine individual and group objectives necessary to achieve organizational objectives.
3. Specify the qualitative and quantitative means for assessing performance.
4. Propose appropriate reward systems to support the achievement of the desired outcomes.
5. Evaluate the ethical issues associated with specific performance management decisions.
References
1. Robert Bacal, Performance Management, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd.

2. T.V. Rao, Performance Management and Appraisal Systems: HR Tools for Global
Competitiveness, Sage Publications.
3. Michael Armstrong, Employee Reward, Beekman Books Inc.
4. D.K.Srivastava, Strategies for Performance Management, Excel Books.
5. R.K. Sahu, Performance Management System, Excel Books.
6. Prem Chadha-Performance Management, MacMillan.
7. Michael Armstrong, Performance Management: Key Strategies and Practical Guidelines, 3rd
Edition, Kogan Page Limited, Philadelphia.
8. G.K.Suri, Venkat Ratnam and N.K. Gupta, Performance Measurement and Management, Excel
Books.
9. Cynthis D. Fisher, Lyle F. Schoenfeldt and James B.Shaw, Human Resource Management,
Dreamtech Press.
10. Kanishka Bedi, Quality Management, Oxford University Press, India.
11. Merchant, A. K. & Van der Stede, W. A., Management Control Systems: Performance
Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, Financial Times/ Prentice Hall.
12. N. Bahra, 360 Degree Appraisal, Financial Times/ Prentice Hall.
13. Performance Management: Measure and Improve The Effectiveness of Your Employees, Harvard
Business Review Press.
Page 22 of 85
14. Performance Appraisal, Harvard Business Review Press.
15. Corey Sandler, Performance Appraisal Phrase Book, Fw Media.
16. Rakesh Mittal, High Performance Work Systems: A cross-cultural perspective, Journal of
International Business and Cultural Studies, Vol 6, Jan 2012.
17. Pachsiry Chompukum, Peformance Management effectiveness in Thai Banking industry: a look
from performers and a role of interactional justice, Journal of International Business and Cultural
Studies, Vol 6, Jan 2012.
COURSE PLAN
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Overview of Performance Management:

Performance Evaluation, Evolution of Performance Management,
Definitions and Differentiation of Terms Related to Performance
Management. Importance of Performance Management, Linkage of
Performance Management to Other HR Processes
1 9 20
Theoretical Framework of Performance Management - Goal Theory
and its Application in Performance Management, Control Theory and
its Application in Performance Management, Social Cognitive Theory
and its Application in Performance Management, Organisational
Justice Theory and its Application in Performance Management
Performance Management Process:
Overview of Performance Management Process, Performance

Management Planning Process, Mid-cycle Review Process, End-cycle
2 Review Process, Performance Management Cycle at a Glance 9 20
Aims of Performance Management, Purpose of Performance

Management, Employee Engagement and Performance Management,
Principles of Performance Management, Overview of Performance
Management as a System, Dimensions of Performance Management
Performance Management Planning & Development;
Introduction, Performance Management (PM) Planning, the Planning
3 Process, Performance Agreement, Drawing up the Plan, Evaluating the 9 20
Performance Planning Process.
Mechanics of Performance Management Planning and Documentation
- The Need for Structure and Documentation, Manager’s
Page 23 of 85
Responsibility in Performance Planning Mechanics and
Documentation, Employee’s Responsibility in Performance Planning
Mechanics and Documentation, Mechanics of Performance
Management Planning and Creation of Performance Management
Document.
Performance Appraisal (PA):
Definitions and Dimensions of PA, Purpose of PA and Arguments
against PA, Necessity of Performance Appraisal and its Usage by
Organisations, Characteristics of Performance Appraisal, Performance
Appraisal Process, Errors made by Human Resource Department.
Performance Appraisal Methods - Performance Appraisal Methods,
Traditional Methods, Modern Methods, and Performance Appraisal of
4 Executives. 9 20
Performance Appraisal Feedback - Feedback – Role, Types and
Principles, Situations Requiring Feedback and Pitfalls, Components of
a Feedback and Steps in giving a Constructive Feedback, Levels of
Performance Feedback.
360-Degree Appraisal - Introduction, the Impact of 360-Degree
Feedback on Organisations, Concept of 360-Degree Feedback System,
Purpose, Methodology, Ratings, Advantages and Disadvantages of the
Method, The Process of 360-Degree Feedback.
Issues in Performance Management
Team Performance, Performance of Learning Organisations and
Virtual Teams: Team Performance Management, Performance
Management and Learning Organisations, Performance Management
and Virtual Teams.
Role of Line Managers in Performance Management - Role of Line
Managers in Performance Management, Performance Management and
5 9 20
Reward, Concepts related to Performance and Reward, Linking
Performance to Pay, Linking Performance to Total Reward, Challenges
of Linking Performance and Reward; Ethics in Performance
Management - Ethics in Performance Management, Realities of Ethics
in Performance Management, Ensuring Ethics in Performance
Management.
Automation in Performance Management - Improving Execution
Aspects of Performance Management, Automation Process.
Final Examination
Page 24 of 85
Introduction
HR-T5-8 Compensation Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course is designed to promote understanding of issues related to the compensation or rewarding human
resources in the corporate sector, public services and other forms of organisations and to impact skills in
designing and analysing and restructuring reward management systems, policies and strategies.
Syllabus
Compensation Framework and Theories, Wage and Pay systems, Wage Fixation, Expatriate Compensation,
Social Security, Retirement Benefits and Design of Pay Structures.
Expected Outcome
1. analyze, integrate, and apply the knowledge to solve compensation related problems in organizations.
2. demonstrate comprehension by constructing a compensation system encompassing; a) internal
consistency, b) external competitiveness c) employee contributions, d) organizational benefit systems, e)
administration issues and in compliance of market and regulatory requirements
References
1. Armstrong , Michel and Murlis , Helen, Reward Management : A Handbook of Salary Administration,
Kogan Page Ltd, 1988
2. S.S. Upadhyay, Compensation Management: Rewarding Performance, Global India Publications, 2009
3. Mark Bussin, Expatriate Compensation: A practical and informative textbook for managing expatriate
compensation, mobility, and international assignments in the world of work, Knowres Publishing, 2015
4. A.M. Sharma, Understanding Wage and Compensation System, Himalaya Pub.House, 2014
5. Designing Pay Levels, Mix and Pay Structures. http://business.uni.edu/mitra/chap08.pdf
6. How to build Pay Grades and Salary Ranges, http://resources.payscale.com/rs/payscale/images/2013-
How-to-Build-Pay-Grades-and-Salary-Ranges.pdf
7. How to Set Competitive Compensation Structures,
http://downloads.erieri.com.s3.amazonaws.com/pdf/How_to_Set_Competitive_Compensation_Structure
s.pdf
8. Hendorson , Richard I. Compensation Management : Rewarding Performance in Modern Organization,
Prentice Hall, 1988
9. Lance Berger and Dorothy Beger, The Compensation Handbook, Sixth Edition: A State-of-the-Art Guide
Page 25 of 85
to Compensation Strategy and Design, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2015
10. A.K. Sharma, Labour Economics, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2006
11. K.N. Subramaniam, Wages in India, McGraw-Hill Inc, 1977
12. A.I. Fonseca, Wage Issues in a Developing Economy : An Indian Experience, Oxford University Press,
1964
13. B.D. Singh, Compensation and Reward Management, Excel Books, 2012
14. Richard I. Henderson, Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based World, Pearson
Education, 2007
15. Ten Steps For Building A Salary Structure, http://internationalhrforum.com/2010/07/29/ten-steps-for-
building-a-salary-structure/
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Compensation Framework and Theories
Conceptual Framework of Compensation Management: Meaning of

wage , Minimum wage , Fair wage , Living wage , Money wage, Take
1 7 10
home pay , Difference between wage and pay , Concept and
Components of Wages; Components of compensation; Theories of
wages: Subsistence theory, Wage Fund Theory, Marginal Productivity
theory, Residual claimant theory, Bargaining theory.
Wage and Pay systems
Principles of wage and salary administration, Job Evaluation - meaning

2 , principles, methods, limitations, importance , Systems of payment : 7 20
Time rate system , piece rate system , Incentive payments. Fringe
benefits, Fringe benefits tax (FBT); Cost to the company (CTC) –
calculation and computing.
Wage Fixation
Criteria of wage fixation. Methods of Payment, Broad- banding,

Performance based pay systems , Knowledge based pay system, market
based pay system, Incentive based pay system, Types of incentive plans;
3 9 20
Executive compensation; Wage Policy in India, Methods of wage
determination in India, The Pay Commission, Wage Boards and
Tribunals: Structure, Scope and functions, Role of Collective bargaining
in wage determination, The Rate of Minimum Wages Act; Emerging
trends of compensation management in IT industries.
Expatriate Compensation
4 6 20
Expatriate assignment approaches - Fringe benefits, Career
management of expatriates, Job pricing, Expatriate reward models,
Page 26 of 85
Cost-of-living data, expatulator and calculations, Taxation and the
expatriate, Repatriation and reintegration; Expatriate management
systems; success factors.
Social Security and Retirement Benefits
Social Security, definition, concept, approaches, Employees’

5 (a) Provident Fund Scheme, Employees’ Deposit Linked Insurance 6 10
Scheme, Employees’ Pension Scheme, Pension Fund, Payment of
gratuity, Participatory/Contributory Pension; Employee State
Insurance Corporation (ESIC).
Design of Pay structures
Pay structures – concept, measuring the Market; Pay Mechanics

(Structure Design) - Pay mechanics; Number of grades - career
bands, broad grades and narrow bands; Pay ranges - formulas and
guidance on best practice; Pay slopes - formulas and guidance on
best practice; Pay overlap - formulas and guidance on best practice;
5 (b) Smoothing the pay curve - techniques and guidance on best 10 20
practice; Positioning Staff in the Pay Scale - Options for employees
below minimum of pay scale, Options for employees above
maximum of pay scale, Market premiums - guidance on types of
premium and when they are necessary; Reviewing the Pay Scale -
Reviewing the pay structure, Timing and frequency, Measuring
current position, Measuring market movement and inflation, Other
external factors, Other internal factors.
Final Examination
Page 27 of 85
Introduction
HR-T5-9 Leadership, Power and 4-0-0 3 2016

Influence
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to enable the students to develop competence to lead a business organization
through good and bad times to success. It also aims at familiarizing students with the research output in the
area of Leadership.
Syllabus
The syllabus covers Leadership general aspects, various approaches, Values of the leader and its impact,
Personality of the leader, Methods of influencing people, power and politics and essential leadership
processes competencies.
Expected Outcome
At the successful completion of the course the students will develop leadership quality required in a
business organization. It will enable the students to assess their own and others value orientation and
leadership style. It will also develop leadership process competencies required for a successful leader.
References
1. Northouse, P. G. Leadership: theory and practice, fifth edition, Sage Publications, New Delhi
2. Daft, R L.. Leadership. Cengage learning India private limited, New Delhi.
3. Dorfman, P W, Mobley W. Advances in Global Leadership. Emerald Group Publishing
4. Kouzes, J. M., & Posner, B. Z. The leadership challenge (Vol. 3). John Wiley & Sons.
5. Lubar K, Halpern B L. Leadership Presence. Penguin Plubishers
6. Pedler, Mike, Burgoyne, John, Boydell, Tom , A Manager’s Guide To Leadership. McGraw-Hill
Education (UK), 01-Jun-2010
7. Yukl, G. A.. Leadership in organizations. Pearson Education India.
8. Burns, J M, . Leadership: New York: Harper and Row.
9. Ciulla, J B.The Ethics of Leadership. Belmont: Thompson Learning
10. Rost, J.C. Leadership for the twenty- first century, New York: Preager.
Page 28 of 85
Course Plan
Units Topics Hours % of marks
Exam
I Leadership - Definition of Leadership, Leader vs. Manager, , 15 35
Trait Approach to Leadership, Behavioral/style Approach to
Leadership, Situational Approaches to Leadership, Emerging
Leadership approaches-Transformational, Servant, Team,
Psychodynamic and Emergent
First Internal
II Leadership and ethics - values at a personal level, 5 10
organizational level, Value-Based Decision Making,
Approaches to Ethics Management, The Moral Development
of Organizations, Cultural and Team Manifestations
III Stewardship –Governance and Leadership – Ensuring rational 10 25
result- Collective Serving vs. A Self-Serving Agent.
Risk- Break-Even Analysis – Organizational views on risk
Trust- Vulnerability, and Performance, Important
Characteristics
Crisis handling -Crisis Management - Business Continuity
Team, Immediate Response - Physical Crisis, Reputational
Crisis
Accountability -Taking Inventory of readiness and
motivations, Detecting and integrating patterns in the
Environment
Second Internal
IV Influence- Styles of Influence, Unethical Influence Styles 5 10
Organizational politics. The forms of power, Leadership and
organizational learning and adaptation, Woman Leadership
V Decision Making Frameworks, Skillful Discussion, Team 10 20

building, Focusing, Storytelling, System Thinking Models
Driving Accountability, Engaging People, Empowering
people Building Personal Strengths, Problem Solving Skills
Final examination
Page 29 of 85
Introduction
HR-T5-10 Negotiation and Conflict 4-0-0 3 2016

Resolution
Course Objectives
The purpose of this course is to understand how to be more effective in negotiating to help you secure
more of what you want in life. A basic premise of the course is that while a manager needs analytic skills
to discover optimal solutions to problems, negotiation expertise opens the way for these solutions to be
implemented.
Syllabus
Intergroup Relations and Conflict, Negotiation, Negotiations and Collective Bargaining, Conflict and
Disputes Resolution, Trends in industrial conflict
Expected Outcome
1. develop an understanding of the principles, strategies, and tactics of effective negotiation, conflict
resolution, and relationship management
2. to assess the impact of interpersonal styles, personality, culture, and other variables that influence
negotiation.
References
1. Harvard Business Essentials, Guide to Negotiation, Harvard Business Review Press.

2. Fisher, R., Ury, W L., Getting to Yes; Negotiating an Agreement without Giving in, RHUK.
3. Deepak Malhotra and Maz Bazerman, Negotiation Genius: How to Overcome Obstacles and
Achieve Brilliant Results at the Bargaining Table and Beyond, RHUS; Reprint edition.
4. Edgar H. Schuster, Negotiation And Conflict Resolution, Harvard Business Review Press
5. Mark Stephens, Conflict Resolution, Amazon Digital South Asia Services, Inc. (Kindle version)
6. Muookin, Peppet and Tulumello, Beyond Winning: Negotiating to Create Value in Deals and
Disputes, Harvard University Press; New edition edition.
7. Dwivedi, R.S., Managing Human Resources: Industrial Relations in Indian Enterprise, Galgotia
Publishing Company.
8. Druckman D. Intuition or Counterintuition? The Science behind the Art of Negotiation‟,
Negotiation Journal, October, pp. 431 - 446.
9. Ury, W.L., J. M. Brett and S. B. Goldberg.Three Approaches to Resolving Disputes: Interests,
Rights and Power‟, in Getting Disputes Resolved: Designing Systems to Cut the Cost of Conflict,
San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, (November).
10. Anstey, M., Distributive and Positional Bargaining‟, in Negotiating Conflict, London: Juta and Co.
Page 30 of 85
11. Hopmann, P. T., Two Paradigms of Negotiation: Bargaining and Problem Solving‟, Annals of the
American Academy of Political and Social Science, vol. 542, pp. 24 - 47.
12. Pruitt, G. D., Strategic Choice in Negotiation‟, American Behavioral Scientist November, vol. 27,
no. 2, pp. 167-194.
13. Holzinger, K. , Negotiations in Public-Policy Making: Exogenous barriers to Successful Dispute
Resolution‟, Journal of Public Policy, vol. 21 (1), pp. 71-96.
14. Osler, F. and M. Hart, Multilateral Negotiations‟ (Chapters 1 and 2), in Multilateral Negotiations:
Lessons from Arms Control, Trade and the Environment. Baltimore: John Hopkins University
Press, pp. 4-52.
15. Susskind, Lawrence E., et al. (2003) “Multistakeholder Dialogue at the Global Scale”. International
Negotiation, vol. 8, no. 2, pp. 235-266.
16. Antal, Ariane Berthoin & Victor Friedman. (2003) , Negotiating Reality as An Approach to
Intercultural Competence‟, Discussion Paper SP III 2003-101, Wissenschaftszentrum Berlin für
Sozialforschung.
17. Kleiboer, M. (1997) Four Realities of International Mediator, in The Multiple Realities of
International Mediation.
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Intergroup Relations and Conflicts:
Overview, History of negotiations, Common elements of

1 negotiations, Nature of conflict in organisations, Changing view of 5 10
conflict, Types of Conflicts in organisations- Interpersonal,
intrapersonal, Intergroup, Inter-organisational.
Negotiations:
Negotiation - Definition, Nature of Negotiation, Efficient and

Effective Negotiators, Distributive Negotiation, Integrate
negotiation – The Harvard Method, Obstacles in negotiation,
international negotiation, cross cultural negotiation, rationality
and cognition, multi party negotiation, negotiation strategies;
Third party negotiation;
2 10 25
Multilateral and Coalition Negotiations - Epistemic communities,
ratification, constituencies, multi-stakeholder frameworks;
Problem-Solving Negotiations - Interests, assumptions and

perceptions, alternatives, options development BATNA / WATNA,
Circle Chart analysis; Issues in Negotiation - Gender, Culture and
other factors.
Page 31 of 85
Interest based Negotiations - Active listening, communication
skills, interest assessment, body language, information flow, and
needs assessment.
Collective Bargaining and Distributive Bargaining:
Causes of Industrial Disputes, their Settlement & Prevention

Mechanism, Formulas, types of agreements, and role of legal
advisors; Role of Tripartism, Current Trends in Collective
Bargaining, Industrial Democracy and Industrial Peace, Collective
bargaining: Concept, Nature, functions and Types of; Collective
3 10 20
bargaining in the Indian context; Negotiating a collective
bargaining agreement;
Distributive Bargaining - Concessions, bargaining range,

resistance point, tactics, games, avoiding, yielding, contending,
problem-solving;
Conflict and Disputes Resolution:
Conflicts; Conflict management - Conflict Management Strategies,

4 (a) Improving group, organizational or team dynamics when conflict 6 15
occurs– Collaborating, Compromising, Accommodating,
Competing, Avoiding, Johari window

Industrial Relations Machinery in India; Provisions under the
Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, Authorities under the Act,
4 (b) Reference of disputes to boards, courts or Tribunals, Procedures, 7 15
Methods of industrial disputes resolution; Forms of industrial
conflicts; Labour turnover; workplace practices and cooperation.
Trends in industrial conflict:
5 Dynamics of conflict and collaboration; Nature, causes and types 7 15

of industrial disputes, handling interest and rights disputes,
Statutory and Non-statutory.
Final Examination
Page 32 of 85
Introduction
HR-T5-11 HRM – Policy & Strategy 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The primary objective of this elective is about both the design and execution of human resource
management strategies. This course make students to think systematically and strategically about aspects of
managing the organization's human assets, and teaches what needs to be done to implement these policies
and to achieve competitive advantage.
Syllabus
The implementation of strategy and alignment of human resource practices required to make the strategy
work. Key HR levers available to managers in the development of an effective work system, including
competency maps, investing in people (training and development), participation and involvement (team-
based systems), measurement and information sharing.
Expected Outcome

1. Understand the relationship between human resource management strategy and organisational
performance
2. Evaluate the impact of human resource management strategies, concepts and values upon the
organisation’s success
3. Understand a range of human resource management activities (e.g. HRM structures, policies,
policy formulation, competency models in HR)
References
1. Phillips, J.M: Strategic Staffing. Pearson.

2. Phillips, J.M. and Gully, S.M: Strategic Staffing. Pearson
3. James N. Baron and David M. Kreps: Strategic Human Resources – Frameworks for General
Managers, Wiley.
4. Scott Snell, George Bohlander and Veena Vohra: Human Resources Management – A South Asian
Perspective, Cengage Learning.
5. Merchant, A. K. & Van der Stede, W. A., Management Control Systems: Performance
Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, Financial Times/ Prentice Hall.
6. Tanuja Agarwala: Strategic Human Resource Management, Oxford.
7. Charles R Greer: Strategic Human Resource Management – A General Managerial Approach,
Pearson Education.
8. C. Appa Rao: Strategic Human Resource Management, Dreamtech Press.
9. Lipe, M. G. & Salterio, S., A note on the Judgmental Effects of the Balanced Scorecard´s
Page 33 of 85
Information Organization, Accounting, Organization and Society 27, 2002, 531 – 540.
http://www2.nkfust.edu.tw/~percy/Report19/judgmental_effects_of_BSC_information_organizatio
n.pdf
10. Five Levers of Effective Change in HR, http://www.bsherman.net/change.htm
11. Taking HR to Next Level, Deloitte
http://public.deloitte.com/media/0524/us_bnet_takinghrnextlevel_Feb08.pdf
COURSE PLAN
% of
Hours
Marks in
Units Topics Allott
Trimester
ed
Exam
Business Strategy and HR Strategy Concepts:
Understanding of strategic management concepts – strategy development
process, peculiarities of global strategic management, organizational and
HRM strategies, formulation of alternative business unit level strategies,
1 collaborative strategies, Strategic planning & HR planning steps, MNC’s 6 10
business strategies and HRM strategies; Paradigm Shifts (post recession)
– Shifts in global business, shifts in HRM, shifts in industrial relations;
downsizing and rightsizing.
Strategic Human Resources Management:
Concept of SHRM-objectives, scope, functions; Strategic role of SHRM;
2 (a) Difference between traditional HRM and SHRM; Essential elements of 8 25
SHRM; Approaches to SHRM; Strategic fit; Strategic HRM Models; HRM
structures and Policy – HR Policy formulation in alignment with Business
Strategy;
Strategic Staffing -Business and Staffing Strategies, Legal Context of

Staffing Strategic, Identifying Recruits, Recruiting, Assessing External
2 (b) Candidates Assessing Internal Candidates, Choosing and Hiring Candidates, 6 10
Managing Workforce Flow, Staffing System Evaluation and Technology;
Outsourcing
Competency based HRM:
Types of competencies, coverage and content of competency framework,
competency models used to enhance HRM system, developing a 8
3 20
competency model, validating competency models, integrating competency
models into HRM systems,; Competency Assessment Centre (CAC) –
establishing CAC, communicating and implementing competency models.
Strategic Performance Management (PM)and reward practices:
PM system - characteristics of an ideal PM system; six-step performance
4 management process, linkage of PM systems to the strategic planning 12 25
process of an organization; performance and approaches to the
measurement of performance, performance dimensions, discuss the
Page 34 of 85
behaviour, results, and traits approaches to measuring performance;
measuring results vs. behaviours; comparative systems vs. absolute
systems; recording of performance information is gathered; various forms
and characteristics of performance appraisal documents; 360 degree
feedback systems; prevention of rating distortion through Rater training;
appeals process;
HR Information Management System (HRIMS):
HRIMS – need, benefits, types of HRIMS data; productive HRIMS;
5 calculation of turnover, computing the turnover rate, computing 5 10
absenteeism rates, costs of absenteeism.
Final Examination
Page 35 of 85
Introduction
HR-T5-12 Global Human Resources 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
Global HRM deals with all aspects of HR in the worldwide context. This course is a unique blend of
theories and practices in Global HR and would help students to become familiar with the core aspects of
Global Human Resources, its applications, core differences in different regions in handling human capital.
Syllabus
HR in different geographies, HR models, HR Planning, Talent sourcing and Talent Management, employee
and labor relations, managing risks in HR and ethical issues in Global HR from a global perspective.
Expected Outcome

1. Understand issues, opportunities and challenges pertaining to Global HRM;
2. Understand the standards and practices of HRM in various international contexts, especially in
areas such as HR Planning, Talent Sourcing and Talent Management, employee and labor
relations, managing risks and ethical issues involved
3. Develop generic and transferable skills-especially in diagnosing Global HRM issues critically
and analytically, conducting research for the purpose of discussing specific cases relating to
Global HRM.
References
1. James N. Baron and David M. Kreps: Strategic Human Resources – Frameworks for General
Managers, Wiley.
2. Scott Snell, George Bohlander and Veena Vohra: Human Resources Management – A South
Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning.
3. R.S Dwivedi: A Textbook of Human Resource Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
4. Varma Budhwar: Managing Human Resources in Asia-Pacific, T&F.
5. K. Aswathappa, International Business, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited
6. P. SubbaRao: International Human Resources Management, Himalaya Publishing House.
7. Vikas Banger: Human Resource Management Global Trends and Essence, Enkay Publishing
House.
8. Scullion Collings: Specifications of Global Talent Management, Routledge.
9. Hayton Biron: Global Human Resource Management Casebook, Routledge.
10. The Fair Labor Standards Act Of 1938, As Amended,
http://www.dol.gov/whd/regs/statutes/fairlaborstandact.pdf
11. FMLA, https://www.dol.gov/general/topic/benefits-leave/fmla
12. OSHA, https://www.osha.gov/
Page 36 of 85
13. COBRA, https://www.dol.gov/general/topic/health-plans/cobra
14. HIPPA, http://www.hhs.gov/hipaa/
15. ERISA, https://www.dol.gov/general/topic/health-plans/erisa
16. Labor Laws in GCC Countries, https://www.gulftalent.com/resources/labour-laws
17. Types of Work Visas in US, http://chennai.usconsulate.gov/types_of_visas.html
18. The Right Way to Manage Expats: https://hbr.org/1999/03/the-right-way-to-manage-expats
Page 37 of 85
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Global HRM models and HR in different Geographies:
Poole’s adaptation of the Harvard model- the Brewster and Bournois
1 model of International HRM; HR practices and standards in SAARC 6 15
nations, Gulf Cooperation Council Countries, BRIC Nations, ASEAN;
International Labor Organization.
HR Planning, Talent Sourcing and Talent Management – Global
Perspective:
Role and need for HR Planning - Objectives, Planning Process,
Forecasting HR requirements, impact of economic and market factors;
Talent Sourcing - Concept, definition, recruitment, reference checking,
negligent hiring, recruiting for diversity, selection, staffing metrics and
2 12 25
yield ratios, organization entry (induction), socialization and on-
boarding; Talent management – Concept, definition, process, being an
Employer of Choice, Attraction and Retention Strategies, Rewarding,
Succession Planning strategy, career development as a retention tool,
Talent Audits, International Labor Markets (ILM), Critiques of ILMs,
Diffusion of ILMs, Five Factors; Expatriate Management
Employee and Labor Relations – Global Perspective:
Employee relations, employment policies and practices, discrimination,
affirmative action and equal employment opportunity, Diversity in the
workforce, Managing a multigenerational workforce, Resolving disputes
and complaints; Understanding of selected laws and acts governing 1
3 employment relationships in US – Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 2 25
(FLSA), Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993 (FMLA), Occupational
Safety and Health of 1970 (OSHA), Consolidated Omnibus Budget
Reconciliation Act (COBRA), Health Insurance Portability and
Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPPA) and Employee Retirement Income
Security Act of 1974 (ERISA)
Downsizing:
Reasons for downsizing, effects of downsizing; how to downsize –
4 Process consideration, Massacre or drip-drip-drip, broad and targeted
6 15
layoffs; factors to be considered while downsizing (experience, seniority,
age, skill); documenting and rationalizing layoff decision; dealing with
community after downsizing.
Second Internal Examination Page 38 of 85
Managing Risks in Human Resources – Global Perspective:
Legal compliance, ensuring sound employment practices, safety and
security of employees, monitoring, surveillance and privacy concerns,
Managing inspections, disaster preparation, business continuity and
5 recovery planning, handling catastrophic events, managing strikes and 9 20
boycotts, prevention of workplace violence, sexual harassments;
Protection from retaliation, illegal harassment (expat and locals); HR
audit; HR Data security, maintaining appropriate and required HR
records in different countries.
Final Examination
Page 39 of 85
Introduction
MKT-T5-7 International Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
As the world is becoming flatter, it is imperative that all management students prepare themselves
for the different challenges that the globalized world is going through at them. This course intends
to prepare the students with several international marketing theories and practices.
Syllabus
International Marketing and International Marketing Environment. International Market Entry

Strategies. International Marketing, Research International Product Policy and Planning,
International Promotional Strategies, Foreign Markets and Export Marketing Process, Export
Marketing Documentation
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with the framework of
international Marketing Management, different factors influencing international marketing,
different entry strategies for an international marketing.
References
1. Francis Cherunilam, International Marketing (Text and Cases), Himalaya Publishing House, 2015
2. Keiefer Lee and Steve Carter, Global Marketing Management, Oxford University Press, 2012
3. Svend Hollensen, Global Marketing, Pearson Education, 2009
4. Rakesh Mohan Joshi, International Marketing, Oxford University Press India, 2014
5. Daniels, Globalization and Business, Prentice-Hall India,2002
6. Sak Onkvisit, John J. Shaw, International Marketing Analysis and Strategy, Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
7. Isobel Doole and Robin Lowe, International Marketing Strategy, Cengage Learning EMEA, 2012
8. Subhash C. Jain, International Marketing, South-Western, 2001.
9. Warren J Keegan, Global Marketing Management, Pearson Education, 2010.
10. Philip R.Cateora, Mary C Gilly, and John L.Graham, International Marketing, McGraw Hill
Education India Private Limited, 2014
11. Masaaki Kotabe and Kristiaan Helsen, Global Marketing Management, John Willey & Sons Inc,
2014
Page 40 of 85
% of
Hours
Marks in
Units Topics Allott
Trimester
ed
Exam
International Marketing: Scope of International Marketing, International
Marketing vs. Domestic Marketing, Principles of International Marketing,
Customer value and the value equation, Competitive or differential
advantage, Management Orientations, MNCs and TNCs, Benefits of
1 international marketing. 9 15
International Marketing Environment: Introduction, Political
Environment, Political systems, legal and Regulatory Environment, Socio-
cultural Environment, Economic Environment, Technological
Environment, Challenges in Global Marketing.
International Market Entry Strategies Introduction, Different Entry Modes
and Market Entry Strategies, joint Ventures, Strategic Alliances, Direct
Investment, Manufacturing and Franchising.
2 9 15
International Marketing Research: Approaches to Marketing Research,
Scope of International Marketing Research, International Marketing
Research Process, market surveys, marketing information system.
International Product Policy and Planning : Products for International
Markets, International Product Life-Cycle, the new Product Development,
International Product Planning, Product Adoption and Standardization,
3 Pricing for International Products ,International Market Segmentation, 9 20
Influences on Marketing Plan and Budget, International Product
Marketing, Marketing of Services.
International Promotional Strategies: Communications Process, principles

4 of communication, Status of Promotion, Promotion Appeals, Media 9 20
Selection, Personal Selling, Public Relations and Publicity, Sales
Promotion, advertising, e-marketing.
Foreign Markets and Export Marketing Process Choosing appropriate
mode of operations, Issues Related to Exports, processing an Export
Order, Entering into export contract, Export Pricing and Costing, Export-
Import (EXIM) Policy, 2015-2020.
5 9 30
Export Marketing Documentation: Significance of export documentation,
the statutory control, declaration forms, disposal of export documentation
form, major document
Final Examination
Page 41 of 85
Introduction
MKT-T5-8 Brand Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course intends to create awareness amongst the students to appreciate the use of branding as a key
differentiator. This course is designed in such a way that students get familiarized with the different contemporary
branding theories and practices. The latest challenges in branding brought in by the proliferation of Internet and
Social Media are also discussed in the course.
Syllabus
Branding concepts ,Brand strategy decisions, Brand personality, Measuring brand equity, Planning &
Implementing Brand Marketing Programs, Measuring & Interpreting Brand Performance, Borderless branding.
Expected Outcome
The students upon completing the course shall get equipped themselves with the latest paradigms of branding
practices. They are expected to understand the branding concept, strategic branding and branding personality.
Also, to garner enough learning to strategically design a branding plan for a product.
References
1. Kevin Lane Keller, Ambi M.G. Parameswaran and Issac Jacob, Strategic Brand Management: Building,
Measuring and Managing Brand Equity, Pearson Education, 2015
2. David A Aaker, Brand Relevance: Making Competitors Irrelevant, John Wiley & Sons, 2011
3. David A. Aaker, Managing Brand Equity: Capitalizing on the Value of a Brand Name, Free Press, 1991.
4. David A Aaker, Building Strong Brands, Simon & Schuster, 2010
5. David A Aaker and Erich Joachimsthaler, Brand Leadership. Simon & Schuster, 2009
6. Kapferer, Jean- Noel, The New Strategic Brand Management: Advanced Insights and Strategic Thinking (New
Strategic Brand Management: Creating & Sustaining Brand Equity), Kogan Page, 2012
7. Berthon. P et al (2011). Brand worlds: from articulation to integration, Journal of Advertising Research, 182-
194.
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/237011456_Brand_Worlds_From_Articulation_to_Integration
8. Subroto Sengupta, Brand Positioning: Strategies for Competitive Advantage, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005
9. Customer-Based Brand Equity: A Literature Review, Journal of Arts Science & Commerce, 2011
http://www.researchersworld.com/vol2/PAPER_04.pdf
10. Chaudhuri. A., & Holbrook. M.B. (2001). The Chain of Effects From Brand Trust and Brand Affect to Brand
Performance: The Role of Brand Loyalty. Journal of Marketing, 65(2).
https://www0.gsb.columbia.edu/mygsb/faculty/research/pubfiles/593/The_Chain_of_Effects.pdf
11. Keller, K. & Lehmann, D.R. (2006). Brands and Branding Research: Research Findings and Future Priorities,
Marketing Science, 25(6), 740–59.
http://bear.warrington.ufl.edu/CENTERS/MKS/invited/BRANDS%20AND%20BRANDING.pdf
12. Brodie.R.J & Chernatony, L.D,(2009). Towards New Conceptualizations of Branding: Theories of the Middle
Range. Marketing Theory, 9(1), 95-100. http://mtq.sagepub.com/content/9/1/95.short
Page 42 of 85
% of Marks
Hours
Units Topics in Trimester
Allotted
Exam
Branding: Brand equity, Brand value, Brand awareness and Brand

1 loyalty, Brand identity system – identity perspectives, identity traps, 9 15
identity structure, providing value proposition; Managing multiple
brand identities – Brand identity planning model
Brand strategy decisions : Brand architecture – brand portfolio,

portfolio roles, portfolio graphics, portfolio structure and product-
market context roles, Brand architecture audit, Managing Brand
2 Systems – objectives, brand hierarchies, brand roles, Brand 9 15
leveraging – line extension, vertical brand stretch, co-branding and
brand extension – horizontal and vertical brand extensions; Brand
Systems Audit
Brand personality: Creating brand personality – drivers of brand

personality – measuring brand personality using brand personality
scale (BPS), Creating equity through personality - self-expression 9
3 20
model, relationship basis model and functional benefit
representational model, Brand associations – measurement of brand
associations, scaling brand perceptions; selecting, creating and
maintaining associations, Brand revitalizing.
Measuring brand equity: Measures – The Brand Equity Ten, Brand

value based upon future earnings.
4 Planning & Implementing Brand Marketing Programs: Criteria for 9 20

Choosing Brand Elements, Options & tactics for Brand Elements,
Use of Integrated Marketing Communication for Brand Building,
Leveraging Secondary Brand Associations to Brand building.
Measuring & Interpreting Brand Performance: Developing A Brand

Equity Measurement & Management System, Measuring Sources of
Brand Equity & Outcome of Brand Equity.
5 9 30
Borderless branding : Brand building on the web, e-branding, online
vs. offline brand building Global branding strategies – global brand
planning process, creating cross-country synergy
Final Examination
Page 43 of 85
Introduction
MKT-T5-9 Retail Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to make aware the students the different nuances of retailing and the
strategies involved in managing its strategies. The course also intends to ensure that the students
understand that the retailing concept is foundation of a successful business with an emphasis on
total retail experience, customer service, and relationship retailing.
Syllabus
Retailing in India: Evolution of Retailing in India, Choosing a Store Location: Trading- Area
Analysis, Merchandise Management and Pricing, Merchandising Philosophy, Buying organization
format and process
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students develop an understanding on different retail management
paradigms including the retail lifecycle, wheel of retailing, retail buying behavior, store
management and merchandise planning.
References
1. Barry Berman, Joel Evans and Mini Mathur, Retail Management: A Strategic Approach,11th Edition,
Pearson
2. Swapna Pradhan, Retail Management: Text and Cases,4th Edition McGraw Hill
3. Bajaj, Tuli and Srivastava, Retail Management, New Delhi: Oxford University Press
4. Gibson G. Vedamani, Retail Management, Mumbai: Jaico Publishing House
5. Lewison, D. M. and Delozier, W. M., Retailing, Columbus: Merrill Publishing Co
1. Dunne Patrick M., Lusch Robert F, Griffith David A, (2002) Retailing, 4th Ed, Thomson South
Western
2. Levy Michael, Weitz Barton A. (2001) Retailing Management, 5th Ed, McGraw-Hill Irwin
3. Sinha Piyush Kumar and Uniyal Dwarika, (2005) Retail Management - An Asian Perspective,
Thomson Learning, Singapore.
4. Gerasimos Marketos, Evangelos E. Kotsifakos and Yannis Theodoridis, Rethinking Decision Making:
Measuring and Managing Performance, http://infolab.cs.unipi.gr/pubs/confs/NTmarketing07.pdf
5. Types of Retail Locations, http://retail.about.com/od/location/a/retail_location.htm
6. Retail Location Strategies, http://www.ccim.com/cire-magazine/articles/retail-location-strategies
7. Ethical and Legal Issues in Retailing,
http://www.icmrindia.org/courseware/Retail%20Management/Ethical-Legal%20Issues-Retailing.htm
8. Competitive Advantages and Strategic Information Systems,
http://ccsenet.org/journal/index.php/ijbm/article/download/6631/5247
Page 44 of 85
% of Marks
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Retail Management: Rise of the retailer, Growth of global retail market,
Challenges Faced by Retailers World Wide; Theories of Retail
1 Development: Evolution of Retail Formats, Theories of Retail 9 15
Development, Lifecycle in Retail, Understanding Retail Formats, Non-store
and Non-Traditional Retail Formats, Service Retail.
Retailing in India: Evolution of Retail in India, Traditional business models

in Indian Retail, Drivers of Retail Change in India, Size of Retail in India,
2 Key sectors in Indian Retail, Foreign Direct Investment in Indian Retail, 9 25
Rural Retailing in India. Strategic Planning in Retailing: Situational
Analysis, Objectives, Identification of Consumer Characteristics and Needs,
Overall Strategy, Control & Feedback
Retail Institution by Ownership: Independent, Chain, Franchising, Leased
Department, Vertical Marketing System, Consumer Cooperative, Horizontal
Marketing System. Retail Institution by Store-Based Strategy Mix: The
Wheel of Retailing, Scrambled Merchandising, The Retail Life Cycle. Web,
9
3 Non-Store Based, and other Forms of Traditional Retailing: Direct 25
Marketing, Direct Selling, Vending Machines, E-Retailing, Other Non-
Traditional Forms of Retailing. Targeting Consumers and Gathering
Information – Identifying and Understanding Consumers, Consumer needs
and desires, Shopping Attitudes and Behaviour
Choosing a Store Location: Trading- Area Analysis, Characteristics of
Trading Area; Site Selection – Types of Location, Location and Site
Evaluation; Store design objectives, Store design elements, Visual
merchandising, Creating an appealing store atmosphere, Strategic advantage
4 9 20
through customer service, Customer service quality, Service recovery
Store Management: Retail Business –HRM in Retail Organization,
Financial Management in Retailing-Profit Planning, Asset Management and
Budgeting, , Compensating and rewarding store employees,
Merchandise Management and Pricing: Merchandising Philosophy, Buying
organization format and process, Devising Merchandising Plans, Category
Management, Implementing Merchandise Plans, Logistics, Inventory
5 9 15
Management, External Factors Affecting Retail Price Strategy, Developing a
Retail Price Strategy. Promotional Strategy: Elements of Retail Promotional
Mix, Planning a Retail Promotional Mix
Final Examination
Page 45 of 85
Introduction
MKT-T5-10 Social Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course is based on the use of marketing principles to develop social marketing strategies and
programs and to bring behavioral change for a social good. Social marketing can be used to promote merit
goods, or to make a society to avoid demerit goods and thus promoting well-being of society. The course
will also examine issues of social responsibility in business and how marketing may be used to promote
more environmentally and socially conscious business practices.
Syllabus
Social Marketing and the public health context of social marketing, Analyzing the Social Marketing
Environment and Selecting target audiences, objectives and goal, identifying barriers, benefit and the
competition, Developing Social Marketing Strategies and 4Ps, Managing Social Marketing Programs and
Application of Social Marketing concepts - Live Project or case study analysis.
Expected Outcome
1. Define social marketing and understand the concepts of behaviour change for social good.
2. Analyse the social marketing environment
3. Distinguish marketing approaches to public health from other theories and models
4. Apply advanced techniques for developing social marketing programs.
5. Develop price, promotion and place strategies for a chosen social marketing issue.
6. Understand the critical points for effectively managing the development, implementation and evaluation
of social marketing projects.
Page 46 of 85
References
1. Nancy R Lee, Social Marketing: Influencing Behaviors for Good, Sage Publications, 2012
2. Kotler, P., Roberto, N & Lee, N, Social marketing: Improving the quality of life, SAGE
Publications, Inc, 2002
3. Alan R. Andreasen, Social marketing in the 21st century, SAGE Publications, Inc, 2005
4. Reis, A. & Trout, J., Positioning – The battle for your mind: How to be seen and heard in an
overcrowded marketplace, Kindle Edition, Business Book Summaries, 2014
5. Neumeier, M., The brand gap: How to bridge the distance between business strategy and design,
New Riders, 2003
6. Sameer Deshpande, Social Marketing in India, SAGE Response, 2013
7. Craig Lefebvre , On Social Marketing and Social Change, http://socialmarketing.blogs.com
8. R. Craig Lefebvre & June A. Flora, Social marketing and public health intervention, Health
Education Quarterly 1988;15:299–315;
http://socialmarketing.blogs.com/Publications/Social_Marketing_and_Public_Health_Intervention.
pdf
9. Sue Peattie & Ken Peattie , Ready to fly solo? Reducing social marketing’s dependence on
commercial marketing theory, Marketing Theory, 2003,
http://mtq.sagepub.com/content/3/3/365.full.pdf+html
10. Glenane-Antoniadis, A, Whitwell, G, Bell, SJ & Menguc, B, Extending the vision of social
marketing through social capital theory: Marketing in the context of intricate exchange and market
failure, Marketing Theory 2003 3:323-343, http://mtq.sagepub.com/content/3/3/323.full.pdf+html
11. Kirby, Freimuth, Taylor and Parvanta. (2001). Identity Building and Branding at CDC: A Case
Study, Social Marketing Quarterly. 7 2, pp. 16–35,
http://smq.sagepub.com/content/7/2/16.full.pdf+html
12. Youtube video: What Inspires Behavior Change, by Vic Strecher,
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bxMGuGUROiA
% of Marks
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Social Marketing and the public health context of social marketing
Social Marketing – Social Marketing in India, US and Africa; The social

marketing process; Social marketing compared to other behavior
change approaches, such as education and law; Ethical issues in social
marketing;
1 9 20
Marketing Public Health Basics - history and basic concepts of social
marketing, Role of Marketing it public health to do carry out its core
services;
Public Health in a Market Culture and in the Social Environment -

Social and cultural factors that influence public health; Criticisms of the
public health social justice/social change agenda; Challenges facing
Page 47 of 85
public health marketing in developed and under developed countries.
Determining Research Needs and Options – Major Research
terminology, steps in developing a research plan; Situation Analysis –
2(a) 6 10
describe the background, purpose and focus of your plan, conduct a
situation analysis; ethical consideration.
Select target audiences; steps involved in selecting target audiences;
variables used to segment markets; criteria for evaluating segments;
2(b) how target audiences are selected; Ethical considerations in - selecting 6 10
target audiences; setting objectives and target goals; identifying target
audience barriers; benefits, the competition, and influencing others.
Developing Social Marketing Strategies and 4Ps
Crafting a desired Positioning – positioning statement, behaviour-

focused positioning, barriers-focused positioning, benefits-
repositioning, positioning related to developing a positioning statement;
3 9 20
Social Marketing Ps: Product – creating a product platform; Price –
determining monetary and nonmonetary incentives and disincentives;
Place – making access convenient and pleasant; Promotion – deciding on
messages, messengers, and creative strategies; selecting communication
channels.
Managing Social Marketing Programs
Monitoring and Evaluation – developing a plan to monitor and

evaluation; Measurement –what, how, when, and its cost; Ethical
considerations in evaluation planning; establish budgets and funding
sources, additional sources, justification for budget, fund-raising, crowd
4 sourcing, revising plan; Ethical considerations when establishing 9 20
funding;
Implementation and sustaining behaviour – Implementation plan,

Phasing, sustainability; Ethical considerations when implementing
plans.
Application of Social Marketing(it can be a live project or in-depth

analysis of a case study by students with guidance from the faculty)
Social Marketing Project - Background & Purpose; Situation Analysis,

5 Importance of accurately defining the problem, Formative research, 6 20
Understanding and insight, selecting target audience, objectives, goals,
setting behaviour objectives and goals, identifying barriers, benefits, the
competition and influential others, social marketing strategies, defining
4Ps, Plan for monitoring and evaluation, and implementation plan.
Final Examination
Page 48 of 85
Introduction
MKT-T5-11 Customer Relationship 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The purpose of this course is to prepare students to deal with these changes in the corporation and
the global market. It explores a variety of factors and actions that drive successful partnering
relationships and in turn lead to higher customer satisfaction, market share and net cash flow. The
focal issues of the course are explored in a multi-pronged manner.
Syllabus
Enterprise Marketing Automation (EMA),Introduction to CRM, Call Center, Introduction to Application

Service Provider (ASP),Implementing CRM, Impact of CRM on Marketing Channels, CRM Tools
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students shall understand the strategic and analytical aspects of CRM
which has a deeper understanding of the power of CRM, and how to put it to work effectively.
References
1. Paul Greenberg, CRM at the speed of light, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited,
2010
2. V Kumar, Werner J Reinartz, Customer Relationship Management, A Databased Approach,
Wiley India Private Limited, 2006
3. Kristin L Anderson and Carol Kerr, Customer Relationship Management, McGraw-Hill
Professional, 2006
4. Rai. AK, Customer Relationship Management: Concepts and Cases, PHI Learning Privat,
Limited, India, 2012
5. Francis Buttle, Customer Relationship Management: Concepts and Technologies,
Butterworth-Heinemann Title, August 2008.
6. Jagdish Seth, Atul Parvatiyar, G Shainesh, Customer Relationship Management- Emerging
Concepts, Tools and Applications, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2000
7. S.Shajahan , Relationship Marketing, Concepts and Cases, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2006
8. Supriya Biswas, Relationship Marketing, Concepts, Theories and Cases, Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt.Ltd, 2014
9. Kaushik Mukerjee , CRM: A Strategic Approach, ICFAI University Press, 2006
10. Kaushik Mukerjee , Customer Focus: the New Imperative: Customer Loyalty and Retention (Vol.
II) (Marketing Series), ICFAI University Press, 2006
Page 49 of 85
Hours % of Marks in
Units Topics Allott Trimester
ed Exam
CRM: CRM technology components, customer life style, customer
interaction. Difference between CRM and eCRM, features of eCRM
1 Sales Force Automations (SFA) barriers to successful SFA 9 15
functionality, technological aspect of SFA, data synchronization,
flexibility and performance, reporting tools.
Enterprise Marketing Automation (EMA): Components of EMA,

marketing campaign, campaign planning and management, business
analytic tools, EMA components (promotions, events loyalty and
retention programs), response management.
2 9 25
Call Center: Customer interaction, the functionality, technological
implementation, ACD (Automatic Call Distribution), IVR
(Interactive Voice Response), CTI (Computer Telephony
Integration), web enabling the call center, automated intelligent call
routing, logging & monitoring.
Implementing CRM : Pre-implementation, kick off meeting,
requirements gathering, prototyping and detailed proposal
9
3 generation, development of customization, Power use beta test and 25
data import, training, roll out and system hand off, ongoing support,
system optimization, follow up.
Introduction to Application Service Provider (ASP) Their role and
function, advantages and disadvantages of implementing ASP.
4 Impact of CRM on Marketing Channels: Traditional distribution 9 20
channel structure supporting customer relationship, emerging
channel trends that impact CRM.
CRM Tools: CRM tools – overall modules – lead management –
5 lead to sales life cycle-Communication methodologies–relationship 9 15
management – complaint handling
Final Examination
Page 50 of 85
Introduction
MKT-T5-12 Digital and Social Media Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to equip the students to transit from a functional role to a management role
that requires more strategic digital and web marketing skills. The course also enables to understand recent
moves in the digital space through Social Media Marketing.
Syllabus
Digital marketing, Marketing in the Digital Era, Digital Marketing Management, Digital Marketing Plan,
Digital Advertising and Promotion, Introduction to Search Engines, search engine optimization, Online
Campaign Management, How online ads work, Business Drivers in the Virtual World-Online Tools for
Marketing, Introduction to social media, Benefits of social media, Face book strategy-Twitter
Management, The Future of Marketing Gamification, Apps and Social Media Marketing.
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course the students shall understand how firms use the Internet to provide and
communicate value to consumers through digital platforms and how firms use analytics and social media
to make data-driven decisions for Internet marketing. It helps how to measure and assess the effectiveness
of social media for marketing purposes.
References
1. Vandana Ahuja. Digital Marketing. Oxford University Press India, 2015
2. Dave Evans. Social Media Marketing: An Hour a Day Serious skills (2nd Edition). John Wiley &
Sons, 2012.
3. Jan Zimmerman and Deborah Ng. Social Media Marketing : All-in-One For Dummies(3rd
Edition).John Wiley & Sons, 2015
4. Joe Teixeira. Your Google Game Plan for Success: Increasing Your Web Presence with Google
AdWords, Analytics and Website Optimizer. John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
5. Damian Ryan. Understanding Digital Marketing: Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital
Generation (3rd Edition). Kogan Page Publishers, 2014.
6. Alan Charlesworth. Digital Marketing: A Practical Approach (2nd Edition). Routledge, 2014.
7. Judy Strauss and Raymond Frost. E-marketing (5th Edition 5). Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.
8. Dave Chaffey and PR Smith. E-marketing Excellence: Planning and Optimizing your Digital
Marketing (4th Edition). Routledge, 2013.
9. Matthew A. Russell and Matthew Russell. Mining the Social Web: Analyzing Data from Facebook,
Twitter, LinkedIn, and Other Social Media Sites. O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2011.
Page 51 of 85
% of
Hours marks
Unit Topics
allotted in end-sem
Exam.
I Digital marketing for the 21st century, Importance and scope of digital 9 25
marketing; Marketing in the Digital Era: E-marketing, The Online
Marketing Mix, The Online Consumer, Customer Relationship Management
in a Web 2.0 World Digital Marketing Management : Role of web
marketing manager, Web marketing department structure, Roles and
responsibilities, Job description, Targets, goals. Digital Marketing Plan:
Goals, objectives, KPI‘s, Market research, Value creation process. Strategic
web marketing plan, Budgeting, Channel.
II Digital Advertising and Promotion: Introduction to Search Engines: Google 8 20
guidelines, Best Practices, Quality guidelines, Design guidelines; Search
engine page results – familiarizing Google results., search engine
marketing, paid search advertising, search engine optimization, display
advertising, and landing page optimization. How Google works: Search
engine ranking methods, Techniques to get on top of Google, Meta tags best
practices Online Campaign Management, Consumer Segmentation,
Targeting, and Positioning using Online Tools, Market Influence Analytics
in a Digital Ecosytem
III Online Ads – How online ads work : Interactive ads, Creative ads, Google 8 20
Ad words, Online ad methods, Types of online advertisements, Face book
ads, LinkedIn ads, Video ads, Text ads, Image ads, Local ads, Content
network ads, Best practices, Campaign set up, Billing, Budget, Segment,
Audience. Effective Ads: Calculating ROI, Budget, How to choose your ad
partner, Blogging for businesses
IV Business Drivers in the Virtual World Social Media, Online Branding, 7 15
Traffic Building, Web Business Models, E-commerce
Online Tools for Marketing: Engagement Marketing through Content
Management, Content Designing, Content development, Optimizing your
ads, A/B testing, Conversion optimization, Landing page creation and
optimization.
V Social Media: Introduction to social media, Examples of social media, Uses 6 10
of social media, How companies use social media. Benefits of social media:
Case studies of social media, SEO for social media, Social media profile
creation and optimization.
VI Face book strategy: Identify goals, Find Influencers, Understand tone 7 15
(listening), Activation. Working of Face book advertisement: The 3 Rs –
Page 52 of 85
Reporting, Results & Reallocation, Measuring ROI in Face book ads,
Insights and Analytics for Facebook, Twitter Management: Twitter for
business, Step by step instructions to Twitter, Key Definitions, You Tube:
You Tube branding, You Tube Ads, Getting started guide. The Future of
Marketing Gamification, Apps and Social Media Marketing
Final Examination
Page 53 of 85
Introduction
OM-T5-7 Healthcare Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course is designed to understand management of key activities in a hospital like front desk operation
and to understand eHealthcare systems and its features. It also helps in knowing more about different lab
certifications and waste management. It is focused on how to establish and sustain global competitiveness
in healthcare services.
Syllabus
Front desk activities in a hospital environment-special skills needed in HR- Characteristic features of
hospital services and its planning-Electronic Healthcare Records Management-Automation of front
desk activities and other features of integrated Hospital Information System- medical records
management- Lab certification- waste disposal-services outsourcing in hospitals-location and layout
decisions- green hospital concept.
Expected Outcome
By completing the course, student should be able to understand and handle the functions at the front
desk in an automated environment. It sheds light on lab certifications to go global for wider
acceptance and standardization. Green Hospital Concept is stressed to save energy and proper waste
management while designing new hospital layouts. Features of Hospital Information Systems and its
benefits also form part of this course.
References
1. G.D.Kunders Designing for Total Quality in Healthcare Prism Books Pvt.Ltd,
Bangalore.
2. Goel, S.L and Kumar 2004. Hospital supportive services Deep and Deep Publications,
New Delhi.
3. NHS Guide to good Practices in Hospital Administration National Health Services,
London.
4. Syed Amin Tabish Hospital and Health Services Administration Jaypee Brothers Medical
Publishers, New Delhi.
5. S.L. Goel, Healthcare Management and Administration, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
6. Srinivasan, A.V. (ed.), Managing a Modern Hospital, Response Books, New Delhi.
7. Liewellyne Davis and H.M. Macacaulay, Hospital Administraton and Planning, JP Brothers, New Delhi,
2001.
8. Arun Kumar (ed) Encyclopedia of Hospital Administration and Development, Anmol Publications, New
Delhi.
Page 54 of 85
COURSE PLAN
Hours % marks in
Unit Topics
Hospital types such as Government, Private, Corporate and
public. Functional areas in hospital services management,
I services offered in hospitals, skills needed in Human capital 8 15
in hospitals, Characteristic features of hospital services and
Principles of hospital planning and execution.
Front office management- outpatient and inpatient
2 admissions and discharge – Admission and discharge 9 20
procedures -Emergency services
Classification of medical records and significance, their
automation using EHR, its maintenance for Medical
statistics, materials records, management of patient records
and personnel records electronically, functionality of
3 9 20
computerized hospital information systems (HIS), merits
and demerits of CHIS, trends in HIS, Legal and other
operational records including Discharge summaries.

Lab classification, managing laboratories, their functions
and management, accreditation of labs NABL, ISO
certification of
laboratory procedure and process. Maintaining hygiene in
4 12 25
hospital environment. Basic and special cleaning, Odour
control- solid, liquid waste disposal, Safety, Pest control,
Interior decoration, outsourcing hospital house keeping
services.
Location decision and layout decision of hospitals, green
hospital concept and designing for low energy consumption,
Department allocation criteria in the building for improved
5 7 20
productivity, Designing easy scale-up, Automated patient
handling and equipment handling systems-e-alert systems
with e-checkin and e-checkout facility.
Final Exam
Page 55 of 85
Introduction
OM-T5-8 Service Operations Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course enlightens to the concepts, principles, problems, and practices of successful service
operations management. Emphasis is focused on preparing students to identify and apply appropriate
management processes to ensure efficient, effective, and quality oriented service operations, while
achieving operational excellence.
Syllabus
Understanding Services economy, Demand and Capacity issues in service systems, Service Inventory and
Supply Chain Management, Service Quality, Service facility, - Live Project or case study analysis.
Expected Outcome
1. To obtain an overview of the successful Service Operations Management (SOM) function

through the introduction of the topics traditionally associated with the study of Service
Operations Management.
2. To develop an understanding of the terminology and responsibilities that relate to Service
Operations Management.
3. To formulate and describe the function of the Service Operations Management discipline in
various sectors.
References
1. B. Fitzsimmons, James A., and Mona J. Fitzsimmons, Service Management: Operations,

Strategy, and Information Technology, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2014
2. Robert Johnston, Service Operations Management, Pearson Education,2007
3. C. Haksever and Render B, Service Management, Student Workbook: An Integrated
Approach to Supply Chain Management and Operations, Financial Times/ Prentice Hall,
2013
4. Richard D Metters, Successful Service Operations Management, Cengage, 2012
5. W. Earl Sasser Jr., Leonard A. Schlesinger and James L. Heskett, The Service Profit Chain,
Free Press, 1997
1. Silei Shan, Analysis of Hospital Pharmacy Inventory Consolidation Decision Using Multi-
Echelon Newsvendor Inventory Model, Proquest, Umi Dissertation Publishing, 2012 William J
Holllins, Managing Service Operations: Design and Implementation, Kindle Edition, SAGE Publications
Ltd, 2006
Page 56 of 85
2. J. Nevan Wright and Peter Race, The Management of Service Operations, Cengage Learning EMEA,
2003
3. Bitran, G. and Lojo, M. (1993), A framework for analysing service operations, European Management
Journal, 11 (3), 271 – 282.
http://dspace.mit.edu/bitstream/handle/1721.1/47924/frameworkforanal00bitr.pdf?sequence=1
4. Nambisan, S. (2001), Why service businesses are not product businesses, MIT Sloan Management
Review, Summer 2001, 72 – 80, http://sloanreview.mit.edu/article/why-service-businesses-are-not-
product-businesses/
5. Sawhney, M., Balasubramanian, S. and Krishnan, V.V. (2004), Creating growth with services, MIT
Sloan Management Review, Winter 2004, 34 – 43.
6. Heskett, J.L. (1991), Lessons in the service sector in The Service Management Course: Cases &
Reading, Free Press, 47 – 64.
http://www.mktgsensei.com/AMAE/Services/Creating%20Growth%20through%20Services.pdf
7. Shah, J. and Murty, L.S. (2005), Compassionate high quality health care at low cost: The Arvind
Model, IIMB Management Review, 16 (3), 31 – 43.
http://www.mktgsensei.com/AMAE/Services/Creating%20Growth%20through%20Services.pdf
8. Schneider, B. and Bowen, D.E., (1999), Understanding customer delight and outrage, Sloan
Management Review, Fall 1999 35 – 45. http://www.customerdelight.nu/content/04-artikelen/02-
artikel-b/delight.schneider.pdf
9. Metters, R. and Vargas, V., (2000), A typology of decoupling strategies in mixed services, Journal of
Operations Management, 18, 663 – 682.
http://www.business.uzh.ch/professorships/som/stu/Teaching/HS09/doc/sem1/MettersVargas2000.
pdf
10. Ravichandran, N, and Bahuguna, D, (2006), Rule bound government agency to customer centric
service facility: Can Indian passport offices make the leap?, IIMB Management Review, 18 (1), 59 –
66. http://www.iimb.ernet.in/publications/review/march2006/government-agency
11. Harrel, C., Ghosh, B.K. and Bowden, R. (2000), Modeling Service Systems, Chapter 13 in Simulation
using PROMODEL, Mc Graw Hill, 321 – 337. http://isss.uni-leipzig.de/index.php/Download-
document/72-paper_bottcher.html
12. Putting the Service-Profit Chain to Work, Heskett, Jones, Loveman, Sasser, Schlesinger, Harvard
Business Review, March-April 1994, 164-174. (94204). https://hbr.org/2008/07/putting-the-service-
profit-chain-to-work
13. M. A. Cohen, N. Agrawal and V. Agrawal, Winning in the Aftermarket, Harvard Business Review, June
2006, pp. 129-138. https://hbr.org/2006/05/winning-in-the-aftermarket
14. Production and Operations Management ebook:
http://dl4a.org/uploads/pdf/Ebook%20for%20PRODUCTION%20AND%20OPERATIONS%20MANAGE
MENT.pdf
Page 57 of 85
COURSE PLAN
% of
Uni
Hours Marks in
Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Understanding Services Economy
Overview and imperatives of Services; Global trends in Services Sector;

Changing paradigms in Competitiveness of services; Services –
Manufacturing Continuum; Recent trends in manufacturing, increased
role of services in manufacturing; Developing an overall vision for the
1 service system; Developing a service strategy; Service Positioning & 9 20
Implications for Service Delivery - Design Degree of customer contact,
divergence, customization; Service blue printing; Service Enhancement
using Internet; Pricing strategies in Services; Performance issues in
service systems; value of self-service in an economy; roles of front-line
employees, customers, operations, and marketing in the service
innovation process.
Demand and Capacity issues in service systems
Capacity demand in services; - Smoothing Customer Demand In Services;

Service Capacity Management; Yield management; Resource and
Workforce Scheduling in Services; Capacity, Capacity build up strategies
2 9 20
Capacity Vs System Performance; Introduction to Queuing System;
Queuing Theory Applications in Service Systems; Characteristics of
Queuing system; Queuing Models; Demand and capacity issues related to
growth, expansion strategies, franchising. Offshore operations; Services
Management in IT/ITES Sectors Capacity Management Issues.
Service Inventory and Supply Chain Management
Service inventory management; Service supply chains; Processes in

Service Supply Chain; Data Envelopment Analysis; Simulation as a 10 20
tool for design of services; Use of simulation software for modelling;
Nature of design issues addressed using simulation; Simulation
Applications in Service System Design; Vehicle Routing and
Scheduling; Inventory Pooling.
Dimensions in Quality, Service Quality Five Gap Model; Kano’s Model;

Measuring Service Quality – SERVQUAL, Walk-through Audit; Service
4 8 20
Recovery – Service Guarantees, Service encounter – triad, service
culture, Service profit chain – Service consolidation; Critical Fractiles:
The Newsvendor Model (Optimal Service Levels).
Page 58 of 85
Process behaviour – environmental dimensions – framework;

Facility design – nature, objectives, process analysis – process
flow diagram, process steps, simulation; Service facility layout;
Service Facility Location – considerations, facility location
techniques – metropolitan metric, Euclidean, centre of gravity,
retail outlet location, location set covering problem; Ford’s
Auto collection concept;
5 9 20
Product Support – Customer Centric strategy, repairable parts
inventory management, Performance based logistics.
Service Improvement – a mini-consulting project. It involves

use of the methodologies introduced in class to analyze a real
life service operations system, diagnose its problems, identify
opportunities for improvement and quantify potential costs,
benefits, risks and service impacts (at a nearby service station
or Car dealership or automobile workshop or the like)
Final Examination
Page 59 of 85
Introduction
OM-T5-9 Technology Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course will expose the students the concept of technology management, nuances and issues in
technology management and the decision making related to technology management. This subject
will also help to acquaint the students with the role of technology and innovation in global
industrial competition with latest trends and developments.
Syllabus
Technology, Technology Management, Technology Life Cycle, Technology Forecasting, Technology
Acquisition, Technology Strategy and Competitiveness, Technology Adoption, Diffusion, and
Absorption, Technology Based Innovation, Human Aspects in Technology Management, Social Issues
in Technology Management.
Expected Outcome
topics in technology and innovation management. The course also provides insights on technical,
human and social aspects of technology management.
References
1. P N Rastogi, Management of Technology and Innovation: Competing Through
Technological Excellence, (Kindle Edition), SAGE Publications, Response Books. 2009
2. Tushman, M.L. and Anderson ,P. Managing Strategic Innovation & Change, New York:
Oxford University Press, 2004.
3. Khurana, V. K., Management of Technology and Innovation, New Delhi: Ane Books, 2012
4. Narayanan, V. K, Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage,
5. Ettile, J. E, Managing Innovation: New technology, New Products and New Services in a
Global Economy, A Butterworth-Heinemann Title, 2006
6. Afuah, A. Innovation Management, Strategies, Implementation and Profits, Oxford
University Press, 2009
Page 60 of 85
COURSE PLAN

Exam
Introduction to Technology Management: Technology
1 and Technology Management- Technology;
Technology management, Evolution and Growth of
Technology, Role and Significance of Technology
Management, Impact of Technology on Society and 6 10
Business- Technology and competition; Key issues in
managing technological innovation, Forms of
Technology- Process technology; Product technology.
Technology Acquisition and Technology

2 Forecasting: Technology Acquisition, Alternatives for
Acquiring New Technologies, New Technology,
Management of Acquired Technology, Measures of
Scale and Mechanisms for Acquiring Technologies-
Economy of scale or Scale economy; Levels of scale; The
measurement of scale; Factors affecting the choice of 7 15
scale, Technology Forecasting: Technology Forecasting-
Characteristics of technology forecasting ; Technology
forecast method; Principles of technology forecasting,
Technology Forecasting Process, Need and Role of
Technology Forecasting, Forecasting Methods and
Techniques, Planning and Forecasting.
Technology Strategy, Technology Adoption, Diffusion and
3 Absorption and Competitiveness: Technology Strategy-
Technology strategy and management; Elements of
technology strategy, Innovation Management,
Competitive Advantage- Components of competitive
advantage; Creating competitive advantage using value
chain, Technology Management Evaluation or
Assessment, Technology Adoption, Diffusion, and
Absorption: Technology Adoption, Technology 10 30
Diffusion- of technology diffusion; Perspectives of
innovation diffusion process, Technology Absorption-
Role of technology absorption; Benefits of technology
absorption; Constraints in technology absorption,
Technology Package and Technological Dependence,
Indian Experience in Technology Absorption Efforts,
Issues Involved in the Management of Technology
Absorption and Government Initiatives.
Page 61 of 85
Technology Generation and Development: Technology
4 Generation- Process; , Technology Development,
Importance of Technology Generation and
Development, Need for Technology Strategy,
Importance of Research and Development (R&D)-
Corporate research and product lifetimes; Production
costs and R&D; Translation of R & D efforts to
technology, Technology Transfer: Transfer of
Technology, Models of Technology Transfer-
15 30
Traditional technology transfer models; Qualitative
technology transfer models, Technology Transfer
Modes, Dimensions of Technology Transfer, Features of
Technology Package, Routes of Technology Transfer,
Technology Assessment: Technology Choice, Technology
Assessment Process, Technology Leadership and
Followership, Technology Concepts- Technology
acquisition; Meaning of innovation and creativity;
Innovation management.
5 Human Aspects in Technology Management: Integration
of People and Technology, Factors Considered in
Technology Management- Organisational factors;
Psychological factors, Organisational Structure and
Technology, Social Issues in Technology
Management: Social Issues, Technological Change and
Industrial Relations- Implementation of rationalization 7 15
and automation in India; Impact of technological
change, Technology Assessment and Environmental
Impact Analysis- Environmental impact analysis
process- Guidelines on the scope of EIA; Issues in
preparation of EIA report; Elements of the
environmental problem.
Final Examination
Page 62 of 85
Introduction
OM-T5-10 Innovation Management and 4-0-0 3 2016

New Product Development
Course Objectives
The main objective is to make the student understand why organizations continually need to innovate
and bring to market products and services that clearly distinguish themselves from the competition.
Students will learn how to offer more features/improved services at lower prices and thereby offering
higher value to specified target markets. It is to make the student know the methodology to develop
and implement a new product or service to already existing or new market.
Syllabus
Innovation function –theories- strategic alliances for innovation-development and testing of new
products-Organization structure for R& D and Technology Transfer.
Expected Outcome
The student should be able to understand innovation and its importance as a strategic initiative in an
organization. Learn the approach for new product development and apply new product development
method to business problems/cases. Student will learn why some new products fail or succeed.
References
1. Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, Pearson
2. Crawford, Merle and Di Benedetto, Anthony. New Products Management. McGraw-
Hill/Irwin.
3. Michael Z Brooke & William Ronald Mills, New Product Development: Innovation in
the Market Place, Jaico Books
4. Ulrich, Karl and Eppinger, Steven (2012). Product Design and Development (5th Edition).
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
5. Bettencourt, Lance (2010) Service Innovation: How to Go from Customer Needs to
Breakthrough Services. McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Page 63 of 85
COURSE PLAN
Hours % marks in
Unit Topics
Innovation function - types of innovation - innovation
I models- framework for management of innovation - 9 20
difference between innovation and invention.
Innovation diffusion theories - Pearson’s uncertainty map -
organizational characteristics that facilitate innovation -
2 organizational structures and innovation - trademarks, 9 20
copyrights, patents and their use in innovation management
- remedy against infringement.
Forging strategic alliances-Technology trajectories-
knowledge base of an organization - degree of
3 9 20
innovativeness - linking between innovation strategy and
business strategy - strategic alliances for knowledge sharing.
Development and testing of new products - Differentiation
between products and services - types of services - new
4 service development models - techniques used in consumer 9 20
testing of new products - models for new product
development.
Organization structures for new product development -
5 evaluating R&D projects - strategic pressures on R&D - 9 20
models of technology transfer.
Final Exam
Page 64 of 85
Introduction
OM-T5-11 Green Logistics and Supply 4-0-0 3 2016

Chain Management
Course Objectives
The aim of this course is to make the students aware of the impacts of business on the environment
and how these can be tackled through green design and green products and by adopting green
practices in supply chain management.
Syllabus
Sustainable Development, Green Logistics, Supply Chain Management, Evolution of Green Supply
Chain Management from Supply Chain Management, Comparison of Traditional and Green Supply
Chains, Green Logistics, Reverse Logistics, Regulatory Requirements.
Expected Outcome
After the successful completion of this course, the students are able to develop an understanding
about Green and sustainable supply chains including Reverse Logistics by learning tools and
techniques required to analyze and design environmentally sustainable supply chain systems and
also critically assess strategic choices related to Green SCM design.
References
1. Vogt, J J; Pienaar, W J; de Wit, P W C, Business Logistics & Management - Theory and

Practice. Oxford University Publications, 2002
2. Gilbert, M. Masters, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, Pearson
Education, 2015
3. Hsiao-Fan Wang, Surendra M. Gupta, Green Supply Chain Management: Product Life
Cycle Approach, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2011
4. Mackenzie Leo Davis and Susan J. Masten, (2008). Principles of Environmental
Engineering and Science, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2013.
5. Charles J. Kibert, Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery, Kindle
edition, NY: Wiley. 2016
6. Stuart Emmet and Vivek Sood, Green Supply Chains: An Action Manifesto, Wiley
International, 2010
Page 65 of 85
COURSE PLAN

Exam
Introduction: Supply Chain Traditional View:
1 Supply chains, sustainability of business and
environment, impacts of business in environment,
Traditional View - Procurement, Warehousing,
Materials Handling – Packaging, Containerization,
7 15
Transportation – Inbound Vs Outbound, Modal
Control – Rail, TL, LTL, Parcel, Customer Service –
Geographic, Product Line Specific, Planning Group –
Facility Location, Network Design.
Supply Chain Modern View: Green Supply Chain

2 Management, Reduction of energy use & renewable
alternatives, Cutting water volumes & countering,
contamination, Reducing, scrubbing or sequestering 10 15
GHGs, Decreasing quantities of waste, 3R – Reducing,
Recycling, Reusing, Packaging Material Reductions,
Reverse Logistics.
Sustainable Development: Bio Diversity,
3 Atmospheric pollution- Global warming and Ozone
Depletion-ODS, El Nino and climate changes, Eco
friendly products, Green movements, Green
philosophy -Environmental Policies, Environmental
8 25
Impact Assessment, Reverse Logistics –Return of
Unsold Goods, Reusable Packaging, Refusal of the
products in the cash on delivery (COD),
Remanufacturing, Waste Management, End of Life
Manufacturing, Warranty Management.
Regulatory Framework: Regulatory requirements
4 of re-manufacturing, take back obligations of
manufacturers, initiatives by the European Union
and the USA, WEEE and RoHS Directives, rules
10 25
related to product return, reverse logistics, life cycle
assessment, and design for environment in the
context of supply chains.
Page 66 of 85
5 Sustainability of supply chains: environmental
concerns and green practices as a supply chain
requirement, Indian initiatives in green practices,
closed-loop supply chain examples in Indian context, 10 20
scope of sustainability in manufacturing by green
practices in India.
Final Examination
Page 67 of 85
Introduction
OM-T5-12 Six Sigma and Total Quality 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to understand the concept and culture of total quality management
and to develop skills to use Statistical Quality Control techniques and other quality tools in solving
quality-related problems. Learn approaches to achieve customer satisfaction at a competitive price
are the core of lean concept.
Syllabus
Fundamentals of Quality and TQM, Quality Philosophies and Practices, Statistical Process Control,
Non-statistical Quality Tools and Techniques, Quality Awards and Certification.
Expected Outcome
After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to understand the Total Quality
Management and Six Sigma practices, able to prepare and analyse quality control techniques for
better decision making.
References
1. Mikel Harry Ph.D, and Richard Schroeder, Six Sigma: The Breakthrough Management
Strategy Revolutionizing the World's Top Corporations, RHUS, 2006.
2. T.M. Kubiak , The Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook, Pearson Education, 2009
3. Dale H. Besterfield Ph.D. P.E., Carol Besterfield-Michna , Glen Besterfield , Mary Besterfield-
Sacre., Total Quality Management, Pearson Education, 2003.
4. Juran, J.M., and Gryna, F.M, Quality Planning and Analysis, McGraw-Hill Higher Education,
1993.
5. Schroeder, R.G., Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, McGraw-Hill
Education (ISE Editions), 1999.
6. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2009. 2010.
7. Thomas Pyzdek, Six Sigma Handbook, McGraw Hill Education India Pvt Ltd., 2015.
8. T.M. Kubiak, The Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook, Pearson Education, 2009
9. R. Panneerselvam and P. Sivasankaran, Quality Management (Kindle Edition), PHI
Learning, 2014
Page 68 of 85
COURSE PLAN

Exam
Introduction : Quality definitions and dimensions;
1 Reliability and maintenance; Quality costs; Quality and
productivity; Quality policies and goals, Six Sigma –
Definition, Key Concepts of Six Sigma –Critical to
Quality, Defect, Process Capability, Variation, Origin of 8 5
Six Sigma, Myths about Six Sigma, Benefits of Six Sigma.
Six Sigma and Quality: Key Elements in Six Sigma-

2 Customers, processes, employees, Organisation-
Leadership, Sponsors, Team Leaders , Methodology -
DMADV Methodology, DFSS Methodology, Project Team
Formation, SIPOC Process Map, Measure Phase, Analyse 10 10
Phase, Improve Phase, Control Phase – Quality Control,
Standardisation, Control Methods and Alternatives,
Technical tools - Critical-to-quality tree, Process Map,
Histogram, Pareto Chart.

Quality Philosophies and Practices: Quality gurus
3 and their contributions; Three major philosophies of
quality management, Strategic QM; TQM and its
building blocks; TQM vs. traditional organizations;
Benefits and obstacles in TQM. Practices leading to
TQM- QCs, QTs, TPM,5S, ZDc, Poka-yoke, QFD, Taguchi’s 8 25
QF. Causes of variation in quality; Acceptance sampling;
Inspection vs. acceptance sampling; Quality indices and
operating characteristic curves; Single and double
sampling plans; Control charts for attributes; Control
charts for variables; Interpretation of control charts.
Non-statistical Quality Tools and Techniques: Seven
4 tools- flowcharts, check sheets, histograms, Pareto
chart, scatter diagram, control chart, cause-and-effect 9 30
diagram; Continuous improvement techniques;
benchmarking process; Six-sigma approach.
Page 69 of 85
5 Quality Awards and Certification: Malcolm Baldrige
award and its criteria, ISO-9000 principles, ISO-9000
series and certification., e-Six Sigma, Division Six Sigma
10 30
Council, Global Six Sigma Council, KANO Analysis,
Leading Six Sigma Training (LSS), Leading Teams
Training (LT).
Final Examination
Page 70 of 85
Introduction
SYS-T5-7 Software Project Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course describes the key aspects of software project and provide introduction to Plan, manage,
execute and evaluate control software projects at each stage of the software development life cycle
(SDLC). The subject also focus on areas like managing software cost and schedule during
development; risk engineering; and continuous process improvement. This course introduces software
engineers aspiring to become software project managers to the responsibilities of these roles.
Syllabus
Introduction to software project management, Project scheduling, Risk Management, Project Life
cycle, Effort and software cost estimations, COCOMO models, Managing people, Monitoring and
control of projects
Expected Outcomes
On completion of the course students will acquire knowledge about managing software projects and
will be able to overcome challenges associated with software projects and finally help them to
successfully lead such projects in today's complex systems environment.
References
1. Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell, “Software Project Management”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2004.
2. Ramesh, Gopalaswamy, "Managing Global Projects", Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
3. Royce, “Software Project Management”, Pearson Education, 1999.
4. Jalote, “Software Project Management in Practice”, Pearson Education, 2002.
Page 71 of 85
Unit Course Plan Hours % of marks
allotted in
Trimester
examination
I INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE PROJECT 8 20
MANAGEMENT- Project Definition –– Activities
covered By Software Project Management –
Requirement Specification- Overview of Project
Planning – Stepwise Project Planning
II ACTIVITY PLANNING- Objectives – Project 7 15
Schedule – Sequencing and Scheduling Activities –
Shortening Project Duration – Activity on Arrow
Networks – Risk Management –Managing Risk
First series examination

III PROJECT LIFE CYCLE AND EFFORT 8 20
ESTIMATION
Software process and Process Models – Choice of
Process models – mental delivery – Rapid
Application development – Agile methods –
Extreme Programming – SCRUM – Managing
interactive processes
IV Basics of Software estimation – Effort and Cost 8 15
estimation techniques COCOMO II A Parametric
Productivity Model – Staffing Pattern.
Second Series Examination

V MANAGING PEOPLE AND ORGANIZING 7 15
TEAMS
Introduction –Working In Groups – Becoming A
Team –Decision Making – Leadership –
Organizational Structures – Stress –Health And
Safety – Case Studies.
VI MONITORING AND CONTROL 7 15
Creating Framework – Collecting The Data –

Visualizing Progress – Cost Monitoring –Getting
Project Back To Target – Change Control –
Managing Contracts
Final Examination
Page 72 of 85
Introduction
SYS-T5-8 Knowledge Management in IT 4-0-0 3 2016

and ITES
Course Objectives
The core objective of the course is to prepare students to become familiar with the current theories,
practices, tools and techniques in knowledge management (KM), and to assist students in pursuing a
career in the information technology or IT enabled sectors.
Syllabus
Overview of Knowledge Management (KM), Managing organizational knowledge, learning and

intellectual capital, the knowledge management core process, Knowledge Management Tools, Application
of Knowledge Management tools in IT & ITES sectors.
Expected Outcomes
1. Define KM, learning organizations, intellectual capital and related terminologies and understand
the role of knowledge management in organizations.
2. Identify and select tools and techniques of KM for the stages of creation, acquisition, transfer and
management of knowledge.
3. Evaluate the impact of technology including telecommunications, networks, and Internet/intranet
role in managing knowledge.
4. Identify KM in specific environments: managerial and decision making communities.
5. Demonstrate an understanding of the importance of intellectual capital to benefit the competitive
advantage in organizations.
References
1. Kai Mertins, Peter Heisig and Jens Vorbeck, Knowledge Management – Concepts and Best
Practices, Springer, 2003
2. Davenport, Thomas and Laurence Prusak. Working Knowledge: How Corporations Manage
What They Know. Boston, Harvard Business School Press. 2000.
3. Kimiz Dalkir, Knowledge Management in Theory and Practice, MIT Press, 2011
4. Edna Pasher and Tuvya Ronen, Knowledge Management in Theory and Practice, John Wiley
& Sons, 2011
5. Dr. Santwana Chaudhuri, Knowledge Management in Indian IT Industries2011 3rd
International Conference on Information and Financial Engineering IPEDR vol.12, IACSIT
Press, Singapore, http://www.ipedr.com/vol12/45-C115.pdf
Page 73 of 85
6. Donald Hislop, Knowledge Management in Organizations: A Critical Introduction, Oxford
7. Elias.M. Award and Hassan M. Ghaziri, Knowledge Management, Pearson Education, 2003
8. Guus Schreiber, Hans Akkermans, Anjo Anjewierden, Robert de Hoog, Nigel
Shadbolt, Walter Van de Velde and Bob Wielinga, Knowledge Engineering and
Management, Universities Press, 2001.
9. Carla O'Dell and Jack Grayson, If Only We Knew What We Know: The Transfer of Internal
Knowledge and Best Practice, Free Press, 2012
10. Philip Rosner, Knowledge isn't POWER ... Until It Is Applied: The Three Keys to Developing
Future Leaders In Your Company Kindle Edition, HRD Publishing, 2016
11. C.W. Holsapple, “Handbooks on Knowledge Management”, International Handbooks
on Information Systems, Vol 1 and 2, Springer,2003
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Knowledge Management
Human cognition from the technology manager’s perspective;

Knowledge creation at the level of the individual, group and
1 organization; The nature of technical problem solving, 9 20
Formulating knowledge, Explicit and codified knowledge
Tacit, implicit and sticky knowledge; Technological versus

pre-technological knowledge; Experts and expertise.
Managing organizational knowledge, learning and intellectual

capital
Developing metrics for knowledge, learning and intellectual

2 capital; Knowledge quality; Organizational knowledge 9 20
creation theories and their application; Experimentation
strategies for knowledge creation; Knowledge diversity and
knowledge integration; Multi-dimensional organizational
learning; Knowledge transfer; Value-of-ownership models
Page 74 of 85
The knowledge management core process
The Knowledge Management Design Fields; Business Process

Oriented Knowledge Management – The GPO-WM
Implementation Mode, KM Strategy, The GPO-WM Analysis of
Business Process, KM Solutions, KM-Implementation Phase
3 The Fraunhofer Knowledge Management Audit (FKM Audit), 9 20
Audit approaches for the evaluation of Knowledge
Management – The Knowledge Audit (According to
Liebowitz), Knowledge Management Assessment Tool
(KMAT), Knowledge Management Diagnostic (KMD),
Knowledge Aduit(According to Pfeifer), Knowledge
Management Maturity Model (KMMM).
Knowledge Management Tools
Diagnostic technologies and their value

Structuring Knowledge and Information – Definition of
knowledge structure, Search strategies and knowledge
4 9 20
structures, methods of structuring knowledge and Information
Data management, information technology and organizational

productivity; Web-centric knowledge management Global,
joint, simultaneous problem solving in a value network;
Content Analysis
Applications of knowledge management in IT & ITES
Application - Information Technology – Intranets; Best

Practices; Systems Analysis Techniques; Systems Lifecycle;
Design & Evaluation; Knowledge management in
5 9 20
manufacturing and the service sector;Knowledge
Management: Retaining Knowledge in IT/ITES Companies –
Dissatisfied customers – breaches in SLAs; Productivity
challenges; Increased competition; Knowledge scarcity; KM
Solution - Nephila
Final Examination
Page 75 of 85
Introduction
SYS-T5-9 Business Intelligence and Data 4-0-0 3 2016

Mining
Course Objectives
This course provides a comprehensive introduction to Business Intelligence (BI) and Data Mining (DM)
problems and tools to enhance managerial decision making at all levels of the organization and across
business units. We discuss scenarios from a variety of business disciplines, including the use of data
mining to support customer relationship management (CRM) decisions, decisions in select industries.
Syllabus
Overview and concepts Data Warehousing (DW) and Business Intelligence (BI), The Architecture of BI and
Introduction to data mining (DM), Concept Description and Association Rule Mining, Classification and
Prediction and Web mining and Data Mining for Business Intelligence Applications.
Expected Outcomes
1. Use a variety of BI systems and technologies to support decision making in modern organizations
2. Explain key concepts, techniques, and current practices related to business intelligence, data
warehousing, and data mining,
3. Apply the concepts and techniques to solving real-world BI problems,
4. Appreciate the value of BI systems and technologies to modern organizations, and
5. Understand the societal impacts and ethical dimensions of BI systems and technologies.
References
1. William H. Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, Wiley India Private Limited, 2005
2. Michael JA Berry and Gordon S Linoff, Data Mining Techniques: for Marketing, Sales and Customer
Relationship Management, Wiley India Private Limited, 2012
3. Han, Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, Elsevier, 2007
4. Efraim Turban, Business Intelligence: A Managerial Approach, Pearson Education, 2013
5. Paulraj Ponniah, Data Warehousing Fundamental for IT Professionals, John Willey, 2012
6. J. Han and M. Kamber, Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.
7. Mehmed Kantardzic, Data mining: Concepts, models, methods and algorithms, John- BlackweIl, 2011
8. Loshin, Business Intelligence: The Savvy Manager's Guide, Elsevier, 2012
9. Carlo Vercellis, Business Intelligence: Data Mining and Optimization for Decision Making (WSE), Wiley
India Private Limited, 2013
10. Galit Shmueli, Nitin R Patel and Peter C Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence, Wiley, 2008
11. White Paper - Using analytic services data mining framework for classification,
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/middleware/bi-foundation/data-mining-essbase-wp-129552.pdf
Page 76 of 85
12. Yudho Giri Sucahyo, Introduction to Data Mining and Business Intelligence,
http://ocw.ui.ac.id/materials/12.01_FASILKOM/IKI83403T_-
_Data_Mining_and_Business_Intelligence/Lect1_-_Intro_to_DMBI.pdf
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Topics Trimester
Units Allotted
Exam
Overview and concepts Data Warehousing (DW) and Business

Intelligence (BI)
Analyzing data, Raw data to valuable information-Lifecycle of Data -
What is Business Intelligence - BI and DW in today’s perspective - What
1 is data warehousing - The building Blocks: Defining Features - Data 9 20
warehouses and data marts, Virtual Warehouses - Overview of the
components - Metadata in the data warehouse - Need for data
warehousing - Basic elements of data warehousing, Architectures,
OLAP and OLAP Servers – recent trends in data warehousing, Dynamic
Warehousing.
The Architecture of BI and Introduction to data mining (DM)

BI and DW architectures and its types - Relation between BI and Data
Mining.
2 9 20
Motivation for Data Mining - Data Mining-Definition and Functionalities
– Classification of DM Systems – DM task primitives - Integration of a
Data Mining system with a Database or a Data Warehouse - Issues in
DM – KDD Process- Various Models and their significance.
Concept Description and Association Rule Mining

Concept description - Data Generalization and summarization-based
characterization - Attribute relevance - class comparisons Association
3 Rule Mining: Market basket analysis - basic concepts - Finding frequent 9 20
item sets: Apriori algorithm - generating rules – Improved Apriori
algorithms, FP Growth Algorithm – Incremental ARM – Associative
Classification – Rule Mining, ARCS.
Classification and Prediction

4 Issues regarding Classification and prediction; Various Classifiers and 9 20
Classification methods - Decision tree, Bayesian Classification, Rule
Based Classifiers, CART, Neural Network, Nearest Neighbour, Case
Page 77 of 85
Based Reasoning, Rough Set Approach. The role of Genetic Algorithm
and fuzzy logic; Prediction methods - Linear and non linear regression,
Logistic Regression.
Web mining and Data Mining for Business Intelligence Applications

Web Mining - Web mining introduction, Web Content Mining, Web
Structure Mining, Web Usage mining, Automatic Classification of web
Documents.
5 9 20
Data Mining for Business Intelligence Applications - Data mining for

business Applications like Balanced Scorecard, Fraud Detection,
Clickstream Mining, Market Segmentation, retail industry,
telecommunications industry, banking & finance and CRM
Final Examination
Page 78 of 85
Introduction
SYS-T5-10 Simulation for Managers 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course will provide the students a thorough understanding of the systems they encounter in real life
situations, the modeling of these systems for the study of their behavior under different operating
conditions and different decision rules. It also enables the students to think of problems in a systemic view.
Syllabus
System concepts, components of systems, system theories, modelling of uncertainties, random numbers
and variates, process modelling for simulation, simulation study and analysis.
Expected Outcomes
After the completion of course, the students will be able to understand systems and their properties in
a systemic approach. They will be able to analyse existing systems and design modifications in
systems with desired properties.
References
1. Geoffrey Gordon, System Simulation, PHI

2. Narsingh Deo, System Simulation with Digital Computer,PHI
3. J. Banks, Discrete Event System Simulation, Pearson Education
4. Sterman, Business Dynamics, Tata-McGraw Hill
5. Sheldon M.Ross, Simulation, Elsevier
Page 79 of 85
Course Plan
Sl Hours % of marks in
Topics
No allotted Trimester exams
1 Systems: Systems theories, System modelling, system analysis,
system postulation, system synthesis, systems approach to problem
solving, applications in industrial and business systems. Areas of 9 15%
application of simulation, steps in simulation study, classification of
systems, different types of system models. Merits and demerits of
simulation, comparison between simulation and numerical methods.
2 Random Numbers and random variates: Uniformly distributed
random numbers, properties of random numbers, generation of
Pseudo-Random numbers (concepts only) and testing of
randomness, Generation of random processes: random walk (one 8 15%
dimensional only), demand processes, lead time generation, arrival
process generation, service activity generation, defects and
defectives generation.
3 Types of Simulation: Monte-Carlo method, Distributed Lag models,
Cobweb models. Continuous system models, feedback systems,
Real-time simulation. Use of Monte Carlo method to approximate
8 15%
solutions and games applied to business situations. Modelling of
uncertainty in maintenance and inventory systems, stock price
fluctuation, demand process and market price.
4 Dynamic Business Systems: Business dynamics, properties of
dynamic systems, effects of dynamic interactions - learning
disabilities and System archetypes. Modelling of dynamic systems-
tools of modelling - stock and flows & causal relations. Simulation 10 25%
of dynamic systems: Basic models and behaviour patterns, Beer
Game modelling and analysis. Examples of product growth model
and the manufacturing Supply Chain models.
5 Discrete Event Simulation: Next-Event approach/Event scheduling,
Fixed Time Increment method. Hand simulation of Queuing models,
Business systems and Service models, other business system 10 30%
models. Concepts of Verification and Validation of models,
statistical analysis of outputs.
Final Examination
Page 80 of 85
Introduction
SYS-T5-11 Global Information System 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
Upon successful completion of this course the student will be able to understand global information
systems management issues associated with culture, standards and regulations, outsourcing and off-
shoring. In addition, this course provides students with a basic understanding of how the global economy
is influenced by information systems and technology.
Syllabus
Overview of Information Systems in Global Business, Strategic connectivity, Physical Connectivity,

emerging technologies, Managing global systems and outsourcing.
Expected Outcomes
1. Explain roles in information technology adoption patterns across countries.

2. Discuss strategies for global electronic commerce.
3. Identify best practices of global IT.
4. Discuss challenges associated with outsourcing and off-shoring.
References
6. Dorothy E Leidner and Tim Kayworth, Global Information Systems: The Implications of
Culture for IS Management , A Butterworth-Heinemann Title; Textbook edition, 2008
7. Ash Bisaria, What’s next for outsourcing? – http://outsourcemag.com/whats-next-for-
outsourcing/
8. Nigel Chisnall, All sides are winners as IT outsourcing deals get shorter and less costly –
http://outsourcemag
9. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijay Madisetti, Cloud Computing: A Hands-on Approach, Orient
Blackswan Pvt Ltd, India,2014
10. Jawadekar, Management Information Systems: A Global Digital Enterprise Perspective,
McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited; 2013
11. Yi chen Lan, Global Information Society: Operating Information Systems in a Dynamic Global
Business Environment, Idea Group Publication, 2006
12. Thorsten Blecker, Mass Customization Information Systems in Business, IGI Global; 2007
13. Emily Nagle Green, Anywhere: How Global Connectivity is Revolutionizing the Way We Do
Business, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2010
14. Andrew S Tanenbaum and Herbert Bos, Modern Operating Systems: Global Edition, Kindle
Page 81 of 85
Edition, Pearson Education, 2015
15. Mary C. Lacity, Leslie P. Willcocks, Mary Cecelia Lacity, and Leslie Willcocks, Global
Information Technology Outsourcing: In Search of Business Advantage, John Wiley & Sons,
2000
16. Erran Carmel and Paul Tjia, Offshoring Information Technology: Sourcing and Outsourcing to
a Global Workforce, Cambridge University Press, 2005
COURSE PLAN
% of
Hours Marks in
Topics
Units Allotted Trimester
Exam
Information Systems in Global Business
Information Systems in Global Business Today – systems in

businesses, why it’s important; Global IT workforce vs Domestic
1 9 20
Workforce; Global e-business and collaboration; obstacles in
rollout, challenges in Multi site projects; tools and techniques to
increase productivity; implications of poor global information
systems management;
Moore’s Law; Law of Mass Storage; Implications of laws in

2 reducing costs and improving performance; Cloud computing; 9 20
Cloud in multinational enterprise; Firewalls, hacking, ethical
hacking, role of systems managers, system administrators.
Strategic connectivity
Information Technology, Corporate Strategy, and Competitive

Advantage (Interlinked Value Chains);
Physical Connectivity
3 Basic Communications Technology and Concepts, Local Area 9 20

Networks, Wide Area Networks (Packet Networks), Network
Protocols (ISO OSI).
Emerging Technologies
Frame Relay, ATM, VOIP; ADSL, Cable Modem, wireless,

Mobile technology.
Page 82 of 85
Managing global systems
Key business drivers and challenges in the global

4 environment; strategies for success in the global market; 9 20
“connectivity” as a driver for global information system;
software be designed to fit the business requirements Vs.
business requirements be modified to fit existing software.
Outsourcing
B2B Exchange Model; Micro-sourcing; Outsourcing from

Service Provider Viewpoint; Producer/Consumer Perspective
in Outsourcing; Voluntary/Involuntary Perspective in
5 Outsourcing; 9 20
Need to outsource; challenges and risks, advantages and

disadvantages associated with outsourcing an organization’s
IT function; different kinds of outsourcing currently in use in
today’s global economy.
Final Examination
Page 83 of 85
Introduction
SYS-T5-12 Cloud Computing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The core objective of this course is to provide an understanding of cloud computing, and to compare
it with existing technologies. Also it is aimed at gaining knowledge on developing cloud as a service.
Syllabus
Cloud Computing, History of Cloud Computing, Cloud Architecture, Disadvantages of Cloud Computing,
Cloud Services, Types of Cloud Service Development, Centralizing Email Communications, Schedules, To-Do
Lists, Contact Lists, Group Projects and Events, Calendars, Schedules and Task Management, Contact
Management, Project Management, Databases, Web- Based Communication Tools, Web Mail Services, Social
Networks and Groupware, Blogs and Wikis.
Expected Outcomes
On completion of the course, the students are expected to have the ability to design and develop cloud
services. Also it is for making them able to use Cloud Service and collaborate it with various applications
and taking it online.
References
1. Dan C. Marinescu , Cloud computing: Theory and Practice, Morgan Kaufmann, 2013
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C. Fox, Jack J. Dongarra, Distributed and Cloud Computing,: From
3. Parallel Processing to the Intermnet of Things, 1/e, Morgan Kaufmann , 2011
4. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing: Web-Based Applications That Change the Way You Work
and Collaborate Online, Que Publishing, 2008.
5. Haley Beard, Cloud Computing Best Practices for Managing and Measuring Processes for
Ondemand Computing, Applications and Data Centers in the Cloud with SLAs, Emereo Pty
Limited, 2008.
Page 84 of 85
COURSE PLAN
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Cloud Computing – History of Cloud Computing – Cloud
Architecture– Cloud Storage – Why Cloud Computing Matters –
1 Advantages of Cloud Computing – Disadvantages of Cloud 6 15
Computing – Companies in the Cloud Today
Cloud Services Web-Based Application – Pros and Cons of Cloud

Service Development – Types of Cloud Service Development –
2 Software as a Service – Platform as a Service – Web Services – 7 15
On-Demand Computing

Discovering Cloud Services Development Services and Tools –
Amazon Ec2 – Google App Engine – IBM Clouds. Centralizing
9
3 Email Communications – Collaborating on Schedules – 20
Collaborating on To-Do Lists
Collaborating Contact Lists – Cloud Computing for the

Community – Collaborating on Group Projects and Events –
Cloud Computing for the Corporation. Collaborating on
4 Calendars, Schedules and Task Management – Exploring Online 9 20
Scheduling Applications
Exploring Online Planning and Task Management –

Collaborating on Event Management – Collaborating on Contact
Management – Collaborating on Project Management –
Collaborating on Word Processing - Collaborating on Databases
5 – Storing and Sharing Files- Collaborating via Web-Based 14 30
Communication Tools – Evaluating Web Mail Services –
Evaluating Web Conference Tools – Collaborating via Social
Networks and Groupware – Collaborating via Blogs and Wikis.
Final Examination
Page 85 of 85
Programme
Under
Trimester 6
June 2016
Page 1 of 40
TRIMESTER VI
Marks (hours)
61 Cross Cultural Management 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
62 Elective IX 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
63 Elective X 4-0-0 40 60 3 3
64 Comprehensive Project (Report 0-3-9 40 160 6
and Viva-voce)
65 Internship 0-2-3 60 3
TOTAL 12-5-12 220 340 18
Page 2 of 40
Introduction
61 Cross Cultural Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of the course Cross-cultural Management is to give the students an insight into the
implications of cultural factors for business decision making, particularly in the context of the
growing globalisation of markets and business.
Syllabus
Cultural Environment of Business, Cross-cultural Marketing, Cross-cultural HRM, Cross –

cultural Communication and Negation, Cross-cultural Operations Management.
Expected Outcome
On successful completion of the course one should be able to make right decisions at strategic,
functional and operational levels analysing relevant cultural factors.
.
References
1. David C Thomas, Cross-Cultural Management: Essential Concepts, Sage Publications.
2. Rober Rugimbana and Sonny Nwankwo, Cross-cultural Marketing, Thomson Learning.
3. Shobhana Madhavan, Cross-cultural Management, Oxford.
4. Francis Cherunilam, International Business Environment, Himalaya Publishing.
5. Charles Mitchell, International Business Culture, World Trade Press.
6. Philip R Cateora and John L Graham, International Marketing, Tata McGraw-Hill.
7. Charls W L Hill, International Business: Competing in the Global Marketplace, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
Page 3 of 40
COURSE PLAN

No. allotted marks
in final
exam
I 12 25
Cultural Environment of Business Business-culture interface; risks
of self-reference criterion; meaning and elements of culture;
organisation of culture; cultural adaptation; acculturation;, cultural
shock; cultural transmission; cultural conformity; cultural lag; cultural
traits; cultural stereotypes; religion and ethnicity; culture and
organizational behavior; impact of migration on cultural environment
and business; emergence of borderless / flat world and global culture;
business implications of cultural differences.
II Cross-cultural Marketing Implications of cultural environment for 9 20
marketing; relevance of cultural factors to marketing mix strategies;
product–communication strategies (straight extension; product
extension, communication adaptation; product adaptation,
communication extension; dual adaptation; innovation); ethnocentrism,
polycentrism, regiocentrism and geocentrism.

III Cross-cultural HRM Management challenges and opportunities of 7 15
HR diversity; factors affecting international HRM; approaches to
staffing policy; staffing policy determinants; cross-cultural teams; the
global manager.
IV Cross–cultural Communication and Negotiation Challenges of 8 20

multi-linguistic business environment; problems in cross-cultural
verbal communication; cultural dimensions of non-verbal
communication; cultural differences in etiquettes; cross-cultural
negotiations; role of cultural factors in negotiations; stages of
negotiation; pre-requisites for effective negotiation; bargaining power
in negotiations.

V Corporate Culture and Cross-cultural Operations Management 9 20
Corporate culture; corporate ethics; cultural influences on market
selection and supply chain management; cultural environment and
financing strategies; cultural integration of operations; cultural
environment and corporate governance and CSR
Final Examination
Page 4 of 40
ELECTIVES
Page 5 of 40
Introduction
FIN-T6-13 Strategic Financial 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to learn advanced concepts of financial management and
application of the financial strategies for organizations.
Syllabus
Need and importance of strategic Financial Management-Risk and Uncertainty in Strategic

Financial management-financial analysis- corporate Restructuring
Expected Outcome
On completion of the course, the students are expected to be familiar with various strategies
involved in financial management areas and also they should learn corporate restructuring and
financial analysis.
References
1. Rajni Sofat & Preeti Hiro, Strategic Financial Management, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi
2. Jakhotiya G P, Strategic Financial Management, Vikas Publishing house
3. Girish P. Jakhotiya, Strategic Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi
4. Prasad G Godbol, Mergers, Acquisitions, Principles & Corporate Restructuring, Vikas
Publication.
5. George Foster, Financial Statement Analysis, Pearson publication.
6. Suvendu Narayan Roy, Financial Management With New Approach, Excel Books.
7. Fred Weston J and Samuel Weaver, Mergers & Acquisitions, Mc Graw Hill Publication.
8. Pandey I. M. Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi
9. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
10. Sudarsanam P. S., The Essence of Mergers and Acquisitions, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi
Page 6 of 40
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Strategic Financial Management (SFM)-An overview of SFM –
characteristics – scope and importance– constraints - strategic
1 9 16
planning process – components – benefits - balancing financial
goals and sustainable growth – Corporate valuation methods.
Risk and Uncertainty- types of corporate risk-Uncertainty-
Sources of uncertainty-Investment decisions under risk and
2 uncertainty- Techniques of Investment decisions, RADR- 9 22
Certainty Equivalent Method-Statistical Method-Sensitivity
analysis.
Financial Analysis- Evolution of Financial Analysis- Objectives-
Sources of information-steps of financial statement analysis-
10
3 Traditional and Modern approach-Tools of Financial Analysis- 22
Comparative- Common size- Trend- Ratio- Cash flow and Fund
Flow.
Corporate Restructuring- purpose - types of corporate

restructurings- expansion strategies - takeovers – joint
4 ventures – franchises - business alliances - divestment 8 20
strategies – liquidation – buyback of shares – leveraged
buyouts - Constraints to restructuring.
Mergers and Acquisitions –purpose – types – process –

payment options - evaluation of merger proposals -
5 9 20
determination of swap ratios –steps involved in a merger
transaction in India- Reverse Merger-Financial Distress.
Final Examination
Page 7 of 40
Introduction
FIN-T6-14 Financial Derivatives 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course is focused on Derivatives instruments and their application in Financial Market. This course
will also focus on the different pricing models of financial derivatives.
Syllabus
Derivatives- derivatives market- derivatives instruments- different pricing strategies.
Expected Outcome
framework of derivative markets and various pricing strategies.
References
1. Francis, J.C,, Investments: Analysis and Management, 4th ed, McGraw Hill New York.
2. Madhumathi. R and Ranganathan M, Derivatives and Risk Management, Pearson
Education, Chennai.
3. Gupta SL, Financial Derivatives (Theory, Concepts and Problems), Tata MC Grew Hills.
4. Rangarajan K Sundaram and Sanjiv R Das, Derivatives Principles and Practice, MC Grew
Hills,2013
5. Kumar, S.S.S, Financial Derivatives, Prentice Hall of India
6. Pandey, I. M , Financial management, Vikas publishing
7. Aman Chugh, Financial Derivatives: The Currency and Rates Factor, Pearson Education.
8. Redhead, Keith, Financial Derivatives- An Introduction to futures, Forwards, Options and swaps,
Prentice- Hall of India, New Delhi.
9. John C Hull, Options, Futures and other derivatives, sixth edit, Pearson Education.
10. Rene, M., Stulz, Risk Management and derivatives, Thomson –South Western.
Page 8 of 40
Hours % of Marks
Units Topics Allott in Trimester
ed Exam
Derivatives- Types of Financial Derivatives – Basic Financial
derivatives – History of Derivatives Markets – Uses of Derivatives –
Critiques of Derivatives - Importance of derivatives in risk
Management- Derivative markets in India-– Major
1 9 20
Recommendations of Dr. L.C. Gupta Committee-Benefits of
Derivatives in India – Categories of Derivatives Traded in India –
Derivatives Trading at NSE/BSE- Regulation of Financial Derivatives
in India – Structure of the Market – Trading systems
Forwards and Futures- Pricing and Trading Mechanism of forward
contract – Forward Contract concept – Features of Forward Contract –
Classification of Forward Contracts – Forward Trading Mechanism –
Futures – Financial Futures Contracts –Types of futures- Commodity
2 10 22
Futures-Currency Futures-Stock Futures- Index Futures-Interest rate
Futures-– Evolution of Futures Market in India – Settlement – Theories
of Future prices – Future prices and Risk Aversion – Forward Contract
Vs. Futures Contracts
Stock Index Futures- Perfect Hedging Model – Basic Long and Short
Hedges – Cross Hedging – Basis Risk and Hedging – Basis Risk Vs
Price Risk – Hedging Effectiveness – Devising a Hedging Strategy–
Hedging Objectives – Management of Hedge – Concept of Stock Index 8
3 18
– Stock Index Futures – Stock Index Futures as a Portfolio
management Tool – Speculation and Stock Index Futures – Stock
Index Futures Trading in Indian Stock Market-Trading Mechanism of
Commodity Futures-Currency Futures
Option - Introduction about option market-option as financial
Insurance-Payoff and trading strategies- Trading mechanism, of
4 option- stock options-currency options-Option pricing-Binomial 9 22
Option pricing- Black and Scholes Model- Options hedging strategies-
estimating volatilities.
5 Currency Derivatives and Swaps- Introduction about SWAP- 9 18
Introduction to Currency Forwards-Currency Futures-Currency
Options- Currency Swaps- Interest rate Swaps-Credit derivatives-
Exotic options.
Final Examination
Page 9 of 40
Introduction
FIN-T6-15 Insurance Management 4-0-0 4 2016
Course Objectives
This course intends to provide a basic understanding of the insurance mechanism. It explains the
concept of insurance and how it is used to cover risk. Insurance transaction as a business and its
markets are explained. The relationship between insurers and their customers and the importance
of insurance contracts are discussed.
Syllabus
Insurance and its Evolution, Risk Management, Legal Aspects of Insurance- IRDA Guidelines, The
Insurance Market, Customer relation-management and supply chain management, Underwriting
and Settlement of Claims Arbitration, Loss Minimization and Salvage.
Expected Outcome

1. Demonstrate knowledge of insurance contracts and risks associated with it.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of the operation and management of insurance entities.
3. Develop skills to facilitate insurance underwriting, claims settlement, loss minimization and
Salvage.
References
1. P.K. Gupta: Insurance & Risk Management, Himalaya Publishing House: Mumbai:
2. Emmett .J. Vaughan and Therese Vaughan, Fundamentals of Risk and Insurance, Wiley India
Edition.
3. Neelam C. Gulati, Principles of Insurance Management: a Special Focus on Developments in
Indian Insurance Sector Pre and Post Liberalisation, Excel publication
4. K.C. Mishra and G.E. Thomas, General Insurance - Principles and Practice, Cengage
5. Insurance Institute of India – IC 34 – General Insurance.
6. Insurance Institute of India – IC 45- General Insurance Underwriting
7. K. C. Mishra and M. Bakshi , Legal and Regulatory Aspects of Insurance, Cengage
8. Principles and Practice of General Insurance, The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India:
New Delhi.
9. Joseph F Mangan & Connor M Harrison, Underwriting Principles,
10. K.C.Mishra & R.Venugopal, Life Insurance Underwriting
11. Breighner, M., J. Drewes, and G. Alonso. “Understanding Property Insurance Values.”URMIA
Journal (2001): 43-51.
Page 10 of 40
Allotted marks
in
Trimester
Exam
Insurance and its Evolution: Nature of insurance –insurance
1 operations today - role of insurance in economic development and
social security –contribution of insurance to the society –different
classes of insurance – importance of insurance – unexpected 7 15
eventualities in insurance. Types of insurance. Indian Insurance
Environment.
Risk Management: Risk management in Insurance –different types
2 of risks – actual and consequential losses – management of risks –
loss minimization techniques-Management of risk by individuals –
management of risk by insurers – fixing of premiums – 8 15
reinsurance and its importance for insurers.
Legal Aspects of Insurance- The Insurance Contract: Terms of an
3 insurance contract – principles that form the foundation of insurance –
significance of the principles of - utmost good faith- insurable- Interest -
indemnity –subrogation – Contribution – disclosure of all relevant
information –The relevance of proximate cause – the insurance contract.
The Insurance Regulatory Development Authority (IRDA) Act, 1999 –

10 25
IRDA (Investment) Regulations 2000 – IRDA Guidelines for Insurance
Brokers Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) Act, 1992 –
SEBI Guidelines.
The various constituents of the insurance market: Operations of
4 insurance companies - operations of intermediaries – specialist
Insurance companies insurance specialists – Marketing of General
Insurance-Life Insurance Marketing- Channels of Sales. 10 25
Management of insurance companies, challenges of globalisation and
business process reengineering ;Methodology of outsourcing-
Application of IT in insurance business, system controls, application of

ERP for insurance companies, Customer relation-management.
5 Underwriting and Settlement of Claims: Proposal forms – Cover notes –
Certificates of Insurance – Endorsements – Moral and Physical Hazards-
Settlement of Claims: Claim procedure – TPAs – Claim forms –
Investigation / Assessment – Essential Claim Documents – Settlement 10 20
Limitation, Arbitration, Loss Minimization and Salvage. Insurance
Ombudsman
Final Examination
Page 11 of 40
Introduction
HR-T6-13 Management of Creativity 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The success of any creative work depends not only on the ability to find good ideas, but on the skills for
developing, managing and presenting those ideas to others. This course will explore different techniques for
finding and developing ideas, and apply them in common project and professional situations, such as
presenting design briefs to potential clients, pitching ideas to peers or superiors, and winning design or
creative debates with others. Further, students will learn techniques for improving the flexibility and
originality of their thinking and will explore approaches used by managers and organizations to create and
sustain high levels of innovation.
Syllabus
Creativity and concepts, idea and opportunity, ideation process, systematic inventive thinking and decision
and ownership.
Expected Outcome
1. Understand building blocks of ideation and thinking skills

2. Be familiar with processes and methods of creative problem solving: observation, definition,
representation, ideation, evaluation and decision making
3. Enhance their creative and innovative thinking skills
4. Be familiar with creative and innovative thinking styles
5. Understand risk taking, paradigm shift, and paradigm paralysis
References
1. Chris Bilton, Management and Creativity: From Creative Industries to Creative

Management, Wiley-Blackwell.
2. E. de Bono, Serious Creativity: Thoughts on Reinventing Society, Vermilion.
3. E. de Bono, The Use of Lateral Thinking, Penguin Books.
4. E. de Bono, Six Thinking Hats, Penguin.
5. E. Sickafus: Unified Structured Inventive Thinking, Ntelleck.
6. Donald H. Weiss: Creative Problem Solving, Amacom.
7. Ira Flatow: They All Laughed From Light Bulbs to Lasers, San Val.
8. James Higgins: 101 Creative Problem Solving Techniques: The Handbook of New Ideas for
Business, San Val.
9. Scott Shane, A General Theory of Entrepreneurship The Individual-Opportunity Nexus, Edward
Elgar Publishing Ltd.
Page 12 of 40
10. J G. Altschuller: Creativity as an Exact Science, CRC Press, 1984
11. H. Altov: The Art of Inventing (And Suddenly The Inventor Appeared), Technical
Innovation Ctr, 1995
12. Genrikh Altshuller, Lev Shulyak and Steven Rodman: 40 Principles: Triz Keys to
Technical Innovation: 1 (Triztools, V. 1), Technical Innovation Ctr, 1997
13. Tony Buzon, Use Both Sides of Your Brain, Plume, 1991.
14. Karl H Vesper, New venture strategies.
http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=1496217
15. Saras Sarasvathy, what is effectuation?
http://www.effectuation.org/sites/default/files/documents/effectuation-3-pager.pdf
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Creativity & Concepts:
Making a case for creativity; creative thinking as a

skill; Valuing diversity in thinking - Thinking
preferences, cognitive biases of creativity.
Creativity styles; Setting the stage for success - Basic

philosophy, Having a vision, Setting the right attitude,
1 9 20
recognizing and avoiding mental blocks, Avoiding mindsets,
Risk taking, Paradigm shift and paradigm paralysis, Individual
and team work; Creativity in problem solving - Problem
Definition, Understanding, Representing; Pattern Breaking -
Thinking differently, Changing your point of view, Watching for
paradigm shift, Challenging conventional wisdom, Lateral
thinking, provocation (escape, random word), Mind
stimulation: games, brain-twisters and puzzles.
Idea and Opportunity:
History of ideas – development of ideas in history (post-it

notes, coke bottles); Ideation – Basic of human information
processing; Factors influencing ideation - social factors,
2 (a) 5 15
resources, motivation, context, time; Recognizing
Opportunities – how to recognize opportunities; Exploration,
evaluation, exploitation, Factors revealing opportunities -
alertness, knowledge, luck.
Page 13 of 40
Defining an opportunity - objective or subjective nature,
underlying needs and wants, newness, entrepreneurial
strategies of Vesper; Discovery view (building on cognitive
foundations and Scott Shane’s material) - sources of
2 (b) 5 15
opportunities, key correlates with opportunity recognition);
Creation view - building on Saras Sarasvathy’s effectuation
logic, implications on the process.
Ideation process:
Idea-collection processes - Brainstorming/Brain-writing, The

SCAMPER methods, Metaphoric thinking, Outrageous thinking,
Mapping thoughts, Other (new approaches); Using Math and
3 9 15
Science - Systematic logical thinking, Using math concepts;
Eight-Dimensional (8D) Approach to Ideation - Uniqueness,
Dimensionality, Directionality, Consolidation, Segmentation,
Modification, Similarity, Experimentation

Systematic Inventive Thinking
TRIZ - Fundamentals of TRIZ, Trial and Error and Systematic

Innovation, Patents, sources of Technological Innovation; Key
finding in TRIZ Patents Research - Level of Invention,
4 9 15
Definition of Inventive Problem, Patterns of Technology
Evolution, Patterns of Invention; Ideal Final Result (IFR),
Psychological Inertia, TRIZ Process, Cause Effect Chains
Diagram, Contradictions Matrix, 40 Inventive Principles to
resolve technical contradiction
Decision and Ownership:
Decision and Evaluation - Focused thinking framework;

recognising Reasoned Arguments – short arguments and non
arguments; drawing conclusions, inference, or hypothesis;
Assumptions - implicit assumptions, underlying assumptions;
5 Reasoning – reasoning, explanations, flaws in reasoning; Six 8 20
thinking hats; Ethical considerations.
Intellectual Property - Introduction to intellectual property

rights- Patents, Copyrights , Trademarks , Trade Secret,
Unfair Competition.
Final Examination
Page 14 of 40
Introduction
HR-T6-14 Human Resource Analytics 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
This course is designed to introduce students to the concepts of HR analytics in HR
situations. Student should be able to understand the role of HR Analytics and build skills to
conduct a HR Analysis
Syllabus
Introduction to HR Analytics- Environmental scanning- Staffing Utility – Concept and Measures-
Absenteeism and Separation - Employee Health Wellness and Welfare
Expected Outcome
The study of the subject HR analytics should enable the students to understand the process of
conducting HR analysis It should build capability to design & conduct a HR Analysis and come
out with actionable recommendations.
References
1. Wayne F. Cascio, John W. Boudreau, Investing in people: Financial Impact of Human Resource
Inititaives , Pearson Education ,New Jersey,US
2. Tracey Smith, HR Analytics ,The what ,Why and How , 1e Create Space Independent Publishing
Platform
3. Laurie Bassie, Rob Carpenter :HR Analytics Handbook , Mc Bassi & Company; 1st paperback edition,
Brooklyn ,US
4. Jac Fitz-Enz , The New HR Analytics: Predicting Economic Value of Your Company’s Human Capital
Investments. New York, NY: AMACOM.
Page 15 of 40
Hours %of marks
in Trimester
Unit Topics allotted
Exams.
HR Analytics
Analytics-Nature-Evolution of Human Capital metrics-Steps in Analytics-
Role of Descriptive analytics & Prescriptive analytics in HR analytics- HR
Analytics Frameworks :LAMP framework – Logic, Measures, Analytics,
Process ,HCM:21 Framework , Talent ship Framework
I 10 20
Environmental scanning The Big Picture-The value of statistical
analysis-The importance of risk assessment ,Predictive management-
Ready, Aim and Begin
Staffing Utility – Concept and Measures

A Decision-Based Framework for Staffing Measurement, Overview: The
II Logic of Utility Analysis, Utility Models and Staffing Decisions, The 6 15
Taylor-Russell Model, The Naylor-Shine Model, The Brogden-Cronbach-
Gleser Model

Absenteeism and Separation
Cost of Absenteeism - Direct Costs and the Incidence, Causes,
III Consequences, Categories of Costs, Analytics and Measures for Employee 15 35
Absenteeism, Strategies to reduce absence, positive Incentives, Paid Time
Off (PTO)
Employee Turnover: Separations, Acquisitions, Cost, and Inventory,

Voluntary Versus Involuntary Turnover, Functional Versus Dysfunctional
Turnover, Pivotal Talent Pools with High Rates of Voluntary Turnover,
Involuntary Turnover due to Dismissals and Layoffs, computing Turnover
IV rates, training cost, performance difference between separating employees 7 15
and replacements, cost of lost productivity and lost business ,Promotion
and succession planning analytics, Compliance analytics

Employee Health Wellness and Welfare
Logic of Workplace Health Programs (WHP), Analytics for Decisions

about WHP Programs, Measures: Cost Effectiveness, Cost-Benefit, and
V Return-on-Investment Analysis, Cost-Effectiveness Analysis, Cost- 7 15
Benefit and Return-on-Investment Analysis, Employee Assistance
Programs (EAPs) Future of Lifestyle Modification, WHP, and EAPs
45 100
Final Examination
Page 16 of 40
Introduction
HR-T6-15 Human Resource Consulting – 4-0-0 3 2016

Profession and Practice
Course Objectives
The primary objective of this elective is to provide the student with an opportunity to become familiar with
the typical phases in a consulting project with special reference on HR functional specialty. These phases
include: selling a project, entering the client firm, gathering data, diagnosing issues, implementing
solutions and sign-off.
Syllabus
Introduction to Consulting, the Consulting Process, Managing consulting projects, Delivering results and
disengagement, Human Resources in Organization Consulting.
Expected Outcome

1. Learn what a human resources consultant does,
2. Understand how to manage human resources consulting assignments and clients.
3. Understand how to develop their skills to succeed in a human resources consulting career
References
1. Block Peter. Flawless Consulting – A Guide to getting your expertise used (3rd Edition), Jossey-
Bass
2. Toppin Gilbert, Czerniawska Fiona. Business Consulting – A guide to How it Works and How to
Make it Work, The Economist
3. Nair Rajit. Making of a Sensible Consultant, Createspace.com
4. Friga Paul, Rasiel Ethan The McKinsey Mind: Understanding and Implementing the Problem-
Solving Tools and Management Techniques of the World's Top Strategic Consulting Firm,
McGraw-Hill Education
5. Olson, Thomas H. and Poulfelt, Flemming . Management Consulting Today and Tomorrow
Casebook: Enhancing Skills to Become Better Professionals, Routledge
6. Bell, Chip R. and Leonard Nadler. Clients and Consultants: Meeting and Exceeding Expectations.
2nd Edition. Gulf Publishing Company, Book Division, Houston.
7. Cohen, William A. How to Make it Big as a Consultant. AMA, New York, 2009.
8. David Karlson. Marketing Your Consulting or Professional Services (A Step=By-Step Program of
Proven Marketing Techniques. Viva Books, 2004.
9. HR Consulting reference sites: http://www.hr-guide.com/HR/Consultants.htm
10. Best HR Consulting firms to work with. http://www.vault.com/company-rankings/consulting/best-
firms-in-each-practice-area/?sRankID=81
11. The most prestigious consulting firms - http://www.forbes.com/sites/susanadams/2011/08/25/the-
most-prestigious-consulting-firms/#58b2f9b770c9
Page 17 of 40
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimeste
r Exam
Consulting- Firms and Professions: Business consulting; The
changing consulting industry, global trends and acceptance of
Consultants; Consultants - Types, competencies and Values;
1 Consulting as a profession; HR consultancy – scope, application, 4 5
effectiveness; Top Consulting Firms in the world – services offered,
future of consulting companies; The new business consulting
ecosystem – model, drawbacks.
The Consulting Process:
Consulting Models - models used by consulting firms to analyze
clients; The client market - Understanding buyer values, Advertising
2 PR; Client relationship - relationship management, repeated 12 25
assignments, retainer contracts; Generating and winning consulting
assignments – services offering, marketing pitch, consulting services
presentations; Proposals - Writing successful Proposals.
Managing consulting projects:
Process - From diagnosis to discovery – Diagnostic review; Dealing
with internal Resistance; Whole-system discovery; Meetings to
understand the complete picture; Workflow and Business process – 12
3 25
Business Process definition, Mapping workflow techniques,
bottlenecks identification, discovering Gifts, Capacities and
possibilities; Findings – presentation of findings and
recommendations; Project Management – tools, techniques.
Delivering results and disengagement:
Analyzing and framing problems - applying business process
reengineering, smoothening the bottlenecks; Preparation of
Deliverables, standards and compliance with law of the land,
4 12 25
benchmarking; Review of Deliverables – standardization; Meeting
for ‘buy-ins’ – presentation of solutions; Implementation of
deliverables – training, coaching and mentoring; Interim review and
feedback; Knowledge transfer and disengagement.
Human Resources in Organization Consulting :
Specialty areas of HR consulting; Outsourcing and HR – areas for 2
5 5
outsourcing, readiness for outsourcing; HR Consulting firms in India 0
and its future in India; HR Consultant Career graph.
Final Examination
Page 18 of 40
Introduction
MKT-T6-13 Customer Analytics 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course will help the candidate to build knowledge of and develop models that will help firms offer its
customers products and services that offer superior value than competition. Further it will help marketing
professionals understand and evaluate customers and create strategies for effective marketing.
Syllabus
Marketing Management Process and Customer Analytics, pricing of single product and product bundles,
revenue management, forecasting demand, customer insights, customer value and market segmentation.
Expected Outcome
The course is for imparting knowledge related to the various terminologies and techniques associated with
customer analytics, understand the various statistical models that can be used to derive meaningful
customer insights. It also helps analyze how the markets price can be determined and how to forecast
demand and evaluate various the customer and the business based on customer value. It helps develop a
good segmentation strategy based on the understanding of customer lifetime value.
References
1. Winston, Wayne L. (2014), Marketing Analytics: Data-Driven Techniques with
Microsoft Excel, 1st ed. Wiley.
2. Malhotra, Naresh (2015), Marketing Research – An Applied Orientation, 7th ed.,
Pearson EducationVandana Ahuja. Digital Marketing. Oxford University Press India, 2015
3. Joe Teixeira. Your Google Game Plan for Success: Increasing Your Web Presence with Google
AdWords, Analytics and Website Optimizer. John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
4. Damian Ryan. Understanding Digital Marketing: Marketing Strategies for Engaging the
Digital Generation (3rd Edition). Kogan Page Publishers, 2014.
5. Alan Charlesworth. Digital Marketing: A Practical Approach (2nd Edition). Routledge, 2014.
6. Judy Strauss and Raymond Frost. E-marketing (5th Edition 5). Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.
7. Dave Chaffey and PR Smith. E-marketing Excellence: Planning and Optimizing your Digital
Marketing (4th Edition). Routledge, 2013.
8. Matthew A. Russell and Matthew Russell. Mining the Social Web: Analyzing Data from
Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Other Social Media Sites. O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2011.
Page 19 of 40
Course Plan
Sl % of
Hours
No marks in
Topics allotte
Trimester
d
exams
1 Marketing Management Process and Customer Analytics
The Marketing Management Process and its link to Customer Analytics
and Customer Insights. Quantifying Customer Value, Using Excel to
summarize marketing data
10 20%
Forecasting
Simple linear regression, correlations to summarize linear relationships,
multiple regression to forecast sales, modeling for trend and
seasonality, Winter’s model
2a Pricing
Estimating demand curve, optimal pricing, pricing multiple products,
price bundling, optimal bundle prices, demand curve and the 5 10%
willingness to pay,

2b Non-linear pricing strategies for profit maximization, price skimming
and sales, revenue management – handling uncertainty and price 5 10%
markdowns
3 Customer Insights
Conjoint analysis – product attributes and levels, full profile conjoint
analysis, choice based conjoint analysis, logistic regression for 9 20%
dichotomous relations, random utility theory, discrete choice analysis,
impact of price and brand on discrete choice, dynamic discrete choice
Customer value
4 Lifetime customer value, using customer value to value a business,
Markov chain model of customer value, Monte Carlo simulation;
8 20%
modeling relation between spending, customer acquisitionand customer
retention; optimizing retention and acquisition spending, market basket
analysis, RFM analysis. Role of analytics in CRM
5 Market Segmentation
Cluster analysis to segment market, conjoint analysis to segment
market, collaborative filtering, classification trees for segmentation. 8 20%
Application of Customer Analytics in Advertising, Retailing and
Internet & Social Marketing
Final Examination
Page 20 of 40
Introduction
MKT-T6-14 4-0-0 3 2016

B2B Marketing
Course Objectives
The objective of the course B 2 B Marketing is to give the students an insight into the
distinguishing features and strategic dimensions of Industrial Marketing.
Syllabus
Overview of B to B marketing; demand for industrial goods; buyer behavior; industrial market
segmentation, targeting and positioning; partnering/relationship marketing; industrial product
decisions; industrial pricing decisions; industrial marketing communication decisions; industrial
logistics decisions.
Expected Outcome
On successful completion of the course one should be able to make right decisions pertaining to
the different aspects of business to business marketing.
References
1. Michael H Morris, Industrial and Organisational Marketing, MaCMillan Publishing Co.
2. Richard M Hill et al, Industrial Marketing, A.I.T.S. Publishers & Distributors.
3. Michael D Hutt and Thomas W Speh, Business Marketing Management, Thomson/South-
Western
4. Frederick E Webster Jr. Industrial Marketing Strategy, John Wiley & Sons.
5. Frank G Bingham Jr., Business Marketing Management , NIC Business Books.
6. Andrew C Gross et al, Business Marketing, A.I.T.S. Publishers & Distributors.
7. Robert R Reeder, E G Brierty, B H Reeder, Industrial Marketing, PHI.
8. Philip Kotler, Abraham Koshy M Jha, Marketing Management, PHI
9. William Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw-Hill
Page 21 of 40
Course Plan

No. allotted marks
in final
exam
I Overview of B to B Marketing 10 25
Meaning and scope of B 2 B Marketing; classification of business
goods; industrial customers; components of industrial market;
comparison between industrial and consumer market/marketing - why
and what of business marketing; product and demand characteristics;
customer characteristics; product/service mix characteristics; market
characteristics; marketing mix characteristics.
II Demand for Industrial Goods and Buyer Behaviour 10 20
Demand for Industrial Goods - derived demand; joint demand; price
insensitivity; price sensitivity; reverse elasticity; cross elasticity.
Industrial Buying and Buyer Behaviour - Factors affecting industrial
buying decision; environmental factors; organizational environment;
buying centre factors; roles in buying process; structural dimensions;
individual factors; buying objectives/criteria; non-economic objectives;
Webster-Wind model; Sheth model; the Buygrid model; buy classes;
buy phases; appropriate marketing strategies over various buying
situations and phases; business buying process complexity.

III Industrial Market Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning and 8 20
Relationship Marketing
Industrial Market Segmentation - requirements for effective
segmentation; macro and micro segmentations; intermediate
segmentation; nested approach to segmentation; other bases of
segmentation; benefits of market segmentation; criteria for
segmentation variables; market targeting; differentiation; positioning.
Partnering/Relationship Marketing and CRM - Characteristics of
adversarial and partnership models; lifecycle models of buyer-supplier
relationship; stages of buyer seller relationship models; selection of
firms for collaboration; production linkages and industrial marketing;
CRM.
IV Industrial Product and Pricing Decisions 7 20

Product Decisions – Industrial product; product lifecycle; new product
development; classification of new products; product
revitalisation/elimination.
Page 22 of 40
Industrial Pricing - Characteristics of industrial prices; factors affecting
pricing; pricing objectives; costs in industrial pricing; pricing methods/
approaches; new product pricing; pricing over the PLC; pricing
policies; geographic pricing; transfer pricing; leasing.

V Industrial Marketing Communication and Logistics 10 20
Industrial Marketing Communication - Communication mix; salient
features of business marketing communication; major decisions in
industrial marketing communication; trade fairs and exhibitions.
Personal Selling - Types of industrial salesmen; management of sales
force; knowledge/training for sales force; organising sales force;
personal selling process; summary.
Industrial Marketing Logistics - Components of logistics; importance
of logistic; business-to-business logistical services; supply chain
management; types of distribution; channel systems; multi-channel
marketing system; channel conflicts; factors influencing channel
design.
Final Examination
Page 23 of 40
Introduction
MKT-T6-15 Strategic Marketing 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course aims at enabling the students with marketing acumen to formulate a strategy to
accentuate the firm’s performance. The course showcases a right blend of theoretical and
practical approach so as to ensure that the students gets accustomed to the industry standards for
formulating a strategic marketing plan.
Syllabus
Strategic Marketing, Market Situation Analysis, An approach to strategy formulation, Marketing

Strategy Implementation, Marketing orientation to development policy, Marketing Strategy
Evaluation
Expected Outcome
framework of Strategic Marketing Management, Competitive Analysis and Strategic Formulation.
References
1. Phillip Kotler, Marketing Management: Analysis, Planning & Control, Prentice Hall, 1990
2. A. K. Phophalia, Sarita Sharma and G. R. Basotia, Marketing Management: Analysis, Planning and
Control, Kanishka Publishers Distributors, 1997
3. Azar Kazmi, Strategic Management and Business Policy, TMH, 2008
4. Douglas West, John Ford and Essam Ibrahim, Strategic Marketing: Creating Competitive Advantage ,
Oxford University Press India, 2011
5. A. Nag, Strategic Marketing, Macmillan Publishers India, 2008
6. David W.Cravens, Strategic Marketing, McGraw Hill Higher Education, 1999
7. Kaynak E and Savitt, R Comparative Marketing Systems, New York, Praegar, 1984
8. Gergory G. Dess, Alan Eisner, GT (Tom) Lumpkin and Gerry Mcnamara, Strategic Management:
Creating Competitive Advantages, McGraw-Hill Higher Education,2013
9. Porter M E, Competitive Advantage: Creating, Sustaining Superior Performance, Simon & Schuster,
2004
10. Porter M E, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries Competitors, Simon & Schuster,
2003
11. M.J. Xavier, Strategic Marketing A Guide for Developing Sustainable Competitive Advantage, Sage
Response, 1999
Page 24 of 40
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Nature and scope of market oriented strategic planning, Corporate &
1 division planning SBUS, Business strategic planning, the marketing 9 15
process, marketing plan
Market Situation Analysis; Analysis of Competitors Strategies and

2 Estimating their Reaction Pattern and Competitive Position; Market 9 15
Leader Strategies ñ Expanding the Total market, Protecting market
Share, Expanding market Share,
An approach to strategy formulation – Marketing Research,
Forecasting Contextual Possibilities – Trend Projection, Delphi
Approach, Planning Scenarios, Analytical tools – Financial Models,
Portfolio Models, Benchmarking & the PIMS Model. Michael
Porter’s five force competition model – Generic Strategies, Concept
9
3 of Value Creation – Cost drivers & 20
Uniqueness drivers, 4C’s of Strategy, SWOT Analysis, GAP Analysis
– Competitive Analysis – Porter’s 5 forces Model of competition,
BCG Matrix, GE 9 Cell Model as basic foundation of
Strategic Marketing, McKinsey’s 7s framework for analyzing and
improving organizational effectiveness.
Marketing Strategy Implementation – Integration of Marketing
Strategies and their application to different business sectors – FMCG,
Industrial, & Services, Constraints in marketing strategy
implementation, Relationships - with Suppliers, Customers, &
4 9 20
Channels of Distribution, Offerings – Marketing Mix – Segmentation,
Targeting & Positioning, Timing – Timing of Entry and Exit – Effect
of Product Life Cycle on Strategy, Resources Deployment – Value-
based Planning, Monitoring, Shareholder Value.
Marketing orientation to development policy - Corporate strategy –
Distinction between Strategy and Strategic plan - Defensive strategy -
Offensive strategy - Classifications of strategies - Competitive
Analysis - Industry Analysis - Self Analysis
5 9 30
of Organizations.
Marketing Strategy Evaluation – Marketing Audits & their scope –
Measurement of Marketing Performance and its feedback to next
year’s Marketing strategy formulation.
Final Examination
Page 25 of 40
Introduction
OM-T6-13 Logistics and Material 4-0-0 3 2016

Handling
Course Objectives
This course will provide an understanding to the advanced concepts and practices in material
handling and internal logistics. It also gives a comprehensive coverage of both traditional and
contemporary topics in internal logistics and material handling.
Syllabus
Logistics Management, Integrated Logistics system, Logistics Network, 3PLs and 4PLs, Ware
Housing – Warehouse Layout design, Logistics Information Systems, Material Planning, Material
Handling, Transportation, Inventories.
Expected Outcomes
topics in internal logistics and material handling. The course will equip the participants to deal
strategically issues and challenges in internal logistics, international logistics and Logistics.
References
1. Martin Christoper, Logistics and Supply Chain Management, FT Publishing
International, 2016
2. Ronald H. Ballou, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education,
2007
3. Stephens, M. P & , F. E, Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material Handling, Purdue
4. Agarwal, D. K, Textbook of Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Mac Millan India
Ltd, 2003
5. Chase, RB, Jacobs, FR and Aquilano, NJ, Operations Management for Competitive
Advantage, Irwin Professional Pub; 2004
6. Krishnaveni Muthiah(2009). Logistics Management and Seaborne Trade, Himalaya
Publishing House, 2014
Page 26 of 40
Unit Topics Hours Allotted % marks
in Final
Exam.
Introduction: Concepts of Logistics- Evolution, Nature

1 and Importance, Components of Logistics
Management- Competitive Advantages of Logistics-
functions of Logistics management- principles-
Logistics Network- Integrated Logistics system. Supply 6 10
chain management- Nature and Concepts- Value chain-
Functions – Supply chain effectiveness- Outsourcing -
3PLs and 4PLs Supply chain relationships- Customer
services.
Elements of Logistics and Supply chain
2 management : Inventory carrying – Ware housing –
Warehouse Layout design, the concept of honeycomb
loss in goods stacking, method of assigning dedicated
storages; Quantitative flow balance analysis, Material 7 15
handling – Order Processing – Transportation, Demand
Forecasting - Impact of Forecasts on Logistics and
Supply chain management – Performance
measurements.

Logistical Information system (LIS) - Operations –
3 Integrated IT solution for Logistics and Supply chain
management – Emerging technologies in Logistics and
Supply Chain management.
Components of a logistic system – transportation – 10 30
inventory carrying – warehousing-order processing –
Ocean transport – ships – types - measurement of
capacity of ships – shipping
Information.
Transportation & Logistics: Position of
4 Transportation in Logistics and Supply chain
management- Road, Rail, Ocean, Air, Transport Multi
7 15
model transport- Containerization – CFS- ICDS –
Selection of transportation mode – Transportation
Network and Decision- Insurance Aspects of logistics.
Page 27 of 40
5 Material Handling: Material Planning – Introduction –
Factors affecting material planning – Techniques of
material planning – MRP, Inventories – Definition-
Classification of Inventories- Need for inventories –
Merits & Demerits of Inventories, Inventory control
techniques and principles - classification, codification, 15 30
standardization – ABC analysis –VED, GOLF, FSN - HML
Equipments: Cranes, tower cranes, lifting equipment,
series lifting equipment, lifting platforms, continuous
mechanical handling equipment, monorail conveyors,
belt, chain and overhead conveyors. Industrial trucks
Final Examination
Page 28 of 40
Introduction
OM-T6-14 Advanced Project Management 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The objective of this course is to sensitize the students to apply the latest principles of advanced
project management to explore problems, solutions, and best practices in diverse industrial settings.
Syllabus
Project and Project Management, Project Life Cycle, Project Portfolio, Best Practices in Project
Management, Change Management, Team Organisation and People Management, Scheduling,
Controlling
Expected Outcomes
After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to focus on projects to create a
learning organisation which foster excellence in project management by developing and justifying
project management strategies.
References
1. Harold Kerzner, Project Management Best Practices: Achieving Global Excellence, Wiley
India Private Limited, 2015
2. Clifford, G and Larson, E., Project Management, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2014
3. K. Venkataraman, Maintenance Engineering and Management, PHI Learning Private Limited,
2007 Jack Gido and James Clements, Successful Project Management, South-Western, 2002
4. Meri Williams, Principles of Project Management, SitePoint, 2008
5. K.V. Subba, Rao, Project Management, Adhyayan Publishers & Distributors, 2009
Page 29 of 40
Exam
Introduction: Project and Project Management,
1 Categories, Project Management – Definition –
Goal, Lifecycles. Project Selection Methods. Project
8 10
Development Cycle, Project Selection Methods,
Project Portfolio, Project Teams.
Project Organisation: Project Organisation,

2 Project Manager- Roles and Responsibilities,
Selecting Project Manager, Project formulation,
Types of Project Organisations, Conflict 10 10
management, Resolving Conflicts, Client- Values &
Expectations, - Application of Project Management
software.
Project Planning and Budgeting: Planning,
3 Project Identification, Project Appraisal, -
Technical, financial, Legal, Social Appraisal,
Project Profiling Models, Darnall- Preston Complex 8 25
Index, Project Budgeting Methods - Cost Estimating
and Improvement - Budget uncertainty and risk
management.
Project Scheduling & Allocation: Scheduling and
4 Resource Allocation-PERT& CPM Networks-
Crashing– Goldratt’s Critical Chain, Time
Management, Estimate Cost, Budget & Budgetary 10 30
Control, Managing Project Risk, Project
Management & Closure, Procurement Plan, Project
Closure.
5 Emerging Issues: Best Practices in Project
Management, Fostering Excellence in PM, Project
Management Office, Project Portfolio Management,
Team Organisation and People Management, 8 25
Complex Issues in Communication and Virtual
Teams
Final Examination
Page 30 of 40
Introduction
OM-T6-15 Advanced Maintenance 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
Down time of machines at reduced cost by applying proper maintenance management tools and techniques
forms the major objective of this course. Later developments like Reliability Centred Maintenance, Expert
Systems applications in maintenance, Maintenance Management Information system, Predictive maintenance
and signature analysis are included to make the student aware of the latest practices in Maintenance
Management.
Syllabus
Maintenance Concepts-strategies-organization-Reliability-Mean Time Between Failure-Availability-

Design for Maintenance-Replacement decision- Maintenance policies and recent developments in
maintenance.
Expected Outcomes
The student should be able to suggest a suitable maintenance management technique to reduce cost
arising out machine down time for practical situation in an organization. Also the student will be
aware of computer based maintenance management systems and contemporary techniques in
maintenance management.
References
6. Mishtra RC and Pathak K, Maintenance Engineering and Management, PHI.
7. Sushil Kumar Srivatsava, Industrial Maintenance Management, S Chand and Company.
8. Gopalakrishnan, P. Banerji, A.K., "Maintenance and Spare Parts Management", Prentice Hall
of India.
9. Jardine AK, Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability, Pitman Publishing.
10. Kelly and Harris MJ, Management of Industrial Maintenance, Butterworth and Company
Limited.
Page 31 of 40
COURSE PLAN
Hours % marks in
Unit Topics
Maintenance - Objectives and functions– Preventive, Breakdown
I - Predictive Maintenance Strategies – Five Zero Concept - 8 20
Organisation for Maintenance
Reliability of an equipment-Time to Failure Analysis - Bath Tub
Curve MTBF, MTTF, Useful Life – Survival Curves – Failure
2 Time distributions (Poisson, Exponential, and Normal) - Repair 9 20
Time Distribution – Maintainability Prediction – Design for
Maintainability – Availability.
Replacement Decision - Overhaul and repair – meaning and
difference – Optimal overhaul – Repair policies for equipment
3 subject to break down – Group replacement. Optimal interval 9 20
between preventive replacement of equipment subject to break
down
Maintenance Policies - Fixed Time Maintenance – Condition
based Maintenance -Operate to failure – Opportunity
4 Maintenance – Design out maintenance – Total Productive
7 15
Maintenance
Recent Techniques - Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) –
Philosophy and implementation – Signature Analysis – CMMS –
5 Concept of Terotechnology –Expert Systems-Maintenance 12 25
Management Information Systems-Reengineering Maintenance
process.
Final Exam
Page 32 of 40
Introduction
SYS-T6-13 Business Data Mining 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
To develop an understanding of the strengths and limitations of popular data mining techniques and to be
able to identify promising business applications of data mining.
Syllabus
Machine Learning, Data Mining, Concepts, attributes and Output, Classification, Evaluation & Credibility
and Lifts & Costs, Clustering, Association, Visualizations and Summarization and Applications.
Expected Outcomes

1. Understand the basic theory and models used in machine learning.
2. Recognize when machine learning and data mining tools are applicable.
3. Understand and apply a wide range of clustering, estimation, prediction, and classification algorithms,
including k-means clustering, and regression trees, the C4.5 algorithm, logistic Regression, k-nearest
neighbor, multiple regression.
4. Understand and apply the most current data mining techniques and applications, such as text mining,
mining genomics data, and other current issues.
5. Plan and execute successful machine learning and data mining projects, including selecting an
adequate process for your specific task and avoiding the main machine learning pitfalls
References
1. S.K. Shinde and Uddagiri Chandrasekhar, Data Mining and Business Intelligence, DreamtechPress,
2015
2. Hand, Principles of Data Mining, PHI Learning Private Limited-New Delhi, 2004
3. Ian H. Witten, Eibe Frank, Mark A. Hall, Data Mining: Practical Machine Learning Tools and
Techniques Paperback, Elsevier, 2010
4. Berry and Linoff. Mastering Data Mining, Wiley India Private Limited, 2008
5. Kumar, Data Mining: Principles and Techniques, Elsevier, 2012
6. Shmueli, Patel, and Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence: Concepts, Techniques, and
Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with XLMiner, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
7. Delmater and Hancock. Data Mining Explained, Digital Press, 2001
8. Introduction to KDD (AI Mag 1996) (KDnuggets.com/gpspubs/aimag-kdd-overview-1996-Fayyad.pdf)
9. Weng-Keen Wong et al, Rule-based Anomaly Pattern Detection for Detecting Disease Outbreaks,
https://www.aaai.org/Papers/AAAI/2002/AAAI02-034.pdf
10. G. Piatetsky-Shapiro, T. Khabaza, S. Ramaswamy, Capturing Best Practice for Microarray Gene
Expression Data Analysis, in Proceedings of KDD-2003. http://dl.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=956797
Study: Knowledge Discovery in Databases vs. Personal Privacy Symposium, editor Gregory Piatetsky-
Shapiro, IEEE Expert, April 1995. http://www.kdnuggets.com/gpspubs/ieee-expert-9504-priv.html
Page 33 of 40
% of
Hours Marks in
Units Topics
Allotted Trimester
Exam
Machine Learning, Data Mining, Concepts, attributes and Output

Data Flood; Data Mining Application Examples; Data Mining and
Knowledge Discovery; Data Mining Tasks;
Machine Learning and Classification, Examples; Learning as Search;
1 9 20
Bias, Weka; Preparing the data;
Knowledge Representation - Decision tables; Decision trees;

Decision rules; Rules involving relations; Instance-based
representation.
Classification
Basic Methods – OneR, NaiveBayes; Decision Trees - Top-Down Decision
Trees, Choosing the Splitting Attribute, Information Gain and Gain ratio;
C4.5 - Handling Numeric Attributes, Finding Best Split Dealing with
2 Missing Values, Pruning, Pre-pruning, Post-Pruning, Estimating Error 9 20
Rates, From Trees to Rules; CART - CART Overview and Gymtutor Tutorial
Example, Splitting Criteria, Handling Missing Values, Pruning, Finding
Optimal Tree; Other Methods – Rules, Regression, Instance-based (Nearest
neighbour).
Evaluation & Credibility and Lifts & Costs
Definition, Classification with Train, Test, and Validation sets

Handling Unbalanced Data; Parameter Tuning, Predicting Performance,
Evaluation on "small data": Cross-validation
Bootstrap, Comparing Data Mining Schemes, Choosing a Loss Function;

3 9 20
Lifts & Costs - Lift and Gains charts, ROC, Cost-sensitive learning, Evaluating
numeric predictions, MDL principle and Occam's razor;
Data Preparation for Knowledge Discovery -
Data understanding, Data cleaning, Date transformation, Discretization, False

"predictors" (information leakers), Feature reduction, leaker detection,
Randomization, Learning with unbalanced data.
Page 34 of 40
Clustering, Association, Visualizations and Summarization
Clustering – Definition, K-means, Hierarchical; Association –
Transactions, Frequent itemsets, Association rules, Applications;
Visualization – concept, Graphical excellence and lie factor,
4 Representing data in 1,2, and 3-D, Representing data in 4+ 9 20
dimensions - Parallel coordinates, Scatterplots, Stick figures;
Summarization and Deviation Detection – Summarization, KEFIR:
Key Findings Reporter, WSARE: What is Strange About Recent
Events.
Applications
Targeted Marketing and Customer Modelling - Direct Marketing
Review, Evaluation: Lift, Gains, Lift and Benefit estimation;
5 Genomic Microarray Data Analysis – Definition and techniques; 9 20
Data Mining and Society; Future Directions; Data Mining and
Society: Ethics, Privacy, and Security issues; Future Directions for
Data Mining, web mining, text mining, multi-media data.
Final Examination
Page 35 of 40
Introduction
SYS-T6-14 Big Data Analytics in Business 4-0-0 3 2016
Course Objectives
The course emphasizes that business analytics is not a theoretical discipline: these techniques are only
interesting and important to the extent that they can be used to provide real insights and improve the
speed, reliability, and quality of decisions. The concepts learned should help identify opportunities in which
business analytics can be used to improve performance and support important decisions. It should make the
management student aware of analytics which can be used — and misused — within an organization.
Syllabus
Overview of big data, predictive analytics, prescriptive analytics, Introduction to R and delivering results.
Expected Outcomes
1. Help the student think critically about data and the analyses based on those data.
2. Identify opportunities for creating value using business analytics.
3. Estimate the value created using business analytics to address an opportunity.
4. Understand and apply these methods to drive value.
References
1. Bernard Marr, Big Data: Using Smart Big Data, Analytics and Metrics to Make Better Decisions and
Improve Performance, Wiley, 2015
2. Vignesh Prajapati, Big Data Analytics with R and Haoop, Packet Publishing 2013
3. Chris Eaton, Dirk Deroos, Tom Deutsch et al., Understanding Big Data Analytics for Enterprise Class
Hadoop and Streaming Data, McGrawHIll, 2015.
4. Alberto Cordoba, Understanding the Predictive Analytics Lifecycle, Wiley, 2014.
5. Eric Siegel, Thomas H. Davenport, Predictive Analytics: The Power to Predict Who Will Click, Buy, Lie, or
Die, Wiley India Private Ltd, 2016.
6. R. N. Prasad, Seema Acharya, Fundamentals of Business Analytics, Wiley, 2015.
7. McKinsey Chief Marketing & Sales Officer Forum, Big Data, Analytics, and the Future of Marketing &
Sales, McKinsey & Company, 2013
8. James Manyika, Michael Chui, Brad Brown, Jacques Bughin, Richard Dobbs, Charles Roxburgh, Angela
Hung Byer, Big data: The next frontier for innovation, competition, and productivity,
http://www.mckinsey.com/insights/mgi/research/technology_and_innovation/big_data_the_next_fron
tier_for_innovation
9. C Nina Zumel, John Mount, Practical Data Science with R, DreamTech Press, 2014.
10. Jure Leskovec, Anand Rajaraman, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mining of Massive Datasets, Cambridge University
Press, 2014
11. Mark Gardener, Beginning R - The Statistical Programming Language, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2013.
Page 36 of 40
12. Tony Ojeda, Sean Patrick Murphy, Benjamin Bengfort, Abhijit Dasgupta, Practical Data Science
Cookbook, Packt Publishing Ltd., 2014.
13. http://www.johndcook.com/blog/r_language_for_programmers/
14. http://bigdatauniversity.com/
15. http://home.ubalt.edu/ntsbarsh/stat-data/topics.htm#rintroduction
% of Marks in
Hours
Allotted
Exam
Overview of Big Data:
Overview - history of big data, its elements, career related

knowledge, advantages, disadvantages; Use of Big Data in
Businesses - big data in marketing, analytics, retail, hospitality,
consumer good, defense; Technologies for Handling Big Data -
1 9 20
Hadoop, Cloud computing (features, advantages, applications);
Data Warehousing and OLAP concepts;
Advanced Analysis - Linear Regression Analysis, Logistic
Regression, Decision Tree, Cluster Analysis, Market Basket
Analysis.
Predictive Analytics
Predictive Analytics - Predicting outcomes, lending analytics,

2 9 20
recommendation analytics; Quality of predictions, healthcare
analytics, financial analytics; Predictions and skill versus luck,
sports analytics.
Prescriptive Analytics
Testing / retail analytics - Simulating the future, pension

3 analytics; Optimizing complex decisions / salesforce analytics;
9 20
Optimizing with multiple objectives / portfolio analytics;
Decision-support systems -from concept to deployment-
supply chain analytics.
Page 37 of 40
Introduction to R
R Software - Reading and getting data into R – ordered and

4 unordered factors – arrays and matrices – lists and data 9 20
frames – reading data from files – probability distributions –
statistical models in R - manipulating objects – data
distribution.
Delivering Results
Documentation and deployment – producing effective

5 presentations – Introduction to graphical analysis – plot () function 9 20
– displaying multivariate data – matrix plots – multiple plots in
one window - exporting graph - using graphics parameters.
Final Examination
Page 38 of 40
Introduction
SYS-T6-15 Information Security And Risk 4-0-0 3 2016

Management
Course Objectives
The program is designed to increase security knowledge and for understanding the influence of appropriate
employee behavior at all levels of the workforce. This course provides knowledge in principles of Information
Security, not knowledge of specific technologies or products.
Syllabus
Information Security Principles, Information Risk, Threats and Vulnerabilities, Risk Management, Information
Security Framework, Organization and Responsibilities, Policy Standards & Procedures, Information Security
Governance, Incident Management, Legal Framework
Expected Outcomes
1. Acquire knowledge of Information Security and Risk Management concepts

2. Candidate will be able to anticipate threats on information in various levels of an organization.
3. The candidate can find, assess and refer to information and material necessary to carry out a risk
assessment.
4. The candidate can use guidelines and standards to structure the implementation of information security in an
organization.
References
1. Manish Agrawal, Alex Campoe, Eric Pierce (2014), Information Security and IT Risk Management, 2nd
edition Wiley India
2. Evan Wheeler , Security Risk Management: Building an Information Security Risk Management Program
from the Ground Up, 1st edition Syngress
3. Mark Stamp (2011), Information Security: Principles and Practice, 2nd edition Wiley India
4. David Alexander, Amanda Finch, David Sutton, Andy Taylor (2013), Information Security Management
Principles, 2nd edition BCS
5. Sari Greene (2014), Security Program and Policies: Governance and Risk Management, 2nd edition
Pearson
Page 39 of 40
Course Plan
Sl No % of marks
Hours
Topics in Trimester
allotted
exams
1 Information Security Principles

Introduction- Principles of Information Security-Concepts and
7 15%
Definitions of Information Security Principles-CIA Triad-Information
Security Ethics-Information Security & your Business needs-Hi-tech
crime.
2 Information Risk, Threats and Vulnerabilities
Information Risk- Threats- Vulnerability- Business Impact of Realized
8 20%
Threats Vulnerabilities. Threat models- Threat Agent- Threat Action.
Addition of threat intelligence, big data, the Internet of things and the
vulnerabilities in social media and networks.
3 Risk Management
Introduction-Risk Management Life Cycle- Risk Analysis - Risk
Assessment-Risk Mitigation-Risk Dealing Options-Value of
10 25%
Information Assets-Risk Registers Contribution-Information
Classification Strategies.
Information Security Framework-Introduction to Information Security
Framework- Introduction to Information Security Management.
Risk Assessment Techniques
Identification of Risks- Risk Assessment in Business. - Operational
5 10%
4 Assessment- Project Based Assessment- Third Party Assessment.
Reports and Consulting – Structure of Risk Assessment Report- Writing
Audit Reports.
5a Information Security Governance

Introduction to Information Security Governance- Organization and
5 10%
Responsibilities-Introduction to Organization and Responsibilities-
Roles and Responsibilities-Good Principles Policy Standards &
Procedures-Policy Standards and Procedures.
5b Incident Management
Introduction to Incident Management-Concepts of Incident
Management -Techniques for Investigation-Evidence Preservation. 10 20%
Legal Framework-Protection of Personal Data -Employment Issues-

Computer Misuse-Credit Card Fraud-IT Act-Record Retention.
Final Examination
Page 40 of 40

t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Syllabus of Mba Ktu 2016

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Syllabus of Mba Ktu 2016

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Syllabus of Mba Ktu 2016

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different subjects covered in the first trimester?

What are the different subjects covered in the first trimester?

What are the course objectives of Quantitative Techniques?

What are the course objectives of Quantitative Techniques?

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

APJ Abdul Kalam Technological University

SYLLABUS & COURSE PLAN

11 Quantitative Techniques 4-0-0 3 2015

Random variables, Descriptive Statistic, Probability Distributions and Estimation, Testing of

I Random variables: Random experiment – outcomes - sample space 9 15

II Descriptive Statistics: Data presentation using tables & charts - 6 15

First Internal Examination

III Probability Distributions and Estimation: Discrete and continuous 8 15

IV Testing of Hypothesis: Null & Alternative Hypotheses - level of 7 15

Second Internal Examination

V Correlation and Regression Analysis: Correlation - different types of 9 25

12 Organizational Behaviour I 4-0-0 3 2015

Fundamentals of Organizational Behaviour, Understanding Organizational Behaviour, Effectiveness

2. McShane, Glinow, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill

Unit Topics Hours % of

13 Managerial Economics 4-0-0 3 2015

1. Yogesh, Maheswari, Management Economics,PHI learning,NewDelhi,2012

2. D.M. Mithani,Managerial Economics, 5/e, Himalaya Publishing House,Mumbai,2011

Unit Topics Hours % of marks

14 Business Communications 3-0-1 3 2015

Oral Communication, Written Communication, Crisis Management and Negotiation, Business

1. Chaturvedi P. D, & Mukesh Chaturvedi, Business Communication: Concepts, Cases And

3. Rayudu C. S, Communication, 9/e,Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.

5. Madhukar R. K, Business Communication, 2/e, Vikas Publishing House, 2010.

15 Accounting for Managers 4-0-0 3 2015

16 Business and Society 4-0-0 3 2015

The objectives for this course are the following:

Business Environment, Economic Growth, CSR, Public private Partnerships, Privatization,

17 Soft Skills I 0-2-0 0 2015

1. Enhancement of the holistic development of students and improvement of their employability

3. To develop professionals with idealistic, practical and moral values.

4. To develop communication and problem solving skills.

5. To re-engineer attitude and understand its influence on behavior.

2. Lehman, DuFrene, Sinha, BCOM, 2/e, Cengage Learning,2012

3. Madhukar R. K, Business Communication, 2/e, Vikas Publishing House.

APJ Abdul Kalam Technological University

SYLLABUS & COURSE PLAN

Course Course Name L-T-P Credits Year of

Second Internal Examination

V Economic Policies: Privatization-problems and prospects Fiscal policy: 8 20

Introduction to Marketing Management, Marketing environment, Strategic Marketing Planning,

1. Arunkumar and NMeenakshi. MarketingManagement.Vikas Publishing, 2011.

This subject aims to impart to the students:

• Ability to analyze the manufacturing operations of a firm

Scope of Operations Management, Evolution of OM, productivity Management, Forecasting -

V World Class Manufacturing: Principles of WCM- Computer Integrated 7 15

1 Business Finance: Meaning and scope - objectives of financial 6 15%

1. Bare Acts. Government or Private Publications, n.d.

Personality, Self-motivation, time management, team work, emotional intelligence

APJ Abdul Kalam Technological University

SYLLABUS & COURSE PLAN

31 Marketing Management - II 4-0-0 3 2016

1. Arunkumar and N Meenakshi. Marketing Management.Vikas Publishing, 2011.

First Internal Examination

III Dividend Policy - factors influencing dividend policy stable dividend 8 20 %